Class Book_ Copyright^?.. COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE VN'S R LY G. CALENDAR FOR 1918-1919. 1918. JANUARY. APRIL. JULY. OCTOBER. s 6 13 20 27 M "l 14 21 28 T 1 8 15 22 29 w 2 9 16 23 30 T 3 10 17 24 31 F 4 11 18 25 s 5 12 19 26 s h 14 21 28 M 1 8 15 22 29 T 2 9 16 23 30 w 3 10 17 24 T 4 11 18 25 F 5 12 19 26 s 6 13 20 27 s *7 14 21 28 M 1 8 15 22 29 T 2 9 16 23 30 w 3 10 17 24 31 T 4 \l 25 •• F 5 12 19 26 s 6 13 20 27 s 6 13 20 27 M 7 14 21 28 T 1 8 15 22 29 W 2 9 16 23 30 T 3 10 17 24 31 F 4 11 18 25 s 5 12 19 26 FEBRUARY. MAY. AUGUST. NOVEMBER. s "s 10 17 24 M 4 11 18 25 T 5 12 19 26 w 6 13 20 T 7 14 21 28 F 1 8 15 22 s 2 9 16 23 s *5 12 19 26 M 6 13 20 27 T *7 14 21 28 w 1 8 15 22 29 T 2 9 16 23 30 F 3 10 17 24 31 g 4 11 18 25 s *4 11 18 25 M 5 12 19 26 .. T 6 13 20 27 w '7 14 21 28 T 1 8 15 22 29 F 2 9 16 23 30 s 3 10 17 24 31 s 3 10 17 24 M *4 11 18 25 T *5 12 19 26 W '6 13 20 27 T '7 14 21 28 F 1 8 15 22 29 s 2 9 16 23 30 MARCH. JUNE. SEPTEMBER. DECEMBER. s *3 10 17 24 31 M 4 11 18 25 T 5 12 19 26 w 16 13 20 27 T 7 14 21 28 F 1 8 15 22 29 s 2 9 16 23 30 s '•2 9 23 :0 M 3 10 17 24 T '4 11 18 25 w 5 12 19 26 T *6 13 20 27 .. F 7 14 21 28 s 1 S 15 22 29 s 1 8 15 29 M 2 9 16 23 30 T 3 10 17 24 w 4 11 18 25 T 5 12 19 26 F 6 13 20 27 s 7 14 21 28 s 1 8 15 29 M 2 9 16 23 30 T 3 10 17 24 31 W 4 11 18 25 T 5 12 19 26 F 6 13 20 27 s 7 14 21 28 1919. JANUARY. APRIL. JULY. OCTOBER. s M T w T F s s M T w T ¥ S s M I w T F s s M T w T F s 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ? 10 11 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 r >\ 24 25 ■JO 21 22 2ri 24 25 26 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 27 28 29 30 27 28 29 30 31 26 27 28 29 30 31 FEBRUARY. MAY. AUGUST. NOVEMBER. s M T w T F S 1 s M T w T 1 F 2 S 3 s M T w T F 1 S 2 s M T w T F s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 16J17 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 if lo 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 18 19 2" 21 22 23 16 17 18 19 20 SJ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 • • •• .. .... 31 30 MARCH. JUNE. SEPTEMBER. DECEMBER. s M T w I F I S s M T w T F s s M T w T F s s M T w T| F s 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7! 8 a 9 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 7 8 9 10 1112 13 9 10 11 12 13,14 15 15 16 17 18 19,20 21 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 16 17 18 19 20 21 22*22 2R 24 1 25 26|27 28 21 22 28 24 25 26 27 21 22 23 24 25 [26 2< 23 24 25 26 27 28 29|29 30 . . 1 . . j . . 28 29 30 .. 28 29 30 31 30 31 ••I-- ..J.. ...|..|....|..|.. "I" FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 3 INCH GUN 4.7 AND 6 INCH HOWITZER i cannot too strongly impress upon the war department the absolute necessity op rigid insistence that all men be thoroughly grounded in schools of soldiers." — Pershing. PREPARED BY THE OFFICERS OF THE 108th (2d PA.) FIELD ARTILLERY SECOND REVISED EDITION PHILADELPHIA P. BLAKISTON'S SON & CO. 1012 WALNUT STREET Itr ./4-3ff First Edition Copyright, 1917, by E. St. J. Greble, Jr. Second Edition Copyright, 1918, by P. Blakiston's Son & Co. APR -3 1918 r ©CI.A4 92810 TRE MAPLE PRESS YORK PA ^ FOREWORD A Pocket Guide intended to serve the immediate needs of field artillerymen in the Army of the United States, not with the idea of making them experts in any particular detail, but that they may have a general understanding of the fundamentals of their duties. Prepared by the officers of the 108th (2nd Pa.) F. A. ; reviewed, corrected and arranged by Capt. George Roth, this book is pub- lished in the hope that it may furnish some of the information so greatly demanded by our new army. Any changes or suggestions that may occur to officers or others using the guide are cordially invited by the editor, for consider- ation in the publication of future editions. E. St. J. Greble, Jr. FORM OF INDIVIDUAL EFFICIENCY RECORD CARD Subject Proficient Remarks L Anti-gas p p Can- j Gun Squad 7* Ht noneer [standing Gun Cordage Emplacements Dismounted - P. A. Information Serv. ; ? B Guard . .5. p. hrl I? - Gunnery m p : > O P 9 3 Harnessing Hygiene Instruments Horsemanship w / Fuses Nomen- ( clature ^ Material j ' Horse Equip. \ Position & Aim > P. CU s w w Pistol < I Practice I Driver Salutes and Courtesies £ Buzzer Signalling -< Continental ^ Semaphore m ( Pyramidal Tents < I Shelter . TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Individual Efficiency Record Card . , iv Definitions f m i Purpose of Field Artillery . % . 6 Formations 6 Dismounted 6 Mounted 13 Table of Battery Heavy Field Artillery, Motorized ... 14 Table of Regiment Heavy Field Artillery, Motorized. . , 16 General Organization 18 Working Formation of the Battery Details . 21 General Duties of Telephone Operators 24 Dismounted Drill 26 Mounted Drill 32 Cannoneers' Drill 48 Standing Gun Drill. 3 Inch G. 4.7 Inch H. 6 Inch H. 48, 64, 72 Gun Squad ....*' 58, 66, 84 Prepare for Action " 58, 66, 84 Firing. ...-." 60, 69, 87 March Order. . 62, 71, 88 Questions and Answers Anti-Gas > 91 Calisthenics 162 Cordage 107 Emplacements ! 117 Field Artillery Information Service 121 Guard Duty. 128 Gunnery 139 Harnessing 151 Hygiene and First Aid 167 Instruments 177 Horsemanship 183 Horse—Diseases and Cures 210 Veterinary Medicines 217 Nomenclature . 228 Ammunition 228 vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Fuzes 228 Materiel 228 Cleaning Materiel, Harness, Instruments 239 Pistol 245 Rolls and Packs 250 Salutes, Courtesies and Customs of the Service 259 Signalling 271 Buzzer . 271 * Telephone 276 Semaphore 279 Wigwag 285 Tents 290 Pyramidal 291 Shelter 293 English-French Conversation 296 1800 French Words an American Artilleryman Should Know . 300 Bugle Calls : 324 Tables English-French Tables of Measure and Value 356 Range 3 Inch Gun 366 4.7 Inch Gun -. 369 4.7 Inch Howitzer 2>1S 6 Inch Howitzer 378 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE GENERAL DEFINITIONS Alignment. — A straight line upon which several men, teams, carriages, or bodies of troops are formed or are to be formed; or the formation of such line; or the dressing of several elements upon a straight line. Base. — The element on which a movement is regulated or on which a formation is made. Center. — The middle point or element of a command. Column. — A formation in which the elements are placed one behind another. Conduct of Fire. — The employment of the technical means necessary to cause fire of the desired nature to be brought to bear upon the target. Depth. — The space from head to rear of any formation, in- cluding the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man dis- mounted is 12 inches. Disposition. — The arrangement of the elements in a formation. Distance. — Open space between elements in the direction of depth. Element. — One of the component parts of a larger unit — as a file, gun squad, team, carriage, section, platoon, battery, etc. Facing Distance. — About 14 inches, i.e., the difference between the front of a man in ranks, including his interval, and his depth. File. — Two men — the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the rear rank. The front-rank man is the rile leader. A file which has no rear-rank man is a blank file. The term files applies also to individual men in single-rank formation. A single mounted man in ranks is also called a file. File Closers. — The men who, in dismounted formations, are posted 2 yards in rear of the rear rank in line. Fire Direction. — The tactical direction of one or more fire 1 2 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE units with a view of bringing their fire to bear at the right place at the right time. Fire Discipline.— That condition resulting from training and practice which insures an orderly and efficient working of the personnel in the delivery of fire. Flank. — The right or left of a command in line or column; also the element on the right or left of a line. By the enemy's right (left) flank is meant the flank which the enemy himself would so designate. Formation. — Arrangement of the elements of a command in their order in line, in column, or for battle. Front. — The space in width occupied by an element either in line or column. The term front denotes the direction of the enemy. The front of a man dismounted is 22 inches. The front of a gun unlimbered is the direction in which the muzzle points; of a limber or of a carriage limbered, the direction in which the pole points. Guide. — An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom a command or an element thereof regulates its march. Head. — The leading element of a column, in whatever direc- tion the column is facing. Interval, — Open space between elements abreast of each other. Laying. — The process of pointing a gun for range and direc- tion, so as to cause the trajectory to pass through the target. Left.: — The left extremity or element of a body of troops. Line. — A formation in which the different elements are abreast of each other. When the elements are in column the formation is called a line of columns. Maneuver. — A movement executed by a battery or larger unit for the purpose of changing from one formation to another. Pace. — Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time. Rank. — A line of men, horses, teams, or carriages abreast of each other. Right. — The right extremity or element of a body of troops. Salvo. — A single discharge from each of the guns of a battery or other unit fired in regular order from one flank to the other, with intervals of about two seconds. Tail. — The rear element of a column, in whatever direction the column is facing. GENERAL DEFINITIONS 3 Volley. — The rapid discharge of a certain indicated number of rounds, by each gun of a battery or other unit, each gun firing without regard to the others. DEFINITIONS FOR SERVICE PRACTICE Angle of Departure. — The angle between the plane of site and the line of departure. Angle of Fall. — The angle between the plane of site and the tangent to the trajectory at the point of fall. Angle of Incidence. — The angle between the plane, of the sur- face struck and the tangent to the trajectory at the point of impact. Burst Center, Center of Burst, or Mean Point of Burst. — The point about which the points of burst of several projectiles are evenly distributed. Burst Interval. — The distance in the plane of site from the point of burst to the target. Burst Range. — The distance from the muzzle of the gun to the point of burst. Counter Slope. — A slope which descends toward the enemy and is wholly or partially hidden from him by the covering crest of the reverse slope. Crest. — The summit of a ridge. Curved Fire. — Fire with low muzzle velocity, the elevation not exceeding 540 mils. Danger Space. — The distance, in the plane of the slope con- sidered, over which an object of a given height would be struck. Deflection. — The angle between two vertical planes contain- ing, one the line of sight, and the other the axis of the bore. Deflection Center. — The point about which bursts in air or im- pact are evenly distributed in direction. Direct Fire. — Fire with high muzzle velocity, the elevation not exceeding 360 mils. Direct Laying. — Pointing the gun for direction and elevation by directing the line of sight upon the target. Drift. — The departure of the projectile from the plane of fire due to its rotation and to the resistance of the air. 4 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Elevation. — The angle between the plane of site and the axis of the bore when the gun is laid. Height of Burst. — (i) The vertical angle between the plane of site and a right line joining the muzzle of the gun and the point of burst. (2) The ordinate of a point of burst. Height of Burst Center. — The point about which bursts in air are evenly distributed in height. High Angle Fire. — Fire with elevation exceeding 540 mils. Indirect Laying. — Pointing the gun for direction by directing the line of sight upon an objective other than the target, and for elevation by the use of a quadrant or elevation level. Jump. — The angle between the line of departure and the axis of the bore before firing; hence, the difference between the ele- vation and the angle of departure. Line of Departure. — The prolongation of the axis of the bore at the instant the projectile leaves the gun. Line of Sight. — The right line passing through the sights and the target or the aiming point. Mean Height of Burst. — (1) The height of the burst center. (2) The average of several heights of bursts. Mil. — The unit of angular measure, one sixty-four-hundredth of a circle. The arc which subtends a mil at the center of a circle is, for practical purposes, equal to one one-thousandth of the radius. The arc and its tangent are nearly equal for angles not greater than 330 mils. Military Crest. — The line nearest a crest from which all the ground toward the enemy may be seen and reached by fire. Muzzle Velocity. — The velocity of the projectile at the instant it leaves the bore. Velocities are measured along the tangent to the trajectory at the point considered and are expressed in feet per second. Normal Corrector. — The corrector setting which gives a normal height. Normal Height. — The height of burst giving the maximum effect from a projectile. Ordinate. — The distance of a point of the trajectory from the plane of site. The maximum ordinate is the ordinate of the highest point of the trajectory. Parallax. — The angle at any point subtended by any given line. GENERAL DEFINITIONS 5 Plane of Fire. — The vertical plane through the line of depar- ture; also called plane of departure. Plane of Site. — A plane containing the right line from the muzzle of the gun to the target, and a horizontal line perpen- dicular to the axis of the bore at the muzzle. Point of Burst. — The point, at which a projectile bursts in the air or at which it would have burst in the air had it not struck the ground. Point of Fall, of Impact, or of Graze. — The point where the projectile strikes. Probable Error. — The amount of error that, in a large number of occurrences, will be as often exceeded as not. Quadrant Angle of Departure. — The angle between a horizon- tal plane and the line of departure. Quadrant Elevation. — The angle between a horizontal plane and the axis of the bore when the gun is laid. Range. — The distance from the muzzle of the gun to the target. Range Center, Center of Impact, or Mean Point of Fall. — The point about which the points of fall, reduced to the plane of site, are evenly distributed. Range of Burst Center. — The point about which bursts in air are evenly distributed in range. Site. — The angle between a horizontal plane and a right line joining the muzzle of the gun and the target; called also the angle of position. The origin of site 'scales is taken at 300. Trajectory. — The path described by the projectile in its flight. Remaining Velocity. — The velocity of the projectile at any point of the trajectory. Reverse Slope. — The slope which, from the direction of the enemy, is hidden by a ridge of which the slope is a part. Terminal or Striking Velocity. — The remaining velocity at the point of -burst or point of fall. Time of Flight. — The time in seconds required for the projec- tile to travel from the muzzle of the gun to any point of the trajectory — usually to the point of fall or of burst. PURPOSE OF FIELD ARTILLERY i. The reason for the existence of field artillery is its ability to assist the other arms, especially the infantry, upon the field of battle, 2. To enable it to render effective assistance upon the battle- field artillery must be able, first, to march rapidly and in good order and to establish itself, promptly and without confusion, in such positions as will best utilize the available terrain; second, to deliver an effective and overpowering fire upon any designated part of the enemy's position. Thorough training in marching, camping, reconnaissance and communication service, fire discipline, conduct of fire and fire direction, carried out over varied country, is essential to the attainment of these qualifications. 3. So far as concerns the enlisted personnel, the most impor- tant element of a battery's efficiency on the battle field is its fire discipline. The basis of good fire discipline, as of all other matters, is thorough individual instruction, and it can only be secured and maintained by constant and vigorous drills and other exercises. To this end gun squads will be given daily such exercises as will serve to fix their attention and cultivate their dexterity. FORMATIONS A. DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS IN LINE The Captain. — Four yards in front of the center of the battery. Chiefs of Platoon. — Two yards in front of the center of their platoons. The Fourth Lieutenant, When There are But Three Platoons. — In the line of file closers, opposite the center of the battery. The First Sergeant. — In the front rank, 1 yard from the right of the first section. 6 DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS 7 The Quartermaster Sergeant. — In the front rank, i yard from the left of the left section. The Mess and Stable Sergeants. — In the line of file closers of the ninth section. Chiefs of Section. — One yard in front of the center of their sections. Corporals. — The right man of the front rank of their squads, except the scout corporals, who are in the line of file closers of the fifth section. The Guidon and the Musicians. — In the line of file closers of the first section. Other Men for Whom There is no Place in the Squads.— In the line of file closers in rear of the section to which they belong or are attached. IN COLUMN OF SQUADS The Captain. — Four yards from the flank, opposite the center, on the left (right) when the first (ninth) section is in front. Chiefs of Platoon. — On the same side as the captain, 2 yards from the flank and opposite the center of their platoons. The Fourth Lieutenant, When There are But Three Platoons. — On the side opposite the captain, 2 yards from the flank and opposite the center of the column. The First Sergeant. — Either 40 inches in front of the guiding file of the leading squad or 40 inches in rear of the guiding file of the rear squad, according as the "column has been formed by executing squads right or squads left from line. The Quartermaster Sergeant. — Either 40 inches in rear of the guiding file of the rear squad or 40 inches in front of the guiding file of the leading squad, according as the column has been formed by executing squads right or squads left from line. Chiefs of Section. — On the same side as the captain and 4 inches from the flank man of the front rank of the rear squad of their section. The File Closers. — On the side opposite the captain and abreast of and 4 inches from the flank of the squad in rear of which they are posted in line. For technical, tactical, and administrative purposes the en- listed personnel of the battery is assigned to sections. A sec- 8 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE tion dismounted consists of one sergeant, who is chief of section, and all the men assigned to the service of a piece and its caisson, called a gun section; or to the service of two caissons, called a caisson section. The leading caisson of a caisson section is the first caisson ; the rear caisson, the second caisson. The section assigned to the service of the battery wagon and the store wagon and to the service of the tools carried in those wagons is called the ninth section. The section assigned to the service of supply- is called the supply section. With the 3 inch Gun and 4.7 Howitzer, at dismounted formations the members of the supply section, unless assigned elsewhere, habitually form in the line of file closers of the ninth section. With the 6 inch Howitzer, at dismounted formations the members of the Battery Commander's Detail are assigned to the supply section. The first four sections of the battery are gun sections. The remaining sections, except the ninth section and the supply section, are caisson sections. Each gun section consists of a gun squad and a driver squad. Each caisson section consists of a caisson squad and a driver squad. The ninth section consists of a mechanic squad and a driver squad. The supply section consists of two squads. Each section dismounted is formed in line, with the gun squad, caisson squad, or mechanic squad on the right, the driver squad on the left. Men temporarily attached to sections fall in the line of file closers or at such other places as may be designated. Each gun squad consists of one of the corporals and seven (eight for 6 inch) of the privates assigned to the service of a gun section. The corporal is the gunner and should be selected for his qualifications without regard to his rank in the section. The privates are cannoneers, numbered from No. 1 to No. 7. (Nos. 1-8 for 6 inch.) Each caisson squad consists of one of the corporals and seven of the privates assigned to the service of a caisson section. The corporal is a caisson corporal. The privates are cannoneers, three of whom are assigned to the first caisson and numbered from No. 4 to No. 6, and the remaining four to the second cais- son and numbered from No. 4 to No. 7. Movements prescribed for a gun squad apply, with obvious modifications, to a caisson, driver, or mechanic squad. DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS 9 For 3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer ea.ch gun squad is formed in double rank as follows: The gunner and Nos. 2, 4, and 6 in the front rank in order from right to left; Nos. i, 3, 5, and 7 in the rear rank, in order fiom right to left; No. 1 covering the gun- ner. For 6 inch Howitzer, the gunner and 8 cannoneers are formed as 6 4 2 G 40 inches. 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2 G 3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer. 40 inches. 6 inch Howitzer. Each caisson squad is formed in double rank as follows: The caisson corporal and Nos. 4, 5, and 6 of the first caisson in the front rank in order from right to left; Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 7 of the second caisson in the rear rank, in order from right to left; No. 4 covering the caisson corporal. « s 4 1 CC 40 inches. 7654 For 3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer each driver squad of the gun and caisson sections consists of a caisson corporal, the six drivers of the carriages of the section, and an extra cannoneer, No. 8, who is trained as a spare driver. For 6 inch Howitzer, each driver squad of the gun and caisson sections consists of a caisson corporal and the eight drivers of the 10 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE carriages of the section. The driver squad of the ninth sec- tion consists of two of the spare drivers and the eight drivers of the carriages of that section. Each driver squad is formed in double rank as follows: The caisson corporal is on the right of the front rank; the lead, swing, and wheel drivers of the piece in a gun section, or of the first caisson in a caisson section, are on the left of the caisson corporal in order from right to left; the lead, swing, and wheel drivers of the caisson in a gun section, or of the second caisson in a caisson section, are in the rear rank in order from right to left : for 3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer, covering the drivers of the front rank, the spare driver, No. 8, in the rear rank covering the caisson corporal; for 6 inch Howitzer covering the corresponding drivers of the front rank, the caisson corporal being uncovered, and when the driver squad assembles in section he takes post in the line of file closers ol his squad. w s L CC w ws LS L CC 40 inches. 40 inches. w s L 8 W WS LS L 3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer. 6 inch Howitzer. 3 INCH GUN AND 4.7 INCH HOWITZER The driver squad of the ninth section is similarly formed, the spare lead and spare wheel drivers taking, respectively, the places prescribed for the caisson corporal and No. 8. In the fifth section the driver squad is formed with the tele- phone corporal of the battery commander's detail as its corporal; the scout corporals and the signal privates of that detail fall in as file closers of the section. The mechanic squad is formed in double rank as follows: In the front rank the chief mechanic is on the right and three of DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS 11 the mechanics are on his left; in the rear .rank, covering the men in the front rank, are the four remaining mechanics. In a battery on a peace footing the spare cannoneers assigned to the ninth section constitute a squad, which forms on the left of the driver squad. 6 INCH HOWITZER The driver squad of the ninth section is similarly formed, one of the spare drivers taking the place of the caisson corporal, the other spare driver taking post in the line of file closers of the squad. The mechanic squad is formed in line in double rank as follows: The chief mechanic is on the right of the front rank; three of the mechanics are on the left of the chief mechanic in the front rank, the remaining four are in the rear rank cover- ing the men in the front rank. The two remaining spare drivers of the ninth section are posted in the line of file closers of this squad. For formation dismounted, the battery commander's de- tail is attached to the supply section, and this section is formed into two squads in double rank, in line as follows: First squad: The scout corporal is on the right of the front rank; three of the drivers are on the left of the scout corporal in order from right to left; the scout private is in the rear rank covering the scout corporal; the fourth driver is in the rear rank covering the driver on the left of the scout rorporal; the fifth driver is in the rear rank covering the left man of the front rank. The musician is in the line of file closers. D D D Scout Corp. D 40 inches. D Scout Pvt. Second squad : The telephone corporal is on the right of the front rank; the two signal privates and one cook are on the left of the telephone corporal in order from right to left; the other 12 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE two cooks are in the rear rank, one covering the telephone cor- poral and one covering the left man in the front rank. Cook Sig. Pvt. Sig. Pvt. Tel. Corp. ] \ 40 inches. Cook Cook Cook In a battery on a peace footing, the spare cannoneers in the gun and caisson sections are posted in the file closers of their respective sections, and the quartermaster sergeant may be assigned to the command of the supply section. At dismounted formations, if a squad contains less than six men, it is increased to that number by transfers from other squads, or is broken up and its members assigned to other squads and posted in the line of file closers. When a squad consists of six men, both of the interior files are blank; when of seven men, one such file is blank. A platoon dismounted consists of one lieutenant, who is chief of platoon, and two sections dismounted. The platoon dismounted is formed in double rank, with the sections arranged from right to left in the order of their perma- nent numbers. A battery dismounted (3 inch and 4.7) comprises the personnel shown in detail in Tables of Organization I and II; for 6 inch Howitzer as shown in Table III below and Table XVII in Appendix. The battery dismounted is formed in double rank with the platoons arranged from right to left in the order of their perma- nent numbers. The senior lieutenant is, at formations and exercises of the battery dismounted, assigned as chief of the first platoon. The lieutenant next in rank is assigned as chief of the second platoon, and so on. MOUNTED FORMATIONS 13 Chiefs of platoon and section supervise the movements of their units. When only a part of the battery is formed for dismounted in- struction, the word section or platoon, as the case may be, is substituted in the commands for battery. Table III (Corrected to Jan. 14, 1918) Organization of a 6 inch or 155M. Howitzer Battery (Motorized) Captain 1 Corporals: — (Continued) First Lieutenants 2 Signal 2 Second Lieutenants 2 Scout 2 — Headquarters 2 5 First Sergeant 1 24 Supply Sergeant 1 Chief Mechanics 2 Mess Sergeant 1 Saddlers 1 — Wagoners 19 3 Mechanics 4 Sergeants: Buglers 3 Line 8 Cooks 4 Instrument 1 Signal 1 33 — Privates, First Class 45 10 Privates 90 Corporals: Gun 4 „ 135 Caisson 12 Total Enlisted 205 Instrument 2 Aggregate 210 B. MOUNTED FORMATIONS The habitual formations are the order in line, the order in section column, the order in flank column, and the order in battery. The order in line is that in which the sections of the battery are formed abreast of each other in the order, or the reverse order, of their numbers from right to left. The carriages are limbered, and in each section are in section column, the pieces being either in front or in rear of their caissons. In the normal order in park the pieces are usually in front. 14 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE o lOO H F+ox M{N AuBduioo A^ddns qai^ m ^f- i; voo . tct T '09S T\%6 M M M «si^ M M Ph ro o O •09S U_18 CM CM M M J3 ft V *». M a ^ •09s m.L >-< CM ^ 2^fO ro o 4-5 CN CM M M O <* » G O O •09S q+9 MM M CM m ^ H ^IOO CM CM M M ■aJ o ft CO •09S t[ + S H CM CM -2" °' M M 75 M CM CM a • G o o ^gs nq-t 7 M CM h X> ^ ^ ^ ^ M CM CM 03 -M OJ co ft ■d CM '09S p£ MM MCM m oj^^^'-O ^ H CM CM fn i> s a o o 4-> *09S pS m cm ^ V? ro ro ro "S - CM CM ^ ft M M MCMM ^ S< M ^ £. t^-OO M I> tn. auauinjasuj -O^S m rs^ CM sj9^j-Bnbp-B9H Xj9i^g MMCMM £j M £$. lOt- a M X CD G W o H e P 4- V 4J G V> O 2 aiO^ cc} ,3 V3 CD cc C cc c ist Lieutei 2d Lieuter Total ist Sergea Mess Serg Supply Se Sergeants. Corporals Chief Mec d oj a. £c2 c/J O a. CU > 'u'l MHft H CD 4-> bo o bo CM ro , ^"»O v O J>00 Cs O m cm ro rfiovO i>co On O "" i- H \r c> GENERAL ORGANIZATION 15 C — I> N LT. Mi Sa - CS o> — -.- -o E5 — w - E5 — Ifl - - z N W [*] X - - - * o _ - ^ to ~ a CO D > v ~ - b - ■z c ~ - - u c be 5 J > R r: - _ oo DD J a >> w < -2 d 1/3 DO S ft - = 3 u DO to a -.: — — - CO > ££ *H cd - > : <^ £ 2 > i go — : h ? c b g - — — p, - a ^Q » u 6**s i-= — c Si * ►*."« - - = £ = — 4 - DO 3 G G = S3 E — . _■ - - 5acg . £ o ■ - ^. 'a Pi PJ CO in . +3 03 pq *c3 p«i3 Oh •do oph< -M OJ DO CD u bfi bo < 2 Colonel I I 1 1 3 12 25 22 I 3 4 5 Lieutenant Colonel Majors I 3 3 1 3 ...... 4 Captains I 1 11 9 I 2 I 6 12 12 6 First Lieutenants 4i 7 8 Second Lieutenants 22 Chaplain 1 1 9 Total Commissioned Regimental Sergeant Major. . Ordnance Sergeants 3 6 21 4 30 64 5 I 70 10 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 3 12 Regimental Supply Sergeants. Battalion Sergeants Major... . First Sergeant 3 1 3 3 3 8 13 14 15 t6 3 8 1 6 Sergeant, First Class 1 1 Color Sergeants 2 1 1 12 41 1 4 3 1 7 4 37 67 28 2 8 7 74 189 14 34 3i 7 146 22 319 635 28 2 17 18 Mess Sergeants 1 2 4 1 6 4 25 12 28 87 6 6 60 144 12 24 24 6 114 18 270 540 8 7 19 20 3 3 6 80 195 21 Chief Mechanics 14 34 22 23 24 25 26 31 7 146 22 Buglers 27 28 Privates, First Class 29 5 \ 5 1 Privates 993 2Q Band (All Grades) 28 30 Total Enlisted 1230 1531 33 23 1587 31 Aggregate 3 6 235 91 1260 1595 38 24 1657 32 33 34 35 36 Ambulances, Motor, MD. . . . 3a 1 3 Cars, Motor, 5 passenger, Q M C Cars, Motor, 7 passenger, OD Cars, Reconnaissance, OD. . . Carts, Reel, Regimental and Battalion, OD 5 4 4 1 12 18 4 6 4 8 104 4 60 16 93480 3 6 1 13 3 1 1 36 24 550 12 1045 19 4 6 6 4 8 37 Kitchens, Rolling, Trail Type, QMC 8 8 16 3 72 ' '00 84482; 6 6 38 Motorcycles, with side cars, QMC 24 4 4a 108 39 Tractors, Ordnance, 2^-Ton, OD 4 40 41 42 43 44 Tractors, Ordnance, 5-Ton, OD Trucks Cargo, QMC 60 16 Trucks, Ammunition, OD. . . . 9 2V 9550z> Trucks, Artillery Repair, OD. Trucks, Reel and Fire Control, OD 3 6 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Truck Repair, Light, OD. . . . 1 6 3 1 Trucks, Supply, OD 1 13 Trucks Tank, OD 3 Truck Telephone, OD. 1 1 1 Truck Wireless, OD. 1 36 24 342 12 918 36 Howitzers 6-in. or 155 mm. . . Pistols 3 6 181 54 18 73 24 24 574 Guns, Machine Anti-air Craft Rifles. 12 1045 Remarks: (a) Furnished by Medical Dept. (jv) For transportation of Passengers. 16 MOUNTED FORMATIONS 17 £ *i cd S O 03 03 ^,d +» U,.5u_. Sfc o *"+» to . c*d 03 >> 0) «-. r| • rt o rt .5 £ £ _ >> 'd id 9 ^ co ^s°i 8 CO 13 3 d^ ■ ■ bOCOH d +j co 0) O 03 03 03 a) *->,£! o ft ti . C*d 03 d > rt ^ T3 e8!£J ° ^ «5 ft od £ Ox! a MM 4J N 4-5 CO tJ 2 < oj 6 c ,d o 03 d ^03 •MS- 03 .-CT^ - § s CO B co O d halfway pieces an in line wi ers of hi S^c-^d 03*d°^° £ d .-03TJ ■** rt^,d d 03 rj d+» CO . w dcd d to g O d 03-d 03,0. O CO W.+» 03 ,D 03"£.£ 3 J d 5 o rd.W %° 0) -^ 03 B4J > §oS o-d C/2 0) d W g d d *S d <" o 03 d d -Is JT rj 03 03 o»d . «- h^ 03 CO rj 03 rf^ C3 +3 "M O 03 4^rt^ 2 8 P< tfl o »- is S 03 rt o3 03 Tj-4* u rd 03 >;.b° ^^03 *J CO 4-> o E ft^ o ftrd Vh e8S P 4J O .J2^o1 d 03 o.t; •M O d ft — ft ^2 ° co u CO ^ — d en 01 Wh .a TJ to d.M to pl'd rt - d hn +j CJ M S CO d ft" 03 ft ti 03 O CO £ ., e g 03*0 rd Wi CO 03 03 03 Is ... n co t* ! ^^^ 03 o be 03 >, > L. W > 4J r o^ co £■%_ « O J^ ^03^ 03^ .t3*» *" co >>^ d ! ftt?+3^^^ ftC co o r2 * o co d 03 *" . 5/! 03 ft CO u CO ^3 18 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE If the carriages of each section are in double section, the for- mation is called a double section line. The order in section column is that in which the sections of the battery follow each other in the order, or the reverse order, of their numbers, from front to rear. The carriages are lim- bered, and in each section are in section column, the pieces being either in front or in rear of their caissons. If the carriages of each section are in double section, the for- mation is called a double section column. The order in flank column is that in which the sections of the battery follow each other in the order, or the reverse order, of their numbers, from front to rear. The carriages are limbered, and in each section are in flank column, the caissons being all either on the right or left of their pieces. The order in battery is that in which the pieces and caissons of the gun sections, placed for action, are in line in the order, or the reverse order, of their permanent numbers, from right to left; the caissons of the fifth section, unlimbered, one on each flank of this line, or otherwise disposed by direction of the cap- tain or the executive; the limbers either in rear of their carriages or formed at such other place as the captain may order. The sections comprising the combat train, when present, are posted at the discretion of the captain. C. GENERAL ORGANIZATION The administrative duties of a battery of field artillery are too numerous for their efficient supervision in detail by one officer. To secure such supervision the battery commander must utilize the services of his lieutenants. The most effective assist- ance will not be obtained by holding each lieutenant responsible for a platoon, which is not a self-sustaining unit but one depend- ent upon agencies outside itself. The assignment of lieutenants to administrative functions must then be made so as to correspond to the various duties necessary to the daily existence of the battery as a whole. These duties may be classified into three departments: Department A. — The care and maintenance of all parts of the wheeled materiel. Department B. — The care of animals, the inspection, care, and GENERAL ORGANIZATION 19 issue of forage, the police of stables and picket lines, adjustment and care of harness, shoeing, etc. Department C. — The care and police of quarters, the superin- tendence of the battery mess, personal equipment and clothing, and the routine office work. Each of these departments, together with all necessary person- nel and materiel, should be under the direct supervision of one of the lieutenants, who should be held responsible for the work of his department. Except in emergencies the battery com- mander should give instructions affecting any department thru the lieutenant in charge. This division of administrative duties is also utilized to facili- tate the instruction of the battery as follows: The lieutenant in charge of department A is the executive, and is placed in imme- diate charge of the individual instruction of the cannoneers and their duties in the gun squads; the one in charge of department B is placed in immediate charge of the instruction in equitation, in driving, and in all duties pertaining to the horses; and the one in charge of department C is reconnaissance officer and is placed in immediate charge of all dismounted instruction and assists the captain in the training of the battery commander's detail. The fourth lieutenant, when available, is ordinarily the one with least experience as a battery officer. He should be utilized in assisting the others and should be required to thoroughly familiarize himself with their work. In time of war the captain assigns his lieutenants to the de- partments to which they are best fitted, the especial fitness of the executive being the first consideration. The battery as organized on a war footing is shown in the Tables of Organization. It is commanded by the captain. The first platoon is commanded by the executive; the second platoon by the assistant to the executive; the third platoon by the recon- naissance officer, when that officer is not otherwise employed; and the fourth platoon by the lieutenant in charge of Department B. The first sergeant is assistant to the captain, and is responsible to him for the general good order, police, and discipline of the battery. 20 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE The stable sergeant is responsible for the general care of the public animals assigned to the battery and the good order and police of the stables, picket lines, etc. The supply sergeant is responsible for the care of all Govern- ment property issued to the battery. The mess sergeant is responsible for the proper messing of the battery. The chief mechanic is responsible for the good order and repair of the materiel in actual use by the battery. In action he assists the executive. The chiefs of section are responsible to the lieutenant in charge for the good order of all materiel and equipment issued to their sections. They are directly responsible for the service- able condition of their teams, harness, and horse equipment. The gunners are responsible to their chiefs of section for the good order of their pieces and caissons. They are directly re- sponsible for the good order of the pieces. The Nos. 4 are directly responsible to their gunners in gun sections, to their chiefs of section or the caisson corporal in charge of caissons in caisson sections, for the good order of their caissons. The drivers are directly responsible to their chiefs of section for the good order of their horses, harness, and horse equipment. The instrument sergeant is responsible to the captain for the good order of the range-finding, fire-control, and signal equip- ment. The telephone corporal is responsible to the instrument ser- geant for the good order of all the signal equipment of the battery. Members of the special details are responsible to the tele- phone corporal for the good order of articles of signal equipment, to the instrument sergeant for the good order of other articles of the range-finding and fire-control equipment issued to them. Individuals are directly responsible for the good order of all articles of personal equipment issued to them. Men assigned to sections are responsible to their chiefs of section for the good order of such articles. It is the duty of all men to report at once to the noncommis- sioned officer, or officer to whom they are responsible, any injury to the materiel or any deficiency in the equipment. GENERAL ORGANIZATION 21 On subdivision for action the battery is divided into the firing battery and the combat train. The firing battery com- prises the first five sections. It is under the immediate command of the captain. The combat train comprises the sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth sections. It is commanded by the lieutenant in charge of Department B. He is assisted by the stable sergeant. WORKING FORMATION OF THE BATTERY DETAILS Scouts (3 enlisted)- Detail (10 enlisted)- Reserve Detail (9 enlisted) — R.O. Scout No. 2 Sig. Sgt. R. F. Corp. Operator No. 1 Horseholder No. 1 Leader P. A. 'B.C. Scissors Op. Linesman No. 2 Horseholder No. 2 R. C. Corp. Operator No. 4 o o B. C. o Bugler o o Scout No. 1. o o Inst. Sgt. o o Aim. Cir. Opr. o o Sig. Corp. o o Operator No. 2 o First Sergeant o o Pack Animal, o o Scissors Corp. o o Linesman No. 1 o o Operator No. 3 o o o Driver Reel cart Operator No. 5 on 5th* Section Caisson. The' Battery Commander is always attended by his bugler, as orderly and horseholder. The other men are divided into parties as follows. 1. Scouts. — Reconnaissance Officer and the two scouts. This party accompanies the Battery Commander whenever he leaves the battery, unless expressly ordered otherwise. Its primary purpose is general reconnaissance, not technical prep- aration of a position. 2. Detail. — First Sergeant, Instrument Sergeant, Range Finder Operator, Aiming Circle Operator, Signal Sergeant, Signal Cor- poral, Operators No. 1 and No. 2, leader pack animal, horseholder No. 1. This party goes with the Battery Commander only if expressly ordered; if not, the Battery Commander sends a scout for it as soon as he foresees the necessity for its use. It always marks the 22 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE route for the battery; in battalion, the detail of the rear battery is used first. Its purpose is to make such preparation of the posi- tion as is essential before the arrival of the guns, and establish the primary communications. 3. Reserve Detail. — 2 Telescope observers, 2 linesmen, 3 tele- phone operators, 1 horseholder, reel cart with corporal and driver. This party remains at the head of the firing battery unless called for ; in whole or in part Its duties are to maintain and extend the system of observation and communication already established. Instrument Sergeant. 1. Forms and commands the Detail. 2. In general charge of instruments and equipment used by instrument detail. 3. Keeps the detail under cover when approaching, or in the vicinity of the position. 4. Asks B. C, if not already informed, as to: — (a) The situation. (b) The limits of the sector, with the location of the enemy and of friendly troops. (c) The reference point or points. (d) The target, or targets. (e) The approximate location of the B. C. Station. (0 The approximate position of the guns. (g) The aiming point. (k) Any instructions relative to artificial cover for the station. 5. Directs the setting up and use of the instruments and with the ranges and angles measured, computes the firing data. 6. During firing, keeps, or causes to be kept, the firing record and renders assistance in observing the fire and in collecting, recording and transmitting data. Signal Sergeant. 1. Has charge of, and supervises the use of the equipment of the Signal Detail. 2 Asks the B.C. what kind of communication to establish, and is responsible that same is established quickly and efficiently. 3. Makes such tests and repairs to the Signal Equipment as may be authorized, and reports to the B. C. any trouble he can- not remedy. GENERAL ORGANIZATION 23 4. Reports when communication ordered has been established and any breaks occurring. Signal Corporal. 1. Under the supervision of the Signal Sergeant, has charge of communications at B. C. Station. Reports all trouble he can- not remedy to Signal Sergeant or B. C. 2. Asks Signal Sergeant as to communication desired with the Battalion Station, and establishes same. 3. Acts as operator at B C. Station on the Battalion line. 4. Reports to Signal Sergeant when communication is estab- lished with Battalion, and any breaks that may occur. 5. Acts as route marker. Scissors Corporal. 1. Sets up, operates, and cares for one of the B. C telescopes. 2. Asks Instrument Sergeant for information required. 3. Acts as observer at auxiliary station. 4. Observes the sector, keeps the target under observation, reporting changes of movement or effect. 5. Assists in recording and transmitting data. Range Finder Corporal. 1. Sets up, operates, and cares for the Range Finding Instru- ment. 2. Asks Instrument Sergeant for information required. 3. Finds the ranges required. 4. Acts as route marker. Aiming Circle Operator. 1 Sets up, operates, and cares for the aiming circle. 2. Asks Instrument Sergeant for information required, 3. Measures horizontal and vertical angles to designation objectives. 4. Acts as route marker. Operator B. C. Scissors. 1 Sets up, operates, and cares for one of the B. C. Telescopes when it is not in use by the B.C., observes the sector. 2. Asks Instrument Sergeant for information required. 3. Keeps such data as may be required by the B. C. or Instru- ment Sergeant. Scout No. 1. 1 Acts as gun marker, 24 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE • 2. Asks B. C. as to: — (a) Direction of fire. (b) Aiming point. (c) Position of which gun he is to mark. 3. As soon as guns are in position, reports at the B.C. Station, and is available for such duty as B. C. may direct. Scout No. 2. 1. Asks Instrument Sergeant for information required. 2. Draws panoramic sketch or map of sector. 3. Assists R. O. on any supplementary reconnaissance. 4. When not otherwise engaged, observes the sector, reporting any change, any movement or effect. GENERAL DUTIES OF TELEPHONE OPERATORS 1. Ask Signal Sergeant as to communication desired. 2. Assist in establishing such communication. 3. Report to immediate superior when communication is esta- blished, or when any breaks occur. Operator No. 1. 1. Acts as operator at firing battery The line B. C. Station to Guns may be laid by either Op. No. 1 or Op. No 2 as may be most convenient. 2. Acts as route maker Operator No. 2. 1 Acts as operator at B. C. Station on Battery Line. 2. Acts as route marker. Operator No. 3. 1. Acts as operator wherever required. Operator No. 4. 1. Acts as operator wherever required. 2. Operates brake and reel mechanism on reel cart. Operator No. 5. 1. Acts as recorder at firing battery and as relief for Operator No. 1. Linesman No. 1. 1. Acts as line guard. 2. Repairs and relays the lines, under directions of Signal Sergeant. 3. Carries oral or written messages. GENERAL ORGANIZATION 25 Linesman No. 2. 1. Same as Linesman No. 1. First Sergeant. 1. Marks the route. 2. Asks B. C. as to: — (a) Position of combat train, whenever battery combat train is posted separately. (b) Gait for the battery to use in approaching the position, (r) Any necessary instructions relative to the formation and manner in which the battery should approach and occupy the position. (d) The aiming point. (e) The position of the limbers. 3. Guides battery to gun position. Horseholder No. 1. 1. Holds horses of following men: (a) Signal Sergeant (c) Operator Xo. 1. (b) Signal Corporal. (d) Operator No 2. 2. Conducts led horses to position indicated by bugler. Horseholder No. 2. 1. Holds horse of any man of Reserve Detail who may be needed for work near B.C. Station or the firing battery. Leader of Pack Animal. 1. Leads pack animal. 2. Holds horses of following men: — (a) Instrument Sergeant. (b) R. F. Corporal. (c) Aiming Circle Operator. Bugler. 1. Orderly for B. C. 2. Asks B. C. as to position of led horses and assists in conduct- ing them to position indicated. Agent. 1. Acts as agent between the Battalion Commander and Bat- tery Commander. DISMOUNTED DRILL POSITION OF THE SOLDIER Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conforma- tion of the man permits. Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 . Knees straight without stiffness. Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally. Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumbs along the seams of the trousers. Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front. Weight of the body sustained principally upon the balls' of the feet, heels resting lightly on the ground. Squad movements same as infantry. TO FORM THE BATTERY At the sounding of assembly, the first sergeant facing the bat- tery and 6 yards in front of where the center is to be, commands: 1. FALL IN; 2. CALL ROLLS; 3. REPORT. At the command fall in, the gunners, caisson corporals, tele- phone corporal, and chief mechanic place themselves on the line facing to the front in their proper order, at sufficient distance apart for the formation of their squads; each squad forms on its corporal; the chiefs of section take their posts facing their sec- tions. The assembly having ceased, the first sergeant causes the section to close to the right, if necessary. At the command call rolls, the chiefs of sections call the rolls and then face to the front. At the command report, the chief of the first section salutes 26 DISMOUNTED DRILL 27 and reports: First section, present; or First section, Corporal and Private(s) are absent. The first sergeant having received and verified this report, returns the salute. The chief of the second section then reports in like manner, and so on. Men who are known to be absent by proper authority are not reported absent by the chiefs of section. After receiving the reports, the first sergeant faces about, salutes the captain, and reports: Sir, the battery is present or accounted for; or, Sir, (so many), noncommissioned officers or privates are absent. The first sergeant then takes his post. The captain places himself 12 yards in front of the center of the battery, superintends the formation, and receives the report of the first sergeant, whose salute he returns. The lieutenants take their posts as soon as the first sergeant has reported. TO DISMISS THE BATTERY Being in line at a halt: The captain directs the first sergeant: Dismiss the battery, and returns the salute of the first sergeant. The officers fall out; the first sergeant salutes, steps 3 yards to the front, faces to the left, and commands: DISMISSED. In exceptional cases the battery may be dismissed from any formation, either at a halt or marching. TO OPEN RANKS Being in line at a halt: 1. Open ranks ; 2. MARCH ; 3. FRONT. At the command march the front rank executes right dress ; the rear rank and the file closers march backward four steps, halt, and execute right dress; the fourth lieutenant, when only three platoons are present, marches backward 4 steps and halts; the chiefs of platoon step forward 2 yards, the chiefs of section 1 yard, and all dress to the right. The captain goes to the right flank of the battery and aligns the chiefs of platoons, the chiefs of section, the front rank, the rear rank, and the file closers. Before giving the command front the captain places himself in front of the post of the first sergeant and on a line with the chiefs of platoon and faces to the left. At the command front 28 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE all the men turn their heads and eyes to the front, and those in ranks drop the left arm. After the command front has been executed, the captain places himself 6 yards in front of the center of the battery, facing to the front. TO CLOSE RANKS Being at open ranks: i. Close ranks; 2. MARCH. At the command march, the lieutenants and chiefs of section face about and resume their posts in line; the rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the file closers close to 2 yards from the rear rank; the captain then takes his post in line. ALIGNMENTS The alignments are executed as prescribed for the squad; the base squad may, if desired, be established instead of the base file. In aligning the battery, the captain places himself in pro- longation of the line, 2 yards from and facing the flank toward which the alignment is made; after commanding FRONT, he resumes his post. GUIDES In marching in line the guide is the right or left man of the front rank. In marching in column of squads the guide is the first sergeant or quartermaster sergeant if in ranks; otherwise the guide of the leading squad. If the guide is changed while marching in column of squads, the captain, chiefs of platoon, chiefs of section, and file closers change to the other flank by darting through the column or passing around the ends of the column, as may be most con- venient . When line is formed from column of squads, the captain, chiefs of platoon and of section, file closers, the first sergeant, and the quartermaster sergeant take their posts in line in the most convenient way without interfering with the movements of the squads. Whenever the battery in line is faced about or marched to the rear, all men in the front rank, not covered, step into the DISMOUNTED DRILL 29 new front rank; the first sergeant and the quartermaster ser- geant place themselves in line with the new front rank, but do not change to the opposite flank. The chiefs of platoon and section and the file closers maintain their relative positions. TO FORM OR MARCH IN COLUMN OF SQUADS FROM LINE Being in line: i. Squads right (left); 2. MARCH; or 1 Squads right (left) ; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery; 4. HALT. Each squad executes the movement.' The chiefs of platoon and of section and the file closers take their places in column of squads. The guide of each rank preserves the trace and step of the preceding guide at a distance of 40 inches. TO CHANGE DIRECTION WHILE IN COLUMN OF SQUADS Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. Column right (left) ; 2. MARCH. At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns to the right on a moving pivot; the other ranks, without command, turn successively on the same ground and in a similar manner. Column half right (half left) is similarly executed. TO FORM COLUMN OF SQUADS FROM LINE AND CHANGE DIRECTION Being in line: 1. Squads right (left), column right (left); 2. MARCH; or, 1. Right (Left) by squads; 2. MARCH. In the first, case the right squad initiates the column right as soon as it has completed the squad right. In the second case, at the command march, the right squad marches forward ; the remainder of the battery executes squads right, column left on the same ground as the right squad, and follows the right squad. The right squad in moving oft takes four short steps and then the full step. TO FORM LINE FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS Being in column of squads, to form line to the flank: 1. Squads right (left); 2. MARCH; 3. Guide right (left); or, 1. Squads right (left) ; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery; 4. HALT. 30 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Executed by each squad. The chiefs of platoon and section, file closers, etc., take their posts in line in the most convenient manner. Being in column of squads, to form line on right or left: i. On right (left) into line; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery ; 4. HALT; 5. FRONT. At the first command the corporal of the leading squad com- mands: Right turn. The corporals of the other squads com- mand: Forward, if at a halt. At the second command the lead- ing squad turns to the right on moving pivot. The command halt is given when the leading squad has advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts; its corporal then com- mands: Right (left) dress. The squads in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, when opposite the right of its place in line on the left of the preceding squads, executes right turn at the command of its corporal; each is halted on the line at the command of its cor- poral, who then commands: Right dress. All dress on the first squad in line. If executed in double time, all the squads march in double time until halted. Being in column of squads to form line to the front: 1. Right (Left) front into line; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery; 4. HALT; 5. FRONT. At the first command the corporals of the squads in rear of the leading one command: Right oblique. If at a halt, the cor- poral of the leading squad commands: Forward. At the second command the leading squad moves straight forward; the rear squads oblique as indicated. The command halt is given when the leading squad has advanced the desired distance; it halts; its corporal then commands: Left dress. Each of the rear squads when opposite its place in line resumes the original direc- tion at the command of its corporal; each is halted on the line at the command of its corporal, who then commands: Left dress. All dress on the first squad in line. If executed in double time, all the squads march in double time until halted. DISMOUNTED DRILL 31 TO FORM FLANK COLUMN OF FILES FROM LINE Movements in flank column have no disciplinary value. Their use should be limited to the rare occasions necessitating a narrow front of the column. They are executed in quick time only. Being in line at a halt: i. Right (Left) ; 2. FACE ; 3. Forward ; 4. MARCH. At the second command all face to the right. At the fourth command all take the full step. Individuals not in the two ranks move so as to preserve the relative positions they had in line. ROUTE ORDER AND AT EASE Marching in column of squads: 1. Route order; 2. MARCH; or, 1. At ease ; 2. MARCH. Officers carry their sabers at will or in the scabbard; the men retain their positions in ranks, but are not required to keep step. If the command be route order, the men are permitted to talk; if the command be at ease, silence is preserved. To resume the cadenced step: 1. Battery; 2. ATTENTION. If the command halt be given while marching at route order, the men remain at rest in ran.ks; if while marching at ease, they remain at ease. Route order and at ease are not used while marching in double time. The use of dismounted exercises being limited, the marching of* the battery dismounted at route order or at ease should be exceptional. MOUNTED DRILL POSITION OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED The position described below should be considered a standard toward which all riders should gradually approximate. The buttocks bearing equally upon the saddle and as far for- ward as possible. The thighs turned without constraint upon their flat side, clasping the horse evenly and stretched only by their own weight and that of the lower legs. The knees bent and flexible. The lower legs falling naturally, the calves in contact with the horse without pressure; the toes dropping naturally when the rider is without stirrups. The back supple and never hollowed. The upper part of the body easy, free, and erect. The shoulders thrown back evenly. The arms free, the elbows falling naturally. The head erect without stiffness. Eyes alert and sweeping the horizon. The reins held as heretofore prescribed. This position may be modified by the instructor to suit vary- ing conditions and unusual conformations. TO FORM THE BATTERY IN THE PARK The battery, dismounted, being formed on the battery parade, the first sergeant commands: Drivers to the front. The chiefs of section and driver squads step 6 yards to the front; the chiefs of section place themselves in front, and the individually mounted men in the line of file closers of the squads thus formed. The first sergeant sees that suitable cannoneers are detailed to replace absent drivers, closes the driver squads toward either flank, and directs the senior chief of section to march them to the horses. 32 MOUNTED DRILL 33 On arrival at the stable or picket line, the chief of section in charge halts the drivers and commands: Harness. The drivers fall out and harness under the supervision of their respective chiefs. Chiefs of section and other individually mounted men saddle their horses while the drivers harness. The drivers having been marched off, the first sergeant closes the gun squads to either flank and directs the senior gunner to march them to the park. The senior gunner, on arrival at the park, posts the gun squads with their carriages. If the carriages are in a gun shed, the senior gunner halts the column in front of the building, gives the necessary directions for the formation of the park, and commands: Form park. The cannoneers fall out, the carriages are run out by hand and formed in park. The park being in order, the senior gunner posts the cannon- eers at the carriages limbered. He then commands: Put your carriages in order. At that command each gunner and No. 4, under the supervision of the chief mechanic, prepare the car- riages for hitching in. The remaining cannoneers either assist in this work or are sent to assist in policing the picket line or stables, as may be directed. They are returned to their posts by the time the teams are hitched. When the horses are harnessed, the first sergeant designates the place of formation and commands : LEAD OUT ; or, 1 . First (such) section; 2. LEAD OUT. The sections lead out and form in column. The first sergeant mounts the drivers, conducts the column to the park, posts the teams with their carriages, and causes them to be hitched. If the park is near by, the first sergeant, as soon as the horses are harnessed, commands: 1. To your carriages; 2. LEAD OUT; or, 2. First (such) section; 3. LEAD OUT. *He then gives the commands for hitching as before. In all cases the first sergeant sees that the cannoneers perform their duties in the park and that the drivers harness, lead out, and hitch with the least practicable delay and without noise or confusion. In the field when the horses are harnessed at the carriages the duties are performed in a similar manner. The senior chief of section, on the arrival of the drivers at the picket line, commands: 3 34 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Harness and hitch. The teams are hitched by the drivers, under the direction of their chiefs of section, according to the methods heretofore prescribed. In horse batteries, as soon as the park is formed and the car- riages made ready for use, the senior gunner directs the gunners to march their squads to the horses and have the horses saddled. The squads may be required to lead out with the teams of their sections. In this case they form in rear of the teams and are marched to the park with them, each gunner posting his squad in rear of its caisson as the teams of the section are being posted with their carriages. If the squads are not ready when the teams are harnessed the first sergeant may direct that the teams be led out and posted as above prescribed; when ready each squad is then led out and formed by its gunner, marched to the park, and posted. The lieutenants reach the park or the stables at such time as is necessary for them to superintend the proper details of their departments. They take their posts as chiefs of platoon, as soon as the teams are posted with the carriages, and in time to superintend the hitching. Each chief of section, as soon as his teams are hitched, makes a minute inspection of his section and reports the result to his chief of platoon. Each chief of platoon, having received the reports of his chiefs of section and made a general inspection of the platoon, com- mands: REST. The special details and the other individually mounted men take their posts during the hitching. The buglers report to the captain at such time and place as he may direct. Upon the approach of the captain the chiefs of platoon call their platoons to attention, and as soon as the captain takes his place in front, report in succession from right to left; (Such) •platoon in order, sir; or if anything be missing or out of order they so report. As soon as the chiefs of platoon have reported, the first ser- geant reports to the captain. MOUNTED DRILL 35 TO DISMISS THE BATTERY As soon as the battery is parked each chief of section makes a minute inspection of his section and reports all losses or injuries to the chief of platoon; the chiefs of platoon then report in suc- cession from right to left: (Such) platoon in order, sir; or if any- thing be missing or out of order they so report. The reports having been made, the captain gives such instruc- tions as may be necessary, and directs the first sergeant : Dismiss the battery. The officers return saber, if drawn, and fall out. The first sergeant commands: i . Cannoneers ; 2. UNHITCH; or, 1. Drivers; 2. UNHITCH; 3. UNHOOK TRACES. The special details and other individually mounted men leave the park and return their horses to the stable or picket line. The teams being unhitched, the first sergeant marches them to the stable or picket line and commands: FALL OUT.. Each chief of section thereupon takes charge of his section, dismounts . the drivers, causes them to unhook traces, if necessary, and lead to their places for unharnessing. If the stables or picket lines are close by, the first sergeant commands: 1. By the right (left, or right and left); 2. FALL OUT, and the drivers lead at once to their stalls or to their places on the picket line. The lieutenant in charge of Department A, assisted by the chief mechanic, superintends the work of the cannoneers in car- ing for the wheeled materiel. The lieutenant in charge of Department B, assisted by the first sergeant and stable sergeant, superintends the work of the drivers in caring for their harness and horses. In the field, when the horses are unharnessed at the carriages, the duties are performed as above described, except that the first sergeant, when directed to dismiss the battery, commands: 1. Drivers; 2. UNHITCH AND UNHARNESS. The teams are unhitched and unharnessed by the drivers under the direction of their chiefs of section, according to the methods heretofore prescribed, the horses being tied to the picket line as soon as unharnessed. In horse batteries, while the drivers are unhitching, the senior gunner forms the gun squads, marches them to the stable, and 36 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE commands: FALL OUT. Each gunner conducts his squad to its place in the stable and causes the cannoneers to unsaddle and care for their equipments; he assigns suitable cannoneers to the care of the horses, so that there is one man for each two animals; he then marches the remaining cannoneers back to the park to care for the materiel. TO ALIGN THE BATTERY The battery being in line at a halt: If the section on the side toward which the alignment is to be made is not in proper position, the captain establishes it in the position desired, and commands: i. Right (left) ; 2. DRESS; 3. FRONT. At the command dress the other carriages move for- ward or backward, preserving their intervals; the drivers cast their eyes to the right and dress on the drivers of the carriages established as a basis of alignment. The captain places himself on the right flank in line with the wheel driver of the base car- riage, facing to the left, he quickly establishes the wheel driver of the leading carriage of the second section on the desired line, and then superintends the alignment of the other wheel drivers of the front rank carriages. The first sergeant similarly superin- tends the alignment of the wheel drivers of the rear rank carriages. The captain commands front when the alignment is complete, at which command the captain and first sergeant resume their posts and the drivers turn their eyes to the front. In horse batteries, at the command dress each gun squad aligns itself toward the side ordered, under the supervision of its gunner. TO MARCH TO THE FRONT 1. Forward; 2. MARCH. Executed simultaneously by all the carriages. TO HALT 1. Battery; 2. HALT. Executed simultaneously by all the carriages. MOUNTED DRILL 37 TO MARCH BY THE FLANK i. By the right (left) flank; 2. MARCH. All the carriages simultaneously turn to the right, the rear carriages taking the track and distance from the carriages which precede them in the new formation. If the battery is in line, with closed intervals, the following modifications apply: The movement is successive; the section on the indicated flank begins the movement; the others take it up in turn so as to follow, at the proper distance, in the track of the carriages which precede them. If executed while march- ing, all the sections except the one on the indicated flank halt, and then resume the march so as to follow in their proper places in the column. TO MARCH TO THE REAR By an about: 1. Right (left) about; 2. MARCH. All the carriages simultaneously turn to the right about, the rear carriages taking the track and distance from the carriages which precede them in the new formation. By a countermarch: 1. Countermarch; 2. MARCH. The leading carriage of each section executes left about as just described; the rear carriages follow in the track of the lead- ing carriage, and execute a left about on the same ground. RIGHT SECTIONS FORWARD If the battery is in line, with closed intervals, the following modifications apply: The captain first commands: 1. Right sections forward ; 2. MARCH. The right section of each platoon moves forward so as to clear the left section. If the captain orders an increased gait for the maneuver, the right sections take the gait indicated; if an increased gait is not ordered, the left sections reduce the gait i°, or, if halted, they remain halted. As soon as the right sections are clear of the left sections, the captain gives the command for the about or the countermarch, which is executed by all the sections at the gait of the right sec- tions. On the completion of the about or countermarch, the sections in rear increase the gait so as to reach their positions in line. 38 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE In horse batteries, in executing an about, if the pieces are in front, they reduce the gait slightly so as to follow the gun squads at 2 yards' distance; if the caissons are in front, they increase the gait slightly on completing the about, so as to follow the pieces at 2 yards' distance. TO MARCH OBLIQUELY 1. Right (left) oblique; 2. MARCH. All the carriages simultaneously turn to the oblique. The carriages move in parallel lines. The lead drivers align them- selves in each rank of carriages ; the lead driver of each rear rank carriage also aligns himself upon the lead driver of the carriage corresponding to his own in the front rank. If these positions are properly maintained, the carriages should, on executing a second oblique in either direction, have the proper distances, intervals, and alignment. TO CHANGE DIRECTION 1. Column right (left) ; 2. MARCH. If in section column the leading carriage turns to the right through an angle of 90 . The carriages in rear follow and turn on the same ground. If in double section or flank column the carriages on the side toward which the turn is made, execute the movement as before. In each section, as the inside carriage begins the turn, the outside carriage increases the gait i°, preserves its interval from the inside carriage and takes the gait of the latter on arriving abreast of it. Column half right (left) is similarly executed. Being in line: 1. Battery right (left) wheel; 2. MARCH. The pivot section executes column right. The other sections by twice executing column half right place themselves on the line established by the pivot section. Rule I governs the gait. Battery right (left) half wheel is similarly executed. TO EXECUTE A PASSAGE OF CARRIAGES Being in line or in section column, to place the rear carriages in front: 1. Pieces (Caissons) front; 2. MARCH. MOUNTED DRILL 39 The carriages designated in the command are the rear car- riages in the existing formation. In each section the designated carriage inclines to the right, passes the other carriage, takes position in front of it, and con- tinues the march; the carriage thus placed in rear then follows at the prescribed distance. Rule II governs the gaits. TO CLOSE OR EXTEND INTERVALS IN LINE i. On (such) section ; 2. To (so many) yards ; 3. Close (Extend) intervals; 4. MARCH. The indicated section moves straight to the front; the other sections incline toward or away from the indicated section and move to the front when at the proper interval. Rule I governs the gaits. TO FORM SECTION COLUMN TO THE FRONT FROM LINE 1. Right (Left) by section; 2. MARCH. The right section moves straight to the front. The other sections in turn, change direction to the right and follow in the column at the proper distance. Rule II governs the gaits. TO FORM LINE FROM SECTION COLUMN To the front: 1. Right (Left) front into line; 2. MARCH. The leading section moves straight to the front. Each section in rear obliques to the right until opposite its place in line, when it obliques to the left moves to the front, and takes its place on the line Rule I governs the gaits. To the light (left): 1. Right (Left) into line; 2. MARCH. The leading section executes column right and then moves straight to the front. The other sections move forward and successively execute column right, when, by so doing, they will be opposite their positions in line; they then move to the front and take their places on the line, to the right of the carriages which preceded them. 40 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE If, in the execution of the movement, the sections in rear move at a faster gait than the leading section, the second section in the column inclines to the right sufficiently to clear the leading section. Rule I governs the gaits. On the right (left): i. On right (left) into line; 2. MARCH. Executed as prescribed for right into line, except that the second section in the column inclines to the left in order to clear the leading section, -and that each section passes beyond the preceding one before turning to the right ; also that the leading section is habitually halted on advancing three carriage lengths after the completion of its change of direction. To form line at closed intervals, the captain commands: At (so many) yards, before giving the prescribed commands for forming line; the battery is then formed with the intervals pre- scribed. TO FORM FLANK COLUMN FROM SECTION COLUMN 1. Flank column; 2. Right (left) oblique, 3. MARCH. The rear carriages of all the sections oblique to the right simultaneously, and then oblique to the left, when by so doing they will have their proper intervals from the leading carriages. All carriages in rear of the leading one close upon the carriages which precede them in the column at the gait of the carnages which oblique. Rule I governs the gaits. TO FORM LINE TO THE FRONT FROM FLANK COLUMN 1. Right (Left) front into line; 2. MARCH. The carriages on the right of the column execute right front into line, as prescribed for a section column. The carriages on the left move by the right flank, and each forms in section col- umn behind the right carriage of its own section. Rule I governs the gaits. TO FORM LINE TO THE FLANK AT CLOSED INTERVALS FROM FLANK COLUMN 1. At (so many) yards; 2. Right (left) into line; 3. MARCH. In each column the carriages execute right into line as pre- MOUNTED DRILL 41 scribed for the sections Right into Line, each section marching by the right flank in time to be opposite its place in line. TO FORM SECTION COLUMN FROM FLANK COLUMN i. Pieces (Caissons) front; 2. MARCH. The designated carriage of the leading section moves straight to the front; the other carriage of this section obliques toward the designated carriage in time to follow in its track at the pre- scribed distance. The remaining sections in the column execute the movement similarly, each carriage moving out in time to follow the preceding one at the proper distance. Rule II governs the gaits. TO FORM DOUBLE SECTION AND TO RESUME THE PREVIOUS ORDER Being in line or in section column: 1. Double section; 2. Right (left) oblique; 3. MARCH. In each section the rear carriage inclines to the right and places itself abreast of the leading carriage at an interval of 2 yards. If in section column, all carriages in rear of the leading one close upon the carriages which precede them in the column at the gait of the carriages which incline. Rule I governs the gaits. To resume the previous order: 1. Pieces (Caissons) front; 2. MARCH. If in column, the designated carriage of the leading section moves straight to the front; the other carriage inclines toward the designated carriage in time to follow in its track at the pre- scribed distance. The remaining sections in the column execute the movement similarly, each carriage moving out in time to follow the preceding one at the proper distance. If in line, the movement is executed simultaneously by all the sections. Rule II governs the gaits. Being in flank column: 1. Double section; 2. Right (left) oblique ; 3. MARCH. In each section the right carriage moves or continues straight 42 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE to the front, the left one inclines sharply to the right, and moves up abreast of the right carriage at 2 yards interval. Rule I governs the gaits. To resume the previous order: 1. Flank column; 2. Right (left) oblique; 3. MARCH. In each section the left carriage moves or continues straight to the front, the right one inclines sharply to the right and then moves up abreast of the left carriage at the prescribed intervaL Rule I governs the gaits. The section being formed in double section retains that forma- tion until again formed in section or flank column, and is ma- neuvered as if it were a single carriage. In executing the turns the pivot carriage executes the movement as heretofore pre- scribed; the other carriage conforms to the movement of the pivot carriage, increasing the gait so as to arrive abreast of the latter without delay. The double section line or column is maneuvered as explained for the normal order in line or in section column, with the ex- ceptions made necessary by the difference of formation. The carriages retain their relative order until they are again formed in the normal order in line, in section column, or in flank column The posts of individuals are analogous to those prescribed for the order in line or column. PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES If, while maneuvering or marching, an obstacle is encountered by any subdivision, its chief, without waiting for orders, gives appropriate commands for avoiding the obstacle and for resum- ing the original formation as soon as the obstacle is passed. DIVISION OF FIFTH SECTION The first caisson of the fifth section is habitually unlimbered on the right of the line of guns, the second caisson on the left. Depending upon the nature of the ground and the circumstances of the case, the fifth section may either follow the remainder of the battery toward the position for action and take post under the direction of its chief in the most convenient manner, or, at the subdivision for action, the caissons may take post on the proper flanks of the battery, accompany it to the position, and MOUNTED DRILL 43 unlimber simultaneously with the guns. In the absence of special instructions from the captain the chief of the fifth section adopts the measures best suited to the immediate case. One or both caissons may be unlimbered in rear of the line under cover, depending upon the nature of the ground and the character of the action. If practicable, the captain uses the caisson on the windward flank as his observing station. If it is desired to subdivide the battery without preparing for action the captain gives the necessary instructions. GUIDES {Same for Three Inch, Four Point Seven Inch and Six Inch) The guide of a carriage is its lead driver, of a section in section column, the lead driver of its leading carriage; of a section in double section, the lead driver of its left carriage. Chiefs of section supervise the gait and direction of the march of their sections. In section column the guide of the leading section is the guide of the battery. The guide of the battery line is the guide of the right, or left or center section. The guide of the battery in flank column is the guide of the leading carriage on one flank or the other. During an oblique march the guide of the battery is, without indication, the guide of the leading carriage on the side toward which the oblique is made. On leaving the park the guidon at once posts himself with the guide of the battery. If a subsequent movement places the guidon at the rear of a section column, he hastens to post himself with the guide of the leading section; if with a rear carriage in line or a flank column, he hastens to post himself with the guide of the leading carriage nearest his former position, or takes post with the indicated guide in case a guide is announced. On the formation of double section the guidon posts himself with the left carriage of the guiding section. During an oblique march the guidon does not change position. With the exception just noted, the guide is habitually toward the guidon; while he is changing position, it is toward the guide with whom he is to take post. 44 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE The captain may announce a change of guide; thus: GUIDE (Right, Left or Center). If the captain desires, he may place himself in front of any carriage of the battery, and command: GUIDE ON ME. The carriage in rear of the captain then follows his movements and the others guide on this as the directing carriage, regulating their march and gait so as to maintain their proper relative posi- tions. The guidon posts himself with the directing carriage. INTERVALS AND DISTANCES 3 inch and 4.7 inch 6 inch Intervals between: Pairs in line 1 horse length, 3 yds. 1 team length, 3 yds. (for (Same) (Same) Teams in line each pair; i.e., 12 yds.) Hitched carriages in line. 1 hitched carriage length With four pairs (17 yds. for a 3~pair team) 22 yards. Distances between: Pairs in column 1 yd. (Same) Teams in column 2 yds. (Same) Hitched carnages About 2 yds., or such that, when moved by the flank, the intervals will be as above. 4 yds. RULES FOR GAIT Rule I. — When a change of formation requires certain carriages to gain ground so as to reach specified positions abreast of the directing carriages, the captain may or may not announce an increased gait for the movement. If he announces an increased gait, the directing carriages maintain their gait; the other car- riages move at the gait announced until they have reached their new position, when they take the gait of the directing carriages. If the captain does not announce an increased gait, the direct- ing carriages reduce their gait one degree; the others maintain their gait until they reach their new position, when they take the gait of the directing carriages. If the movement is executed from a halt or while marching at a walk, and an increase of gait MOUNTED DRILL 45 is not ordered, the directing carriages advance there carriage lengths toward the front of the new formation and halt. This rule applies to forming line from column, double section line from line, flank column from section column or double sec- tion column, double section column from section column or flank column, closing or extending intervals, and wheeling by battery. Rule II. — When a change of formation requires the directing carriages to gain ground in order to precede the other carriages, the captain may or may not announce an increased gait for the movement. If he announces an increased gait, the directing carriages take the increased gait at once, the other carriages take it up so as to follow the movement in their proper order. If the captain does not announce an increased gait, the direct- ing carriages maintain their gait, the others reduce the gait one degree, and take the gait of the directing carriages in time to follow the movement in their proper order. If the movement is executed from a halt, or while marching at a walk, and an increase of gait is not ordered, the directing carriages move at a walk; the others remain halted, or halt and take up the gait of the directing carriages as before. This rule applies to forming column from line, line from double section line, section column from flank column or from double section column, and passage of carriages. ARM SIGNALS Preparatory signals : Attention. — Extend the arm vertically and move it slowly back and forth from right to left. Forward. — Extend the arm vertically and lower it to the front until horizontal. By the Right (Left) Flank. — Extend the arm vertically and lower it to the right (left) until horizontal. Right (Left) About. — Extend the arm vertically and describe slowly a large horizontal circle with the hand; then extend the arm to the left (right) and describe a horizontal arc to front and right (left). Countermarch. — Extend the arm vertically and describe quickly several horizontal circles with the hand. 46 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Right Sections Forward. — Extend the arm vertically and then thrust several times to the front. Right (Left) Oblique. — Extend the arm obliquely upward to the right (left) and front, and then lower the arm, describing a vertical circle on the right (left) side of the horse. To Increase the Gait. — Carry the hand to the shoulder, forearm vertical; extend the arm vertically from this position and repeat several times. To Decrease the Gait. — Hold the arm horizontally above and in front of the forehead. To indicate an increased or decreased gait for a maneuver, the appropriate signal is made just after the preparatory signal for the maneuver. To Halt. — Extend the arm vertically and hold it there until the signal is obeyed. To Change Direction to the Right (Left). — Extend the arm vertically; lower it to the left (right) until horizontal and describe a horizontal arc to the front and right (left). To Close Intervals. — Point to the section on which the inter- vals are to be closed, and then signal right (left) oblique, or left and right oblique, according as the intervals are to be closed on the right (left) section or on an interior section. To Extend Intervals. — Point to the section on which intervals are to be extended, and then signal left (right) oblique, or right and left oblique, according as the intervals are to be extended on the right (left) section or on an interior section. Right (Left) by Section. — Point at the right (left) section and signal forward. Right (Left) Front into Line. — Extend the arm vertically and describe several large vertical circles on the right (left) side of the horse. Right (Left) into Line. — Signal a change of direction to the right (left), followed by describing small circles with the hand while the arm is extended to the right (left). Pieces Front. — Extend the arm horizontally to the front and then move it several times thru a small vertical arc. Caissons Front. — Extend the arm horizontally to the front and then move it several times thru a small horizontal arc. MOUNTED DRILL 47 Flank Column, Right (Left) Oblique.— Extend the arm hori- zontally to the right (left) and then move it several times thru a small horizontal arc. Double Section, Right (Left) Oblique. — Extend the arm hori- zontally to the right (left) and then move it several times thru a small vertical arc. The signals for flank column, or double section, right (left) oblique, apply also for the formation of flank column or double section to the right (left) after limbering. Action Front (Right, Left, Rear). — Extend the arm vertically; then lower quickly to the front (right, left, rear), and repeat several times. Limber. — Extend both arms laterally. These improvised signals may be used. Prepare to Mount (Dismount) Drivers. — Extend arm sideward palm up; move horizontally to front and back to first position and repeat several times. Cannoneers. — Extend arm downward and raise sideward to horizontal palm up, and repeat several times. Drivers and Cannoneers. — Extend arm sideward palm up. (All of above signals end with arm extended horizontally side- ward.) Mount. — Raise arm from sideward horizontal to vertical over- head. Dismount. — Same as above. On Right into Line. — Signal a change of direction to the right (left), then thrust several times to the right (left). WHISTLE SIGNALS Attention. — One long blast. Cease Firing. — One long blast. Given only when the battery is in position and firing service or subcaliber ammunition. Special Detail Report. — Three long blasts. Cannoneers Report. — Several short, sharp, and rapid blasts. Chiefs of Section Report. — One long, followed by one short, blast, the whole signal repeated once. Chiefs of Platoon Report. — Two long blasts. At the signals for reporting, the personnel indicated report in person to the captain. CANNONEERS DRILL STANDING GUN DRILL— THREE INCH 1. TO FORM THE GUN SQUADS The instructor indicates the place of formation and com- mands: FALL IN. Each gunner repeats the command and hastens to place him- self, faced to the front, where the right of his squad is to rest. The cannoneers move at double time and take their places. The place of formation is indicated and the command given thus, for example: i. In front (rear) of your pieces (caissons); or, i. On the right (left) of your pieces (caissons) facing them; or, i. On the road facing the park; 2. FALL IN. In case the front or rear of the carriages is designated, each squad falls in at its post. For the first formation of the gun squads for any drill or exercise the instructor cautions as gun squads before giving the command. 2. TO TELL OFF THE SQUADS CALL OFF. — In each gun squad the cannoneer on the right of the rear rank calls off one ; the cannoneer on the left of the gunner, two; the cannoneer on the left of No. 1, three; and so on. The gunner does not call off. In each caisson squad the cannoneers of the front rank call off first, thus: four, five, six, in order from right to left, followed by the cannoneers of the rear rank in the same order. The caisson corporal does not call off. After having called off, if a subsequent formation is ordered, the cannoneers fall in at once in their proper order. 3. POSTS OF THE GUN SQUADS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED In Front of the Pieces or Caissons. — Each squad is in line facing to the front, its rear and center 2 yards from the end of the pole or from the heads of the lead horses. In Rear of the Pieces or Caissons. — Each squad is in line facing to the front, its front and center 2 yards from the muzzle, or from the rear of the caisson. If no special place of formation has been designated, each squad, when formed at the carriages, is posted in front of the leading carriage of its section. 48 CANNONEERS DRILL 49 4. TO POST THE GUN SQUADS The squads are marched to the park, and, on arrival near the carriages, the instructor commands: Squads in front (rear) of your pieces (caissons). Each gunner marches his squad to its car- riage and posts it in the indicated position. The instructor habitually causes the squads to approach the front (rear) of the carriages which he designates in his command, from the right of the park if left in front and from the left if right in front. "% 5. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CAR- RIAGES LIMBERED The gunner and No. i opposite the rear of the limber wheels of the piece. Nos. 2 and 3 opposite the rear of the piece wheels. Nos. 4 and 5 opposite the rear of the caisson wheels. Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the rear of the limber wheels of the caisson. The gunner and even numbers are on the right, the odd numbers on the left; all 2 feet outside the wheels,, facing the front. 6. TO POST THE CANNONEERS 1. Cannoneers; 2. POSTS. Each gunner repeats the command posts. The cannoneers leave the ranks, if formed, and move at double time by the shortest practicable routes to their posts. For preliminary instruction the squads, on entering the park, are first posted with the carriages; the cannoneers are then sent to their posts by the foregoing command. The command is general, however, and is applicable when the can- noneers are in or out of ranks, at a halt or marching, and when the carriages are limbered or unlimbered. Same for 3 inch and 6 inch. 50 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 7. TO MOUNT THE CANNONEERS ON THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED In each squad the gunner and No. i mount on the limber chest of the piece. Nos. 2 and 3 mount on the axle seats. Nos. 4 and 5 mount on the caisson chest. Nos. 6 and 7 mount on the limber chest the caisson. When extra cannoneers are present: No. 8 mounts between Nos. 6 and 7. No. 9 mounts between Nos. 4 and 5. The gunner and even numbers mount on the right side of their respective carriages, odd numbers on the left. 1. Cannoneers, prepare to mount; 2. MOUNT. At the first command the cannoneers who mount on the limber chests or axle seats hasten to the rear of the limber chests or axle seats; those who mount on the caisson chest hasten to the front of that chest. Each cannoneer who mounts on the limber chest places the foot nearest the wheel on the step, grasps the chest handle with the hand nearest the wheel, and with the other hand grasps the hand of the cannoneer opposite him. Each cannoneer who mounts on the caisson chest places the foot nearest the wheel on the step, and grasps the chest handle with the hand nearest the wheel. Cannoneers who mount on the axle seats place the foot nearest the wheel on the brake beam, and grasp the seat handle with the hand nearest the wheel. At the command mount, all spring up and seat themselves, those on the chest facing the front, those on the axle seats to the rear. Those who mount on the limber chests place the foot farthest from the wheel on the top of the limber chest, and then step down on their foot board. If the command be: 1. Cannoneers; 2. MOUNT, the can- noneers execute, at the command mount, all that has been pre- scribed for the commands prepare to mount and mount. 8. TO DISMOUNT THE CANNONEERS FROM THE CARRIAGES 1. Cannoneers, prepare to dismount; 2. DISMOUNT. The cannoneers on the chests stand up on the foot boards at the first command; at the second command all the cannoneers jump to the ground and take their posts at the double time. CANNONEERS DRILL 51 If the command be: i. Cannoneers, 2. DISMOUNT, they execute, at the command dismount, all that has been prescribed for the commands prepare to dismount and dismount. 9. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED BUT NOT PREPARED FOR ACTION In each squad the gunner immediately in rear of the can- noneer's seat, on the left side of the trail of the gun.. Xo. 1, immediately in rear of the cannoneer's seat, on the right side of the trail of the gun. Xo. 2. 2 feet in rear of the gunner, covering him. Xos. 3. 4, and 5, 2 feet in rear of the caisson chest in the order named from right to left. Xos. 6 and 7. abreast and in order from right to left, 5 yards in rear of the trail spade. Higher-numbered cannoneers, if present, accompany the lim- bers. The cannoneers stand at attention at their posts, facing to the front. 10. TO CHANGE THE POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS In order to exercise the cannoneers in all duties connected with the service of the piece, to vary the drill, and to nx the attention of the men, the posts of the cannoneers are frequently changed. The cannoneers being at their posts, carriages limbered or unlimbered: 1. Change Posts; 2. MARCH. In each squad No. 1 quickly takes the post of No. 2; Xo. 2 of Xo. 3; No. 3 of Xo. 4; Xo. 4 of Xo. 5; No. 5 of No. 1. Higher numbered cannoneers change only when specially directed. 11. TO MOVE BY HAND THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED To the Front, — 1. Pieces (Caissons) forward; 2. MARCH; 3. HALT. In each squad, at the first command, the gunner and Xo. 1 hasten to the end of the pole; Xos. 2 and 3 to the limber wheels; Xos. 4 and 5 to the rear wheels: higher numbered cannon- eers to the rear of the carriage; the gunner and even numbers 52 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE working on the right side of the carriage, odd numbers on the left. The cannoneers who work at the pole or at the wheels grasp the same with both hands; those in rear of the carriage prepare to push against the most convenient part of the carriage. At the command march, all assist in moving the carriage to the front. At the command halt the carriage is stopped, the pole is lowered to the ground, and all resume their posts. To the Rear. — i. Pieces (Caissons) backward; 2. MARCH; 3. HALT. Executed as in the preceding paragraph, except that at the command march the cannoneers move the carriage to the rear and that the higher numbered cannoneers place themselves in front of the rear axle of the carriage and push against the most convenient part of the carriage. 12. DISPOSITION OF THE CARRIAGES BEFORE AND AFTER UNLIMBERING Before Unlimbering. — The piece and its caisson are placed abreast of each other, 2 yards apart, poles pointing in the same Same for 3 inch and 6 inch. direction. This formation of the carriages is called a double section. The interval of 2 yards should not be materially changed, otherwise the amount of movement of the carriages by hand is greatly increased. If it is intended to fire to the front, the caissons should be CANNONEERS DRILL 53 placed on the left of their pieces before the command for un- limbering is given; if it is intended to fire to the rear, the caissons should be placed on the right of their pieces; if to the flank, on either side of their pieces. In emergencies the carriages may be unlimbered from any formation. Dispositions to meet the various situations should be practised. When not horsed the carriages are drawn by the cannoneers and the instructor gives the necessary instructions for moving the carriages by the shortest routes into the prescribed positions. After Unlimbering. — The adjacent wheels of the gun and caisson are about i foot apart, the gun muzzle and the caisson trail pointing to the front, the gun on the right and slightly in advance of the caisson. The gun is placed slightly in advance to allow for recoil at the first shot, which on ordinary ground is about 10 inches. The interval of i foot may be increased to permit wide move- ments of the trail if they are anticipated, but effort should be made to preserve the protection afforded by the shields. In emergencies the caissons may be placed temporarily on the right of their pieces. As this position is not favorable to the service of ammunition, the caissons should be placed on the left of their pieces as soon as practicable. In active service, and in instruction simulating service con- ditions, the limbers are placed under cover in the vicinity of the position; if no cover is obtainable in the vicinity, they are placed in line in rear of either flank at such place as the instructor may designate. 13. TO UNLIMBER General Rules i. In unlimbering to fire to the front, each caisson establishes the position. 2. In unlimbering to fire to the rear, each piece establishes the position. 3. In unlimbering to fire to the flank, the elements (gun or caisson) on the side toward which fire is to be directed establishes the position. 4. If the carriages, after unlimbering, have to be moved by hand to the firing position, all the cannoneers of the gun squad, 54 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE when the ground is difficult, assist at each carriage in turn moving it to the designated position. 5. In drills with the carriages not horsed spare cannoneers or those higher in number than No. 5 are used to move the limbers to the place designated by the instructor. 6. If the carriages are not horsed, they are unlimbered succes- sively, the one which establishes the position being unlimbered first. The limbers are drawn by cannoneers designated by the instructor. Thus, if only the gunner and five cannoneers are present, the cannoneers posted with the piece may be required to move the limber of the caisson, and those with the caisson the limber of the piece. If higher numbered cannoneers are present, however, they are ordinarily used for this purpose. 14a. TO FIRE TO THE FRONT The carriages being in double section, the caissons on the left: ACTION FRONT. If marching, the carriages halt at the com- mand or signal. The cannoneers, if mounted, dismount after the carriages have halted. The Caissons. — Nos. 4 and 5 jump to the trail handles. Nos. 6 and 7 run to the right and left caisson wheels, respectively, and stand ready to assist in such movements of the carriage as may be necessary. No. 4 unlatches the pintle; Nos. 4 and 5 raise the trail from the pintle and No. 4, by raising his arm, signals for the drivers to drive on; Nos. 4 and 5 then lower the trail to the ground. No. 4 sets the brake and all the cannoneers at the caisson take their posts. The Pieces. — The gunner and No. 1 jump to the trail handles. No. 2 runs to the wheel that is to become the right wheel gf the piece unlimbered and places himself so as to be ready to turn the top of his wheel toward the trail No. 3 runs to the wheel that is to become the left wheel of the piece unlimbered and places himself so as to be ready to turn the top of his wheel toward the muzzle. The gunner unlatches the pintle, and assisted by No. 1, raises the trail from the pintle. The gunner, by raising his arm, signals for the drivers to drive on. The gunner and No. 1 carry the trail away from the caisson and all of the cannoneers working together turn the piece around 180 degrees. The gunner causes CANNONEERS DRILL 55 the piece to be placed by the side of the caisson. The gunner and No. i lower the trail to the ground and all the cannoneers at the piece take their posts. Limbers. — At the signal drive on, the limbers take their pre- scribed positions. To take posts in rear of the carriages, each caisson limber executes a left about, moves straight to the rear, executes another left about, and halts, so that the heads of the lead horses or the end of the pole will be 25 yards from the rear of the caisson. Each piece limber follows the caisson limber, passes around in rear of it, and halts so as to be abreast of it and 2 yards to its right. 14b. TO FIRE TO THE REAR The carriages being in double section, the caissons on the right, ACTION REAR. If marching, the carriages halt at the command or signal. The cannoneers, if mounted, dismount after the carriages have halted. The Caisson. — Nos. 4 and 5 jump to the trail handles. Nos. 6 and 7 run to the right and left caisson wheels, respectively. No. 6 stands ready to turn the top of his wheel away from the trail while No. 7 stands ready to turn his toward the trail. No. 4 unlatches the pintle; Nos. 4 and 5 raise the trail from the pintle and No. 4 by raising his arm, signals for the drivers to drive on; Nos. 4 and 5 carry the trail away from the piece and all the cannoneers working together turn the caisson around 180 degrees and place it by the side of the piece; Nos. 4 and 5 lower the trail to the ground. No. 4 sets the brake and all of the can- noneers working on the caisson take their posts. The Piece. — The gunner and No. 1 jump to the trail handles. No. 2 runs to the wheel that is to become the right wheel of the piece unlimbered and stands ready to assist in such movements of the carriage as may be necessary. No. 3 runs to the wheel that is to become the left wheel of the piece unlimbered and stands ready to assist in such movements of the carriage as may be necessary. The gunner unlatches the pintle and, assisted by No. 1, raises the trail from the pintle. The gunner, by raising his arm, signals for the drivers to drive on. The gunner and No. 1 lower the trail to the ground and all the cannoneers at the piece take their posts. 56 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Limbers. — To take posts in rear of the carriages, each caisson limber inclines well to the right, moves to the rear, executes a left about, and halts so that the heads of the lead horses or the end of the pole will be about 25 yards from the rear of the caisson. Each piece limber follows the caisson limber, passes around in rear of it, and halts so as to be abreast of it and 2 yards to its right. 14c. TO FIRE TO THE FLANK The caisson being on either side of the piece, 2 yards from and abreast of it: ACTION RIGHT (LEFT). Executed according to the principles of action front and action rear, with the following modifications: After the carriages are unlimbered the muzzle of the gun and the trail of the caisson are turned in the direction of the fire, and the carriage in rear is run up to its proper position on the line. The carriage on the side toward which fire is to be delivered is first established in position, and then all the cannoneers assist in bringing up the carriage in rear to its proper place. Limbers. — To take post in rear of their carriages, the limbers farthest from the flank toward which fire is to be delivered move out first, wheel away from the direction of fire, and after having gained sufficient distance to the rear execute an about and halt at the prescribed position. The other limbers follow and take position in a similar manner. 15. DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS IN LIMBERING The carriages being in position unlimbered and in march order, to limber to the front and rear: 1. Limber; 2. FRONT AND REAR. In each squad the gunner and No. 1 face to the rear at their posts. No. 2 places himself on the right of the gunner facing to the rear. No. 3 jumps across the trail of the piece and places himself on the left of No. 1 facing to the rear. Nos. 4 and 5 hasten to the front of the caisson, No. 4 releases the brake, and both place themselves with their backs toward the chest, close up against the footboards, No. 4 on the right, No. 5 on the left of the trail. No. 6 passes around the right of the caisson and CANNONEERS DRILL 57 places himself on the right of No. 4. No. 7 runs around the left of the caisson and places himself on the left of No. 5. The limbers are brought up so as to move squarely across the directions of the trails and so that the wheel nearest the trail will pass about a foot outside of the lunette. When the axle of the piece limber is nearly in line with the trail, the gunner commands: 1. Limber; 2. HALT. The limber halts and is then swung around and again halted so that the pole is pointing in the direction of the trail and so that the pintle is almost over the lunette. As soon as the limber has halted in this position, the gunner and No. 1 spring to the trail handles and raise the trail. Nos. 2 and 3 jump to the gun wheels and prepare to assist in any movements of the carriage that maybe necessary. The gunner and No. 1 place the lunette over the pintle; the gunner latches the pintle. The caisson is limbered in the same manner, No. 4 giving the commands for halting the limber; Nos. 4 and 5 handling the trail; No. 4 latching the pintle; Nos. 6 and 7 assisting by working on the wheels in any movements of the carriage. All the cannoneers take their posts at the carriages limbered. To the rear; 1. Limber; 2. REAR. No. 4 releases the brake. The caisson is turned around 180 degrees; Nos. 4 and 5 carrying the trail away from the piece. Nos. 1 and 6 turn the top of their wheel toward the trail; Nos. 3 and 7 turn the top of their wheel away from the trail; the gunner and No. 2 assist by pulling and pushing on the chest. The caisson having been turned, all the cannoneers working together ran the caisson 20 yards straight to the rear of the line of guns. Nos. 4 and 5 lower the trail and all the cannoneers take their posts for limber- ing. The limbers are brought up and the limbering is com- pleted as described for limbering to the front and rear. 16. TO LEAVE THE PARK At the conclusion of the instruction in the park the instructor sees that the carriages are properly cared for and then causes the squads to join in front or rear of their carriages. The squads may then be closed by the command: 1. Squads right (left); 2. MARCH; 3. Close; 4. MARCH. At the last command the 58 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE leading squad halts and the rear squads close on it in quick time and halt. If executed in double time, the leading squad resumes or continues the quick time at the last command and the other squads take the quick time when they are closed. Or, the squads may be faced to the right or left. At the com- mand: i. Close; 2. MARCH, the leading squad stands fast and the others close on it. After forming the squad column the men are marched off. GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 1. TO PREPARE FOR ACTION The carriages being in position unlimbered: PREPARE FOR ACTION. Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order given below: Gunner: (a) Removes the hood from the sight bracket; (b) Releases the traversing and elevating lock and operates the traversing and elevating gear; (c) Removes the sight shank from its case and places it in its socket, setting the range at 3000 and the peep sight deflec- tion at zero; (d) Takes the panoramic sight from its case and places it in its seat, making sure that the sight is clamped and that the deflection is set at zero; (e) Raises and secures the top shield ; with the assistance of No. 1; (f) Seats himself on his seat. No. 1: (a) Removes the quadrant from its case and places it in its seat; centers the cross level bubble; (b) Sets the range at 3000 and the sight at 300, and brings the range bubble to the center; (c) Equips himself with a lanyard and a wiping cloth; (d) Operates the breech mechanism, examines the breech block, bore, and chamber, cleaning any parts requiring it, leaving the breech open, except when the gun is loaded; (e) Assists the gunner in raising and securing the top shield; (/) Seats himself on his seat. GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 59 No. 2: (a) Removes the breech cover; (b) Turns back the trail handspike and engages it; (c) Runs around to the right of the piece and assists No. 3 to lower the piece apron; (d) Distributes tow or waste to the cannoneers for use in their ears; (e) Seats himself on the handspike. No. 3: (a) Runs around the left of the caisson and removes the muzzle cover; (6) Removes the front sight cover and adjusts the sight in its firing position; (c) Lowers the piece apron, with the assistance of No. 2; (d) Seats himself at the fuze setter, with his back to the right caisson wheel; (e) Sets his scales at corrector 30, range 3000. No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5, lowers the caisson apron; (b) Lowers the fuze setter; (o) Assisted by No. 5, raises the caisson door; (d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. No. 5: (a) Assists No. 4 to lower the caisson apron; (b) Assists No. 4 to raise the caisson door; (c) Puts a round of shrapnel in the fuze setter, setting the fuze; (d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. The cannoneers report to their chief of section if any parts of the materiel are not in working order. The carriages, limbered, are habitually prepared for action before reaching the firing position. The duties of the cannon- eers are the same as at the carriages unlimbered, except that after the examination of the elevating and traversing gear the piece is secured by the traveling lock; the trail handspike is not turned back; the breech is closed; the firing pin is released; the fuze setter is not lowered, nor is a round put in the fuze setter; the apron is not lowered; the caisson door is left closed; and the cannoneers do not take their posts for serving the gun. The gunner and No. 1 return the panoramic sight and the quad- rant to their cases, unless special orders to the contrary are given. Immediately after establishing the carriages the preparation 60 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE for action is completed without command and the cannoneers take their posts for serving the piece. If prepare for action has not been given before establishing hte carriages in the firing position, that command is habitually given by each chief of section as soon as his carriages have been unlimbered and established. The instructor may, however, caution do not prepare for action when he wishes to drill the personnel in limbering and unlimbering only or in the details of preparation for action. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED AND PREPARED FOR ACTION In each squad, the gunner, seated on his seat facing the gun. No. i, seated astride his seat facing the gun. No. 2, seated astride the trail handspike near the trail. No. 3, seated with his back to the inside of the right caisson wheel, facing the bracket fuze setter, legs extended one on each side of the fuze setter. Nos. 4 and 5, in rear of the caisson in a convenient position for the performance of their duties. Nos. 6 and 7, abreast and in order from right to left, 5 yards in rear of the trail spade of their piece, awaiting orders. Higher numbered cannoneers, if present, accompany the limbers. 2. TO FIRE Duties in Detail of the Gunner The duties of the gunner in the service of the piece are: 1. To set the deflection. 2. To apply the deflection difference. 3. To set the range. 4. To level the cross-level bubble on the sight-shank socket. 5. To give the direction to the piece. 6. To give the elevation in direct laying. 7. To call ready. GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 61 8. To move his head out of the way of the sight before the piece is fired. 9. To give the command to fire the piece. 10. To measure a deflection. Duties in Detail of No. i The duties of No. 1 in the service of the piece are: 1 . To set and release the brake. 2. To open the breech. 3. To set the site on the quadrant. 4. To set the range on the quadrant. 5. To center the cross level bubble of the quadrant. 6. To close the breech. 7. In indirect laying, to give the elevation. 8. To call set. 9. To fire the piece. 10. To measure the site. Duties in Detail of No. 2 The duties of No. 2 in the service of the piece are: 1. To shift the trail so as to give the general direction to the piece. 2. To throw the empty cartridge cases out of the way of the gun squad. Duties in Detail of No. 3 The duties of No. 3 in the service of the piece are: 1. To set the corrector. 2. To set the range on the fuze setter. 3. To set the fuze when the hand fuze setter is used. Duties in Detail of No. 4 The duties of No. 4 in the service of the piece are: 1. In time fire to complete the setting of the fuze. 2. To insert the round in the breech. 3. In volley fire to call out the number of the round. 62 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Duties in Detail of No. 5 The duties of No 5 in the service of the piece are: 1. To take ammunition from the chest. 2. When the bracket fuze setter is being used, to insert the round in the fuze setter and to set the fuze. 3. When the hand fuze setter is used, to hold the round while No. 3 sets the fuze. 4. To pass the round directly to No. 4 in percussion fire, and when the hand fuze setter is used in time fire. Duties op Nos. 6 and 7 Nos. 6 and 7 have no specific duties in the service of the piece after it is established in position. They act as spare cannoneers. Upon going into action, Nos. 6 and 7 are utilized for the con- struction of concealment for the carriages, for line guards on the telephone lines, for the resupply of ammunition, etc. This work is done under the immediate supervision of the executive or his assistant. 3. TO RESUME THE ORDER FOR MARCHING The carriages being prepared for action, to resume the order for marching: MARCH ORDER. Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order given below: Gunner: (a) Lowers and secures the top shield, with the assistance of No. 1 ; (b) Sees that the deflection reading is zero, returns the pano- ramic sight to its case and secures the case ; (c) Replaces the cover on the sight shank and returns it to the trail box; (d) Traverses and elevates the piece to the traveling position and fastens the traveling lock; (e) Secures the hood over the sight bracket; (/) Takes his post. No. 1 : (a) Assists the gunner in lowering and securing the top shield; (b) Closes the breech; releases the firing pin; (c) Returns the lanyard and wiping cloth to the trail box; GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 63 (d) Sets the range at 3000 and the site at 300; (e) Returns the quadrant to its case and secures the case; (J) Takes his post. No. 2: (a) Assists No. 3 to raise and secure the piece apron; (b) Turns down and secures the trail handspike; (c) Replaces the breech cover and secures it; (d) Takes his post. No. 3 : (a) Sees that the fuze of any round whose fuze has been set, is set back at safety; (b) Sets fuze setter at range 3000, corrector 30; (c) Raises and secures the piece apron, with the assistance of No. 2. {d) Replaces the front-sight cover and adjusts the front sight in the traveling position; (e) Replaces and secures the muzzle cover; (/) Takes his post. No. 4: (a) Assists in setting fuzes back at safety; (b) Passes the round to No. 5; (c) Assisted by No. 5, lowers and secures the caisson door; (d) Raises and secures the fuze setter; (e) Assisted by No. 5, raises and secures the caisson apron; (/) Takes his post. No. 5: (a) Receives ammunition from No. 4 and stores it in the chest; (b) Assists No. 4 to lower and secure the caisson door; (c) Assists No. 4 to raise and secure the caisson apron; (d) Takes his post. If it is intended to resume the fire, but in another position, so that the limbering of the carriage is necessitated, the com- mand MARCH ORDER is not given. At the command for limbering the carriages are placed in the order described in the section relative to preparing for action. If the situation is such as to make it probable that the guns will have to defend themselves from close attack the command sights for fire at will may be added either to the command for preparation for action or to that for resuming the march order. At such command, the gunner sets deflection zero, range 1000; No. 3 sets corrector 30, range zero. 64 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE STANDING GUN DRILL— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 1. TO FORM SQUADS {Same as for Three Inch) 2. TO TELL OFF THE SQUADS {Same as for Three Inch) 3. POSTS OF GUN SQUADS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED {Same as for Three Inch) 4. TO POST THE GUN SQUADS {Same as for Three Inch) 5. POSTS OF CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED The gunner and No. i opposite the rear of the piece wheels. Nos. 2 and 3 opposite the front of the caisson limber wheels. Nos. 4 and 5 opposite the front of the caisson wheels. Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the rear of the limber wheels of the caisson. The gunner and even numbers are on the right, the odd numbers on the left ; all 2 feet outside the wheels, facing the front. 6. TO POST THE CANNONEERS {Same as for Three Inch) 7. TO MOUNT THE CANNONEERS ON THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED In each squad, the gunner and No. 1 mount on the axle seats of the piece. Nos. 2, 3, and 6 mount on the limber chest of the caisson, No. 6 in the middle. Nos. 4, 5, and 7 mount on the caisson chest, No. 7 in the middle. The gunner and even numbers are on the right of their respect- ive carriages, odd numbers are on the left. 1. Cannoneers, prepare to mount; 2. MOUNT. At the first command the cannoneers who mount on the limber chests or axle seats hasten to the rear of the limber chests or axle seats; those who mount on the caisson chest hasten to the front of that chest. Each cannoneer who mounts on the limber chest places the foot nearest the wheel on the step, grasps the chest handle with the hand nearest the wheel, and with the other hand STANDING GUN DRILL 65 grasps the hand of the cannoneer opposite him. Each cannoneer who mounts on the caisson chest places the foot nearest the wheel on the step, and grasps the chest handle with the hand nearest the wheel. Cannoneers who mount on the axle seats place the foot nearest the wheel on the brake beam, and grasp the seat handle with the hand nearest the wheel. At the command mount, all spring up and seat themselves, those on the chest facing the front, those on the axle seats to the rear. Those who mount on the limber chests place the foot farthest from the wheel on the top of the limber chest, and then step down on their foot board. If the command be: i. Cannoneers ; 2. MOUNT, the cannoneers execute, at the command mount, all that has been prescribed for the commands prepare to mount and mount. 8. TO DISMOUNT THE CANNONEERS FROM THE CARRIAGES {Same as for Three Inch) 9. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED BUT NOT PREPARED FOR ACTION In each squad, the gunner immediately in rear of the can- noneer's seat, on the left side of the trail of the gun, No. 1, immediately in the rear of the cannoneer's seat, on the right side of the trail of the gun. No; 2, on the left side of the trail handspike. Nos. 3, 4 and 5, in rear of the caisson body, in order from right to left. Nos. 6 and 7, five feet in rear of the right and left halves of the caisson body, respectively. All cannoneers face to the front. 10. TO CHANGE THE POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS {Same as for Three Inch, except that Nos. Six and Seven are- included) 11. TO MOVE BY HAND THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED {Same as for Three Inch) 12. DISPOSITION OF THE CARRIAGES BEFORE AND AFTER UNL1MBERING {Same as for Three Inch) 66 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 13. TO UNLIMBER General Rules {Same as for Three Inch) 14a. TO FIRE TO THE FRONT {Same as for Three Inch) 14b. TO FIRE TO THE REAR {Same as for Three Inch) 14c. TO FIRE TO THE FLANK {Same as for Three Inch) 15. DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS IN LIMBERING {Same as for Three Inch) 16. TO LEAVE THE PARK {Same as for Three Inch) 17. POSITION OF THE HOWITZER WHEN MARCHING The howitzer is locked by the traveling lock and the pawls are disengaged from the rockers. GUN SQUAD— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 1. TO PREPARE FOR ACTION The carriages being in position and unlimbered: PREPARE FOR ACTION. Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order given below: Gunner: {a) Removes the top carriage cover, if on, with the assistance of No. i ; {b) Removes the covers from the sight bar and front sight; {c) Releases the traveling lock and operates the elevating and traversing gears; {d) Removes the sight shank from its case and places it in its socket, setting it at Zone 3, range 4000, and the site at 300, and brings the elevation bubble to the center; {e) Takes the panoramic sight from its case and places it in its seat, making sure that the sight is clamped, that all the de- GUN SQUAD— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 67 flection scales are set at zero and that the elevating mechanism of the rotating head is set at 300; (/) Raises and secures the top shield, with the assistance of No. 1; (g) Seats himself on his seat. No. 1: (a) Assists the gunner in removing the top carriage cover, if on; (b) Disengages the pawls; (c) Equips himself with a lanyard and wiping cloth; (d) Operates the breech mechanism, examines the breech block, bore and chamber, cleaning any part requiring it, leaving the breech open except when the piece is loaded; (e) Assists the gunner in raising and securing the top shield; (/) Seats himself on his seat. No. 2: (a) Removes the breech cover and places it on the ground 2 yards in rear of the trail; (b) Runs around the right of the piece and assists No. 3 in lowering the apron of the piece; (c) Turns back and engages the trail handspike; (d) Unfastens the rammer staff, removes the sponge cover, and places the staff on the ground, rammer head to the front and on the breech cover 2 yards to rear of the trail; (e) Distributes tow or waste to the cannoneers for use in their ears; (/) Kneels to the left of the trail handspike. No. 3: (a) Runs around the left of the caisson and removes the muzzle cover; (5) Lowers the apron of the piece, with the assistance of No. 2 ; (c) Procures the fuze setter and half seats himself with his back to the right caisson wheel, the fuze setter in his hands; (d) Sets his scales at Corrector 60, Zone 3, 4000. No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5 lowers the caisson apron; (b) Assisted by No. 5, opens the caisson doors; (c) Procures the shot tongs and places them on the middle rail in front of the pintle; (d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. No. 5: (a) Assists No. 4 in lowering the caisson apron; (b) Assists No. 4 in opening the caisson doors; (c) Draws from the chest a cartridge case carrier, opens it 68 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE and lays it on the ground under and parallel to the lower rear edge of the chest; (d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. Nos. 6 and 7 : (a) Procure the necessary tools and stand ready to dig a trench for the trail, if ordered; (6) Take their respective posts and stand ready to serve ammunition. The cannoneers report to their chief of section if any parts of the materiel are not in working order. The carriages, limbered, are habitually prepared for action before reaching the firing position. The duties of the cannoneers are the same as at the carriages unlimbered except that after the examination of the elevating and traversing gears the piece is secured by the traveling lock; the trail handspike is not turned back; the breech is closed; the firing pin is released; the apron is not lowered; the caisson door is left closed; and the cannoneers do not take their posts for serving the gun. The gunner returns the panoramic sight to its case unless special orders to the con- trary are given. Immediately after establishing the carriages the preparation for action is completed without command and the cannoneers take their posts for serving the piece. If prepare for action has not been given before establishing the carriages in the firing position, that command is habitually given by each chief of section as soon as his carriages have been unlimbered and established. The instructor may, however, caution do not prepare for action when he wishes to drill the personnel in limbering and unlimbering only or in the details of preparation for action. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES, UNLIMBERED AND PREPARED FOR ACTION In each squad — the gunner, seated on his seat facing the howitzer. No. 1, seated astride his seat facing the howitzer. No. 2, kneeling to the left of trail handspike. No. 3, half seated with his back to the inside of the right caisson wheel. GUN SQUAD— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 69 Nos. 4 and 5, in rear of the caisson in a convenient position for the performance of their duties, No. 5 to the left of No. 4. Nos. 6 and 7, 5 feet in rear of the right and left halves of the caisson chest, respectively. Each kneeling on one knee. 2. TO FIRE Duties in Detail of the Gunner 1. To set off the deflection. 2. To apply the deflection difference, if any. 3. To set off the site. 4. To set the range on the sight shank. 5. To level the cross level bubble. 6. To give the direction to the piece. 7. To give the elevation to the piece. 8. To call Ready when the piece is accurately laid. 9. To move his head out of the way of the sight before the piece is fired. 10. To give the command to fire the piece. 11. To measure the deflection. 12. To measure a site. Duties in Detail of No. i The duties of No. 1 in the service of the piece are: 1. To set and release the brake. m 2. To disengage the pawls. 3. To open the breech. 4. To close the breech. 5. To engage the pawls. 6. To fire the piece. No. 1 sets the brake as soon as the piece has been given the general direction. Whenever the trail has to be shifted No. 1 releases the brake and sets it again as soon as the trail has been reestablished. Duties in Detail of No. 2 The duties of No. 2 in the service of the piece are: 1. To shift the trail so as to give the general direction to the piece. 70 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 2. To ram the projectile. 3. To receive and throw the empty cartridge cases out of the way of the gun squad. Duties in Detail of No. 3 The duties of No. 3 in the service of the howitzer are: 1. To set the fuze setter scale. 2. To set the fuze in time fire. Duties in Detail of No. 4 The duties of No. 4 in the service of the howitzer are: 1. Procures the shot tongs. 2. Draws the projectile from the chest sufficiently far for No. 6 to take it in his arms. 3. Replaces the shot tongs. 4. In time, fire removes the waterproof hood and safety wire. 5. Prepares to draw another projectile. Duties in Detail of No. 5 The duties of No. 5 in the service of the howitzer are: 1. To procure a powder charge. 2. To remove the diaphragm, and prepare the charge for Zone 1 or 2, if necessary. 3. To insert the charge in the breech. 4. In volley fire to call out the number of the round. 5. To resume his post and prepare another charge. Duties in Detail of No. 6 The duties of No. 6 in the service of the howitzer are: 1. Receives the projectile in his arms as it is drawn from the chest by No. 4. 2. In time, fire places the projectile on the ground and steadies it while No. 3 sets the fuse. 3. Carries the projectile to the breech of the howitzer, the pro- jectile resting on his left arm, the right hand supporting the base, and inserts the projectile in the chamber. 4. Resumes his post. When shell or percussion shrapnel is being fired, No. 6 takes the projectile directly from the chest to the breech and inserts it. GUN SQUAD— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 71 Duties in Detail of No. 7 Relieves No. 6 by performing the duties of No. 6 for every alternate round. No. 7 may be withdrawn from the service of the howitzer for duty as line guard on the telephone line, for the resupply of ammunition, etc. This will be done under the immediate supervision of the executive or his assistant. 3. TO RESUME THE ORDER FOR MARCHING The carriages being prepared for action, to resume the order for marching: MARCH ORDER. Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order given below: Gunner: (a) Lowers and secures the top shield with the assistance of No. 1 ; (b) Sees that the scales are set at zero, returns the panoramic sight to its case and secures the case; (c) Replaces the cover on the sight shank and returns it to the trail box; (d) Traverses and elevates the piece to the traveling posi- tion, and fastens the traveling lock; (e) Secures the cover over the sight bar and front sight ; (/) Replaces the top carriage cover, if used, with the assistance of No. 1 ; (g) Takes his post. No. 1 : (a) Assists the gunner in lowering and securing the top shield; (b) Closes the breech; releases the firing pin; (c) Engages the pawls; (d) Returns the lanyard and wiping cloth; (e) Assists the gunner in replacing the top carriage cover, if used; (/) Takes his post. No. 2 : (a) Assists No. 3 in raising and securing the apron of the piece; (b) Replaces the sponge cover; replaces the rammer staff in its fastenings ; (c) Turns back and secures the trail handspike; 72 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE (d) Replaces the breech cover and secures it; (e) Takes his post. No. 3: (a) Sets fuzes at safety; (b) Raises and secures the apron of the piece, with the assist- ance of No. 2 ; (c) Sets the fuze setter at Zone 3, 4000, Corrector 60; replaces it in its case and returns the case to the trail box; (d) Replaces and secures the muzzle cover; (e) Takes his post. No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5, closes the caisson doors; (b) Assisted by No. 5, raises and secures the caisson apron; (c) Replaces the shot tongs in its fastenings; (d) Takes his post. No. 5: (a) Replaces the cartridge case carriers; (b) Assists No. 4 in closing the caisson doors; (c) Assists No. 4 in raising and securing the caisson apron; (d) Takes his post. Nos. 6 and 7: (a) Assist No. 3 in setting fuzes at safety, and replacing projectiles in chest; (b) Return and secure the tools used in digging trench for trail; (c) Take their respective posts. If the situation is such as to make it probable that the guns will have to defend themselves from close attack the command sights for fire at will may be added either to the command for preparation for action or to that for resuming the march order. At such command, the gunner sets the deflection Zero, range 1000; No. 3 sets corrector 60, range zero. STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH FORMATION OF THE GUN SQUADS 1. To Form the Gun Squads (Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 2. TO TELL OFF THE SQUADS (Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 73 3. POSTS OF THE GUN SQUADS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED (Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch excepting last paragraph — in place of which insert as follows) If no special place of formation is designated, each gun squad when formed at the carriages, is posted in rear of its caisson; each caisson squad in rear of the second caisson of its section. 4. TO POST THE GUN SQUADS (Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 5. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED The gunner is opposite the rear of the left wheel of the piece, No. 4 is opposite the front of the right wheel of the caisson, the carpenter mechanic is opposite the right wheel of the battery wagon, the saddler mechanic is opposite the right wheel of the store wagon, all 2 feet outside the wheels and facing to the front. The remaining men of each of the dismounted squads are posted as a squad as prescribed in paragraph above, relative to the posts of the gun squads, and each squad is commanded by the right front rank man of the squad. 6. TO POST THE CANNONEERS 1. Cannoneers j 2. POSTS. Each gunner repeats the com- mand posts. Each gunner, each No. 4 and the carpenter and saddler mechanics leave the ranks, if formed, and move in double time by the shortest practicable routes to their posts at the carriages. The remainder of each dismounted squad if not posted as in paragraph above, relative to the method of posting squads, assembles there, the men moving at a double time. For preliminary instruction the dismounted squads, on entering the park, are first posted with their carriages; the cannoneers are then sent to their posts by the foregoing command. The command is general, however, and is applicable when the can- noneers are in or out of rank, at a halt or marching, and when the carriages are limbered or unlimbered. 74 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 7. TO MOUNT THE CANNONEERS ON THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED Each gunner mounts and stands on the left brake beam of his piece; each No. 4 mounts and seats himself on the chest of his caisson; the carpenter mechanic and the saddler mechanic mount and stand on the step of the battery wagon and store wagon bodies respectively. Each man so mounted operates the brake of his carriage as necessary. Whatever the post or formation of their squad these men take their posts at the carriages limbered without command when the teams are hitched and mount to operate the brakes if the carriages are put in motion. The remaining cannoneers are habitually dismounted. In garrison, however, when ammunition is not carried, they may, at the discretion of the instructor, be mounted on the chests for the purpose of training caisson teams in heavier draft. In mounting the cannoneers care will be taken to place them so that the weight at the end of the pole will not be increased. 8. TO DISMOUNT THE CANNONEERS FROM THE CARRIAGES Each gunner and the carpenter and saddler mechanic dismount without command whenever necessary in the operation of the brake. All dismount with the drivers of their carriages. 9. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNL1MBERED AND NOT PREPARED FOR ACTION Gun Section The gunner immediately in rear of the cannoneer's seat on the left side of the trail. No. 1, immediately in rear of the cannoneer's seat on the right side of the trail. No. 2, 2 feet in rear of and opposite the right of the caisson limber chest. Nos. 3,5 and 6, 2 feet in rear of the caisson chest in the order named from right to left. No. 4, 2 feet in rear of No. 5 covering him. Nos. 7 and 8, 2 feet in rear of the caisson limber chest, No. 7 on the right and both on the left of No. 2. STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 75 Caisson Section First Caisson: No. 4, 2 feet in rear of the center of the limber chest. Nos. 5 and 6, 2 feet in rear of the caisson chest, No. 5 on the right. Second Caisson: Nos. 4 and 5, 2 feet in rear of the limber chest, No. 6 on the right. The cannoneers stand at attention at their posts facing to the front. 10. TO CHANGE THE POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS (Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 11. TO MOVE BY HAND THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED To the Front Gun Sections: 1. Pieces (caissons) forward; 2. MARCH; 3. HALT. In each gun squad at the first command the gunner (No. 4) releases the brake. Nos. 1 and 2 hasten to the end of the pole; Nos. 3 and 4 to the limber wheels; Nos. 5 and 6 to the rear of the limber; Nos. 7 and 8 to the howitzer (caisson body) wheels; even numbers on the right, odd numbers on the left. The gunner remains near the brake and directs the movement. At the command march all assist in moving the carriage to the front. At the command halt the carriage is stopped, the pole is lowered to the ground, the ropes replaced and all resume their posts. Nos. 5 and 6 may be directed to work in rear of the howitzer (caisson body) if the nature of the footing renders their efforts there more efficient. In a caisson the instructor designates the carriage to be moved. In each caisson section at the first command No. 4 of the designated carriage releases the brake. Both Nos. 4 then hasten to the end of the pole; both Nos. 5 to the limber wheels; both Nos. 6 to the caisson body wheels; No. 7 to the rear of the caisson body. The caisson corporal assists and superintends the move- ment. To the Rear 1. Pieces (caissons) backward; 2. MARCH; 3. HALT. Exe- cuted as in the preceding paragraph, except that in a gun section Nos. 5 and 6 place themselves in front of the limber or howitzer 76 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE (caisson body) and in a caisson section No. 7 places himself in front of the caisson body and the cannoneers move the carriage to the rear. The limbered howitzer or loaded caisson can be moved by hand by the cannoneers of a section only when the footing is hard and level and then only for short distances without fatigue. When the conditions are other than these extra men must be provided. In such cases it may be advantageous to use the picket ropes which are rigged as follows: To the Front. — At the first command, the gunner and No. 1 each procure a picket rope and attach them to the wheel hooks on the right and left piece (caisson) wheels, respectively, stretch- ing them to the front. The instructor assigns the necessary number of cannoneers to work at the end of the pole and on the picket ropes. At the command march, all working together move the piece (caisson) in the direction indicated. At the com- mand halt the carriage is stopped, picket ropes replaced, and all resume their posts. It will sometimes be found advantageous to attach the middle of a picket rope around the double-tree bolt, drawing the ends out under the double-tree and giving them a half hitch around the end of the pole. By attaching additional ropes to these ends any desired length can be secured, and the piece, or caisson, moved as above described. To the Rear. — Executed as in the preceding section except that the ropes are stretched to the rear and the carriage is moved to the rear. In moving carriages by hand cannoneers should be taught to place themselves alternately on each side of the rope and to take sufficient distance so that they will not interfere with one another. They should be practised in pulling together. For short distances, five men, well placed on a rope, can pull more than a horse. In a caisson section, the caisson corporal and No. 4 of the designated carriage procure and attach the ropes. 12. DISPOSITION OF THE CARRIAGES BEFORE AND AFTER UNLIMBERING Before Unlimbering. — The piece and the caisson are beside each other, 1 yard apart, poles pointing in opposite directions, STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 77 muzzle of the howitzer pointing in the direction of fire, the rear of the caisson wheels abreast of the single-trees of the howitzer limber. The caisson of the gun section is normally on the left of the piece, with respect to the direction of tire, but may be placed on the right when so ordered. The interval of i yard should not be materially increased, otherwise the amount of manhandling is increased or the amount of cover obtained from the carriages is greatly diminished. In emergencies the carriages may be unlimbered from any formation. Dispositions to meet various situations should be practised. When not horsed, the carriages are drawn by the cannoneers and the instructor gives the necessary instructions for moving the carriages limbered by the shortest routes into the pre- scribed positions. After Unlimbering. — The adjacent wheels of the howitzer carriage and caisson limber are about i foot apart, the howitzer muzzle and the limber pole pointing to the front, The caisson is on the same side of the piece as the limber, the rear of its wheels opposite the rear end of the handspikes; the connecting pole pointing to the front and directly in rear of the limber wheel more distant from the piece. The caisson of the gun section is normally unlimbered on the left of the piece, but, w T hen so directed, it may be placed on the right. The howitzer is placed slightly in advance to allow for recoil on the first shot, which on ordinary ground is about 10 inches. The interval of i foot may be increased to permit wide move- ments of the trail if they are anticipated, but effort should be made to preserve the protection afforded by the shields. The piece limber is placed in rear of the howitzer 10 yards from the end of the trail, the pole pointing to the rear. In active service, and in instruction simulating service con- ditions, the teams are placed under cover in the vicinity of the position ; if no cover is obtainable in the vicinity, they are placed in line in rear of either flank at such place as the instructor may designate. On occasions of ceremony, or when a post is not designated, the piece team is placed directly in rear of the piece, facing to the front, the heads of the lead horses 25 yards from the rear of the caisson bodies. The caisson team is placed 2 yards from and abreast of the piece team on its left (right) if the caisson is on the left (right) of the piece. 78 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 13. TO UNLIMBER General Rules i. On account of the extreme difficulty of man handling heavy field materiel, the teams will be used to draw the carriages to the positions they are to occupy in firing unless the necessity for concealment demands the placing of the carriages by hand. In the latter case a sufficient number of cannoneers with picket ropes should be employed at each carriage in turn to move it promptly to its proper position. 2. In order to avoid unnecessary strain on the piece wheels and increased difficulties of draft, the howitzer should usually be left in its traveling position as long as practicable. For moving short distance over smooth ground, however, the piece may be in its firing position. 3. The howitzer is habitually shifted to its firing position before unlimbering. 4. The howitzer may or may not be prepared for action before unlimbering. 5. In unlimbering to fire to the front, the caisson establishes the position. 6. In unlimbering to fire to the rear, the piece establishes the position. 7. If necessary to move the carriages by hand to the firing position, they are moved before being unlimbered. 8. In the maneuvers described in paragraphs concerning the direction of movements the terms right, left, front, and rear are referred to the direction of the muzzle as front. TO UNLIMBER The Howitzer,— UNLIMBER THE HOWITZER. Nos. 6, 2, 7 and 8 grasp the right and left trail handles, respectively, and stand ready to lift. Nos. 4 and 5 grasp and raise the pole of the piece limber. The gunner releases the trail prop, unfastens and turns the pintle bolt, and commands: HEAVE. The trail is raised until the lunette is clear of the pintle; the gunner commands: DRIVE ON. Nos. 4 and 5 pull the limber to its position in rear of the piece; the trail is lowered until the prop rests on the ground. Nos. 6 and 2 fasten the spade in its firing STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 79 position and turn over and latch the right and left handspikes, respectively. Nos. 6, 2, 7 and 8 grasp the right and left handspikes, and the right and left trail handles, respectively, and stand ready to lift. The gunner commands: HEAVE. The trail is lifted sufficiently for the gunner to pull the trail prop to the front, and is then lowered to the ground. The gunner fastens the trail prop. The howitzer is ordinarily unlimbered before the caisson. The Caisson.— UNLXMBER THE CAISSON. Nos. 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 hasten to the caisson. Nos. 4 and 5 take position on the connecting pole, Nos. 6 and 7 at the limber wheels even numbers on the right, odd numbers on the left, No 8 at the limber pole. No. 4 unlatches the pintle; No. 5 lowers the connecting pole prop; together they raise the lunette from the pintle; No. 4 commands DRIVE ON. At this command Nos. 6, 7 and 8 move the limber free of the caisson. Nos. 4 and 5 lower the connecting pole until the prop rests on the ground. Nos. 4 and 5 then assist in moving the limber to its position beside the howitzer under the direction of No. 4. The chief of section supervises the unlimber- ing and assigns Nos. 1, 2 and 3 to assist in moving the limber if necessary. In unlimbering the caisson section Nos. 4 and 5 perform the duties of Nos. 4 and 5 of a gun section and No. 6 of the first caisson and Nos. 6 and 7 of the second caisson, assisted by Nos. 4 and 5, the duties prescribed for Nos. 6, 7 and 8 of a gun section. 14. TO FIRE TO THE FRONT OR TO THE REAR The carriages being in double section or in section column: ACTION FRONT (REAR). If marching the carriage which establishes the position halts. If the carriages are in double section, the carriage which does not establish the position moves to its front inclining away from the carriage already in place; makes an about and moves to its position beside the halted carriage. If the carriages are in section column, the carriage which does not establish the position moves to its front inclining to the right, passing the other carriage if necessary, makes a left about and takes its position beside the halted carriage. If in ranks, the cannoneers break ranks. 80 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE As soon as the caisson halts, No. 4 sets the brake and, if mounted, dismounts, the caisson team is then unhitched by Nos. 4 and 5, No. 5 working on the near and No. 4 on the off side, No. 5 then lets down the pole. Similarly as soon as the piece halts, the gunner sets the brake, the team is unhitched by No. 2 and No. 6, No. 6 working on the near and No. 2 on the off side, No. 6 lets down the pole. Unless otherwise directed, the halted carriage is approached by the moving carriage so that the caisson will be on the left of the piece when unlimbered. If the piece is in. its traveling position the chief of section habitually causes it to be shifted to the firing position before the piece is unlimbered. 15. DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS IN LIMBERING To Limber The Howitzer.— LIMBER THE HOWITZER. Nos. 7 and 8 loosen the earth about the spade, if necessary. Nos. 6 and 2 extend the trail handspikes. Nos. 6, 2, 7 and 8 grasp the right and left handspikes and the right and left trail handles, respec- tively, and stand ready to lift. The gunner releases trail prop: commands HEAVE and the trail is raised and then lowered until the prop rests on the ground. Nos. 6 and 2 unlatch and turn back the right and left handspikes, respectively; and turn back and fasten the spade. Nos. 4 and 5 grasp and raise the pole of the piece limber and back the limber to the end of the trail. Nos. 6, 2, 7 and 8 grasp the right and left trail handles and the right and left upper trail handles, respectively; and stand ready to lift. The gunner adjusts the pintle bolt for limbering; commands : HEAVE, the trail is lifted; the limber is backed under the trail; No. 2 removes the prop to the right with his front foot and the trail is lowered upon the limber so that the pintle enters the lunette. The gunner turns and fastens the pintle bolt, and fastens the prop. Nos. 4 and 5 place the end of the limber pole on the ground. The howitzer is ordinarily limbered before the caisson. If the team is brought up it is hitched upon completion of the limbering without command. No. 6 engages the pole in the yoke. No. 6 and No. 2 then hitch the team, No. 6 working on the near side and No. 2 on the off side. STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 81 The Caisson.— LIMBER THE CAISSON. Nos. 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 hasten to the caisson; No. 4 releases the brake; Nos. 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 take posts as for unlimbering, Nos. 6, 7 and 8, assisted by Nos. 4 and 5 if necessary, back the limber up to the caisson under the direction of No. 4; Nos. 4 and 5 raise the connecting pole of the caisson; No. 5 raises and secures the prop; together they place the lunette over the pintle; No. 4 latches the pintle; No. 8 lowers the limber pole to the ground; the chief of section supervises the limbering and, if necessary, directs Nos. 1, 2 and 3 to assist. If the ground is more favorable the caisson body may be run toward the limber. If the team is brought up it is hitched without command. No. 5 engages the pole in the yoke. The team is then hitched, No. 5 working on the near side and No. 4 on the off side. In limbering a caisson section Nos. 4 and 5 perform the duties prescribed for Nos. 4 and 5 of a gun section and No. 6 of the first caisson and Nos. 6 and 7 of the second caisson assisted by Nos. 4 and 5 the duties of Nos. 6. 7 and 8 of a gun section. 16. TO LEAVE THE PARK (Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 17. POSITIONS OF THE HOWITZER WHEN MARCHING When prepared for movement the howitzer is always locked by one of the traveling locks, and the pawls are disengaged from the rockers. When locked by the rear traveling lock the howitzer is said to be in traveling position. It is always put in this position for marches of any length. When locked to the recoil cylinder by means of the cylinder retaining ring, the howitzer is said to be in firing position. It may be locked by the front traveling lock and moved for short distances while in this position. 18. TO SHIFT THE HOWITZER FROM THE TRAVELING TO THE FIRING POSITION The howitzer being limbered and in its traveling position: SHIFT TO FIRING POSITION: The gunner procures the socket wrench; engages the pawls as soon as the locking pin of the 6 82 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE traveling lock has been removed; directs the shifting of the howitzer from the traveling to the firing position. Nos. i and 3 remove the breech cover. No. 3 procures waste and oil; assisted by No. 7, cleans and oils the unpainted surfaces of the recoil lug, the guide rails and the gun slides; replaces the waste and oiler; procures the necessary wrenches; assists No. 1 in replacing and locking the retaining ring, and in replacing the wrenches. No. 1 removes the cylinder retaining ring; procures waste and oil from No. 3; cleans and oils the rear end of the cylinder, and the threads and front surfaces of the retaining ring; after the howitzer has been moved to its firing position, and before the piece is unlimbered, disengages the pawls; assisted by No. 3 replaces and locks the retaining ring; replaces the wrenches. No. 6 procures the shifting bar, and places it under the breech in front of the traveling lock lug, the flattened end of the bar resting on the left flask. Nos. 2, 6 and 8 then use the bar to support the breech while No. 7 removes the locking pin of the rear traveling lock. Nos. 2, 6, 7 and 8 man the shifting bar, and, under the direc- tion of the gunner, support the breech while the gunner operates the elevating mechanism until the traveling lock lug is clear of the traveling lock. The bar is then placed against the rear of the breech, with the flattened end against any convenient part of the left side of the trail, and the howitzer is moved forward until the rear of the recoil lug is flush with the rear cy Under head. Using the socket wrench, the gunner aligns one of the notches on the rear of the cylinder with the locating pin of the recoil lug and causes the howitzer to be moved forward to its firing position. It is important that the gunner carefully align the notch and the locating pin before the piece is shoved home. No. 6 places the shifting bar on the ground, pointing to the rear, 3 yards in rear of the end of the trail or replaces it on the carriage depending upon whether or not the carriage is to be unlimbered immediately. No. 7 releases the rear traveling lock from its right clip. The gunner replaces the socket wrench in the tool box. STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 83 19. TO SHIFT THE HOWITZER FROM THE FIRING TO THE TRAVELING POSITION SHIFT TO TRAVELING POSITION : The gunner releases the rear traveling lock from its front clip, and swings it to No. 7, who fastens it in its right clip; traverses the piece until the azi- muth is at the middle of the scale; engages the pawls, elevates until the traveling lock lug will just clear the front of the travel- ing lock when the howitzer is retracted and directs the shifting of the howitzer from the firing to the traveling position. No. 1 procures the necessary wrenches, and assisted by No. 3 unlocks and removes the cylinder retaining ring; after the how- itzer has been retracted, replaces the retaining ring, and assists the gunner in disengaging the pawls. No. 3 assists No. 1 in unlocking and removing the retaining ring, replaces the wrenches; procures waste and oil; cleans and oils the guide rails and gun slides; and replaces the waste and oiler. Nos. 2 and 6 attach the retracting apparatus to the howitzer, and No. 6 procures the shifting bar. Assisted by the gunner, if necessary, No. 2 operates the re- tracting apparatus until the traveling lock lug is above the rear traveling lock; removes the retracting tongs from the lug, and secures the retracting apparatus. No. 6 places the shifting bar under the breech in front of the traveling lock lug, the flattened end of the bar resting on the left flask; Nos. 6, 7 and 8 man the bar, and support the breech while the gunner operates the elevating, and, if necessary, the travers- t ing mechanisms until the howitzer rests in the rear of the travel- ing lock. No. 1 operates the pawl handle while the gunner operates the elevating mechanism until the rockers are clear of the pawls. Nos. 7 and 8 use the bar to support the breech while No, 6 inserts the locking pin. No. 6 replaces the shifting bar. Nos. 1 and 3, assisted by the gunner or No. 2, replace the breech cover. 84 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 1. TO PREPARE FOR ACTION The carriages being in position limbered or unlimbered : PREPARE FOR ACTION. Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order given below: Gunner: (a) Removes the hood from the sight bar; (b) Removes the sight shank from its case and places the sight shank in the sight standard, setting the range at 3000 in zone 3, the elevation level scale at 300 and the peep sight deflec- tion at zero, in the absence of any command to the contrary; (c) Takes the panoramic sight from No. 2 and places the sight in its seat, making sure that the sight is clamped and that the deflection is set at zero; (d) Assisted by No. 3, raises and fastens the top shield; (e) Operates the traversing and elevating gear; (J) Seats himself in the gunner's seat. No. 1: (a) Assisted by No. 3 removes the breech cover if it is in place and throws it to the right rear of the trail; (b) Equips himself with a wiping cloth and a lanyard, slinging the lanyard over his right shoulder and hooking the ends to- gether under his left arm; (c) Operates the breech mechanism, examines the breech block bore, and chamber, cleaning any parts requiring it, leaving the breech open except when the gun is loaded; (d) Seats himself on the trail seat. No. 2: (a) Procures the panoramic sight and hands it to the gunner; (b) Assisted by No. 6 lowers the apron of the piece; (c) Distributes tow or waste to the cannoneers; (d) Takes his post at the caisson limber. No. 3: (a) Removes the muzzle cover; (b) Equips himself with a fuse setter, slinging the case strap over his left shoulder arid under his right arm; (c) Assists the gunner in raising the top shield; (d) Removes the fuse setter from its case and sets it, corrector 60, zone 3, range 3000, in the absence of a command to the contrary. (e) Takes his post, fuse setter in hand. GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 85 No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5 lowers the apron of the caisson and opens the caisson chest; (b) Assisted by No. 5, removes the loading barrows from their brackets; (c) Takes the upper loading barrow, extends its handles, and stands it on the ground against the caisson limber wheel between the chest and the wheel farthest from the piece, tray stop of the barrow down and convex side of the tray next to the wheel; (d) Draws from, the caisson chest a cartridge case carrier, opens it, and lays it on the ground under and parallel to the bot- tom edge of the lower chest door; (e) Assists No. 5 to open the caisson limber; (/) Takes his post. No. 5: (a) Assists No. 4 in lowering the apron of the caisson; (b) Assists No. 4 in removing the loading barrows from their brackets; (c) Takes the lower loading barrow, extends its handles, and stands it on the ground against the caisson wheel between the chest and the wheel farthest from the piece, tray stop of the barrow down and convex side of the tray next the wheel; (d) Unfastens the shot tongs of the caisson and places them above the upper chest door, the ends of the tong handles under the chest door handle on the side farthest from the piece, tongs resting on the edge of the door, handles extending to the front; (e) Assists No. 4 to open the caisson limber; (/) Unfastens the shot tongs of the caisson limber and places them on the limber door, as prescribed for the caisson tongs on the caisson door; (g) Takes his post. No 6: (a) Assists No. 2 to lower the apron of the piece; (b) Prepares the rammer for use and lays in on the ground, head resting on the breech cover 2 yards in rear of the ends of the hand- spikes, staff extended to the rear; (c) Takes his post. No. 7: (a) Procures the necessary tools and assists No. 8 in digging a trench for the trial, if ordered; (b) Takes his post. In a caisson section at the command prepare for action, Nos. 4, 5 and 6 of the first caisson and Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of the second 86 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE caisson perform the duties prescribed for Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of a gun section, so far as they relate to the preparation of their caisson and its limber for action. The cannoneers* report to their chief of section if any of the parts of the materiel are out of order. After firing the diaphragms are stored with the empty car- tridge cases and the unused bags of powder are destroyed. TO REMOVE THE LOADING BARROWS The piece being in the firing position and unlimbered, to re- move the loading barrows: No. 4 stands on the left and No. 5 on the right side of the trail, facing it; No. 4 removes the loading barrow pin, grasps the left forward handle supports of both barrows with the left hand, and grasps the left rear handle supports similarly with the right hand. In the same manner No. 5 grasps the right forward and rear handle supports with his right and left hands respectively; together they turn the barrows until they are clear of the brackets; No. 4 moving his hands to the rear and No. 5 his to the front; No. 4 lowers and No. 5 raises the right hand; the barrows are turned slightly and lifted clear of the trail. The carriages limbered, may be prepared for action before reaching the firing position. The duties of the cannoneers are the same as at the carriages unlimbered; except that the breech is closed; the firing pin is released; the panoramic sight is left in its case; the aprons are not lowered; the loading barrows, cartridge-case carriers, the breech, muzzle and sight bar covers are fastened to the carriage and the caisson and caisson limbers are not opened. Immediately after establishing the carriages in position the preparation for action is completed without command and the cannoneers take their posts for serving the piece. If prepare for action has not been given before establishing the carriages in firing position, that command is habitually given by each chief of section as soon as the carriages have been unlim- bered and established. The instructor may, however, caution do not prepare for action when he wishes to exercise the personnel in limbering and unlimbering only or in the details of preparation for action. GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 87 POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED AND PREPARED FOR ACTION The same as when unlimbered and not prepared for action, except that the gunner and No. i are seated astride the trail seats on their respective sides facing the howitzer. During the service of the piece Nos. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 take such positions as best to insure orderly and rapid service of the piece. 2. TO FIRE Duties of the Gunner in Detail The duties of the gunner in the service of the piece are: 1. To set the deflection. 2. To apply the deflection difference, if any. 3. To set off the site. 4. To set the range on the sight shank. 5. To level the cross level bubble. 6. To give the direction to the piece. 7. To give the elevation to the piece. 8. To call ready when the piece is accurately laid. 9. To move his head out of the way of the sight before the piece is fired. 10. To give the command to fire the piece. 11. To measure a deflection. 12. To measure a site. Duties or No. 1 in Detail 1. To set and release the brake. 2. To disengage the pawls. 3. To open the breech. 4. To close the breech. 5. To engage the pawls. 6. To fire the piece. Duties of No. 2 in Detail 1. To ram the projectile. 2. To receive the cartridge case. Duties of No. 3 in Detail 1. Assists at the loading barrow. 2. In time fire, sets the fuze setter. 88 FIELD ARTILLERYMANS' GUIDE 3. In time fire, sets the fuze. . 4. Assists No. 4. Duties of No. 4 in Detail 1. Procures the shot tongs. - 2. Indicates the projectile to be used, 3. Draws the projectile from the chest. 4. Replaces the shot tongs. 5. In time fire, removes waterproof hood and safety wire. 6. Secures a powder charge. 7. Removes the diaphragm. 8. Prepares the charge for zone 1 or 2, if necessary. 9. Inserts charge in breech. Duties of Nos. 5 and 6 in Detail 1. Turn the trail handspikes back on the trail as soon as the piece has been given its approximate direction. 2. Procure a loading barrow. 3. Receive the projectile. 4. In time fire, assist in the preparation of the projectile. 5. Transport the projectile to the breech. 6. Prepare to receive another projectile. Duties of Nos. 7 and 8 in Detail The duties of Nos. 7 and 8 in the service of the piece are: No. 7 performs the duties of No. 5 and No. 8 the duties of No. 6, using the second loading barrow when ammunition is to be drawn from the caisson limber. When specially ordered Nos. 7 and 8 may be required to alternate with Nos. 5 and 6 in serving projectiles. Upon going into action Nos. 7 and 8 may be utilized for the construction of concealment for the carriages, digging the trail trench, etc., etc., Nos. 5 and 6 carrying all the projectiles if the battery is actually firing. The work is done under the immediate supervision of the executive or his assistant. 3. TO RESUME THE ORDER FOR MARCHING The carriages being prepared for action, limbered or unlim- bered, to resume the order for marching: MARCH ORDER. GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 89 Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order given below: Gunner: (a) Hands the panoramic sight to No. 2; (b) Removes and replaces the sight shank; (c) Assisted by No. 3 lowers the top shield; (d) Secures the hood on the sight bar; (e) Brings his piece to the center of traverse; (0 Takes his post. No. 1: (a) Releases the brake of the piece, if set; (b) Replaces the lanyard in the trail box; (c) Sees that the piece is unloaded, closes the breech; (d) Assisted by No. 3 replaces the breech cover if ordered; (e) Takes his post. No. 2: (a) Takes the panoramic sight from the gunner and replaces it in its box; (b) Assisted by No. 6 raises and secures the apron of the piece; (c) Takes his post. No. 3: (a) Replaces the muzzle cover; (b) Assists the gunner in lowering and fastening the top shield; (c) Replaces the fuze setter in the trail box; (d) Takes his post. No. 4: (a) Returns the upper loading barrow to the howitzer and, assisted by No. .5, replaces both barrows in their brackets; (b) Assisted by No. 5, replaces cartridge cases, if ordered, replaces cartridge case carriers in the caisson chest and the caisson shot tongs in their fastenings, closes the caisson doors, raises and secures the apron of the caisson; (c) Assisted by No. 5, replaces cartridge cases, if ordered, replaces cartridge-case carriers in the limber chest and limber shot tongs in their fastenings, closes the limber doors; (d) Takes his post. No. 5: (a) Returns the lower loading barrow to the howitzer and assists No. 4 to replace both barrows in their brackets; (b) Assists No. 4 to raise and secure the apron of the caisson, to replace the cartridge cases, if ordered, and to replace the car- tridge-case carriers in the caisson chest, to replace the caisson shot tongs in their fastenings and to close the caisson doors ; (c) Assists No. 4 to replace cartridge cases, if ordered, to re- place cartridge-case carriers in the caisson limber chest, to replace 90 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the limber shot tongs in their fastenings and to close the limber doors; (d) Takes his post. No. 6: (a) Assists No. 2 in raising and securing the apron of the piece; (6) Unscrews the rammer staff and secures it in its fasten- ings; (c) Takes his post. No. 7: Has no routine duties. No. 8: Has no routine duties. In a caisson section at the command march order, Nos. 4, 5 and 6 of the first caisson and Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of the second caisson perform the duties prescribed for Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of a gun section so far as they relate to the preparation of their limber and caisson for march order. TO REPLACE THE LOADING BARROWS The piece being in the firing position and unlimbered, to replace the loading barrows. No. 4 folds the handles of his barrow and carries it to the left side of the trail; holds it across the trail, bottom of the barrow up and tray stop to the rear, in order for No. 5 to grasp the handle supports; similarly No. 5 carries his barrow to the right side of the trail and holds it below No. 4's barrow, for No. 4 to grasp the handle supports;' both cannoneers then grasp both barrows as previously described. No. 4 lowers and No. 5 raises the right hand; the barrows are turned slightly, lowered between the flasks of the trail, and turned again so that the left forward handle supports are just in rear of their bracket in the proper opening of the left reinforce plate; No. 4 raises and No. 5 lowers the right hand, the barrows are turned, No. 4 moving his hands to the front and No. 5 his to the rear; and the barrows are seated in their bracket one at a time, be- ginning with the lower one. No. 4 replaces the loading barrow pin. If it is intended to resume the fire but in another position, so that the limbering of the carriages is necessitated, the command march order need not be given. At the command for limbering, the carriages are placed in the order described. ANTI-GAS WHAT SHOULD THE SOLDIER KNOW ABOUT GAS ATTACKS AND THE USE OF HIS MASK? The first thing for the soldier to know about gas attacks is that ignorance and carelessness may mean death to him. ' If the sol- dier is gassed and is not killed outright, he will suffer hours, days, and maybe, weeks of horrible agony. He should remember that his gas mask is his only protection. It is an absolute safeguard against all known forms of gas attacks. Q. What must a soldier do when "gas alarm" devices are used to warn against an oncoming gas cloud attack? A. Hold breath and put mask on in shortest time possible. Q. Is the mask an absolute safeguard against the soldier being gassed, if it is put on properly? A. It is. Q. What kind of gases are used? A. Lachrymatory or tear producing-gases, which irritate the mucous membranes of the eye, causing profuse weeping and swelling of the eyelids. This gas also causes an irritation of the mucous membranes of the nose and mouth to the extent that vomiting may be produced. Tear-producing gases tempora- rily blind the soldier. The effect of these tear-producing gases wear off in from three to four hours. The soldier must bear in mind that this kind of gas frequently remains in the air for some time and his eyes may become red even if there is a very slight amount of it present. After a cloud of this kind has passed, the eyes should be bathed frequently with cold water. Benzyl bromide is the chief tear-producing gas used at present. Asphyxiating gases are far more severe in their action. Their strength can be realized when it is known that a dilu- tion of one part of chlorine or bromine in iooo parts of air is fatal, while a mixture of i part of phosgene to 5,000 parts of air will destroy the life of the soldier who inhales it. 91 92 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE These gases act to a lesser degree on the eye than do the lachrymatory gases, but their action is particularly virulent on the membranes of the respiratory tract, which they cause to swell rapidly, and finally destroy. The result of inhaling any one of these gases is oedema of the lungs, or water in the lungs, accompanied by persistent coughing and spitting of blood, then creating difficulty in breathing, the soldier becoming blue and struggling for breath. Death may be almost instantaneous, or it may be postponed for several days, the sufferer in the meantime not being able to eat any- thing and undergoing great agony. Many of the cases in which recovery does take place develop later a chronic disease of the lungs. The soldier's only protection against these lachrymatory and asphyxiating gases is his mask. Paraly- zant gases produce instant death by paralyzing the central nervous system. Prussic acid is a type of the gas used. One part of this gas to 10,000 parts of air will kill instantly. This gas is used only in gas shells. Again, is it necessary for the soldier to understand that his mask is his only protection against instant death. Q. Are lachrymatory and asphyxiating gases ever used together in a gas cloud attack? A. They are. And it is necessary for the soldier to bear this in mind and not attempt to remove his mask under any circum- stances during an attack. He must never remove it until commanded to do so by his superior officers. Removal of his mask, or even the mouthpiece, for the fraction of a minute — in event that the soldier inhales outside air — may prove fatal or cause terrible suffering. Q. Is it possible for a soldier to make a gas attack with grenades and bombs, or may gas bombs be thrown from a trench mortar? A. Yes. Hand grenades of various kinds made of glass and iron, and containing a quantity of gas-producing liquid are used in trench warfare. Iron bombs with a bursting charge of black powder and containing gas liquid are also used in trench mortars. Q. May gas shells be used when the wind is blowing in any direc- tion? ANTI-GAS 93 A. Yes. Unlike cloud gas, gas shells can be used in wind blowing in any direction. The strength of the wind, how- ever, has considerable influence on the effective use of the shells. A wind of seven miles per hour or less is as high a wind as is practicable for their effective use. Q. How is a gas cloud attack brought about? A. The method of making a gas cloud attack is entirely depend- ent upon the direction of the wind. The gas is carried up to the trenches compressed in steel cylinders. These steel cylinders are buried in the side of the trench and connected with pipes leading over the parapet. When the valves of the cylinders are opened the gas escapes with a hissing sound, which, on a still night, can frequently be heard at a consider- able distance. It mixes with the air and is carried by the wind towards the opposing trenches, spreading out as it goes forward. A continuous wave of gas and air is thus formed, the color of which may vary. In a very dry atmosphere it may be almost transparent and slightly greenish in color, while in damp weather it forms a white cloud. The gas may also be mixed with smoke of any color. A cloud attack can only take place when there is a steady but not too strong wind blowing from the enemy's lines toward our own; a wind between four and eight miles an hour is the most likely condition. An eight-mile wind will carry the gas cloud about as quickly as a man walks rapidly. An eight-mile wind will carry the gas ioo yards in twenty seconds. Gas attacks may occur at any time of the day, but are most likely to be made during the night or in the early morning. Gas attacks have been made on a front varying from one to rive miles; their effects at points up to eight miles behind the front trenches have been sufficiently severe to make it necessary to wear masks for the entire distance. Q. What is the tactical value of a gas shell attack? A. Gas used in shells has a much more definite military value than gas used in clouds. The gas shell has, in fact, become one of the most important weapons in modern warfare, and at present 33^ per cent, of the shells used on the western front are gas shells. They fulfill a double purpose. They are excellent in forming 94 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE a barrage to prevent the bringing up of supplies and reinforce- ments and they are most excellent in silencing artillery posi- tions. Gas is used in shells of both heavy and light field howitzers; the 5.9 minnewerfer is the shell most used by the Germans. Q. How may gas shells be recognized? A. (a) Many gas shells make a peculiar wobbling noise as they come thru the air. This is due to their being filled with a liquid instead of a solid, (b) The noise of the burst is very small and might be mistaken for a "blind." There is a difference, however. And after hearing a few gas shells burst, one can recognize them, (c) Most gas shells on bursting form a dense white cloud which hangs together in a peculiar way and is carried along by the wind. This is the easiest sign by which the gas shell can be recognized. The density of the cloud varies with the weather conditions. It is greatest when the air is damp and least when it is dry. Q. How are warnings of shell attacks given? A. Gas shell attacks are local in their effects and the gas does not spread to so great a distance as does the gas cloud. Therefore, the character of the "gas alarm" for gas shells is different from that for "gas cloud." In the case of gas shells, every man must be his own sentry and be constantly on the lookout for that form of attack to give the alarm as soon as he detects the gas. For this reason, a local gas shell alarm must be arranged for each individual unit. It must be distinct from the cloud gas alarm and every man in the unit must know what it means. It is of the utmost importance that every man within 300 yards of the first gas shell or trench mortar gas bomb get his mask on at once. Frequently gas shells do not burst at the commencement of a bombardment, but are used intermittently. For this reason, when anyone realizes that gas bombs are being fired, he must give the alarm instantly. This can be done in two ways, (a) By men, who are not in the gas at the moment or may have gotten their masks completely adjusted, shouting "GAS SHELLS " as loudly as possible. (6) By the prearranged sig- nal for the unit being given by the sentry or whoever has first realized that gas shells are being fired. On this alarm ANTI-GAS 95 may depend the safety of those men who are in dugouts or in other parts of the position, who would otherwise not get warning. Q. What protective measures should be used during gas attacks? A. There should be as little movement and talking in the trenches as possible. The soldier must be made to realize that, with the gas now used by the enemy, the strict observance of this rule may be essential for his personal safety. When an attack is in progress, all bodies of troops, all transports on the move, and all working parties should cease working until the gas cloud has passed. If a relief is coming on, units should stand fast, as far as possible, until the gas cloud has passed. Supports and parties bringing up bombs should only be allowed to move when the tactical situation demands it. If troops in support are in reserve lines of trenches and remain in or come into dugouts, they must continue to wear their gas masks. N.C.O.'s must on no account remove or open their masks to give orders. Mouthpieces may be removed when it is necessary to speak, but must be immediately replaced. The method of speaking when the mask is on is: Before removing the mouthpiece take a deep breath and shout the order while the breath is being exhaled. If the order is a long one, it may be given in jerks, the mouthpiece being placed in the mouth and a deep breath taken between the jerks. Men must always be on the lookout to help each other in case a mask is damaged. " W 7 hen a man is wounded, he must be watched to see that he does not remove his mask; if necessary, his hands should be tied. Men must be warned that, if they are slightly "gassed" before adjusting their masks, they must not remove them; the effect will wear off. After the cloud has passed and the trenches have been cleared of the gas by the apparatus provided for the purpose, the Non-Commissioned Officers in charge of each trench section will assure themselves that the trench is free from gas by raising their masks slightly and will then issue the order to take off masks. MEN WILL ON NO ACCOUNT TAKE OFF THEIR MASKS UNTIL THE ORDER TO DO SO HAS BEEN GIVEN. Dugouts and bombproofs must 96 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE be entered with caution, even after the trenches are cleared, as gas frequently remains in them for some hours. Q. What action is taken in the trenches on "gas alarm"? A. (a) Masks must be put on immediately by all ranks, (b) Men in trenches, dugouts and mine shafts must be roused, officers and artillery observation posts and all employed men warned, (c) Artillery support be called for by com- pany commanders by means of prearranged signals, (d) Warn regimental headquarters and troops in rear, (e) All ranks stand at arms in the front trenches and elsewhere, when the tactical, situation demands. (/) Blanket curtains to be adjusted and protective shields be let down and care- fully fixed, (g) All movement to cease except where necessary. Q. What action should be taken in billets and back areas? A. (a) Men in cellars or houses must be aroused, (b) The blanket curtains of protected cellars, etc., to be let down and fixed in position, (c) Masks to be put on immediately the gas is apparent. Q. How is a "gas alarm" warning given? A. For the purpose of giving the "gas alarm" the British use a strombos horn, which can be heard at very long distances. This instrument is a large horn worked by compressed air and comes in a box with two cylinders of compressed air and a rub- ber connecting tube. They are placed at intervals of not greater than 400 yards along the front line and at such points behind the front as is required to insure transmission of the warning. In addition to the strombos horn, bells and gongs made from shell cases, suspended rails, etc., are used. The buzzer wire is frequently used to send warning to the rear. No reliance can be placed upon bugles, whistles or such devices that require the use of the lungs. Q. What is meant by the "wind dangerous" period? A. "Wind dangerous " is ordered when the wind is in a dangerous quarter, no matter what the strength of the wind may be. At the same time, it is advisable that the N.C.O. be able to estimate the strength of the wind, as that has some bearing on the likelihood of an attack. The Germans seem to prefer a wind of from four to twelve miles per hour. It is during ANTI-GAS 97 a "wind dangerous " period that gas cloud attacks are usually made. Q. What precautions are necessary during a "wind dangerous" period? A. (a) All masks should be carefully inspected and the inspec- tions repeated daily. Steps must be taken to ascertain that all gas alarm appliances are in position and in good order. (b) All ranks within one mile of the front line must carry their satchels in the "alert" position. During "'wind dangerous" the chin strap of the helmet or the hat must on no account be worn under the chin, as it will impede the rapid adjustment of the mask, (c) A sentry should be posted at each strombos horn or other alarm device and instructed in its use. All working parties should have a sentry posted to give instant warning of a gas attack. A sentry should be posted to every large house or group of houses and also each Headquarters Signal Office and each independent body of men. Arrange- ments must be made by the officer in charge of the trench for warning the artillery observation post officers when in the trench. Commanders of units in billets within eight miles of the front line trenches must organize a system of giving the alarm and rousing all men in cellars and houses. At night sentries should have at least two men within reach of them, so that the alarm can be spread rapidly, (d) When a gas attack is probable, men in front trenches should sleep on the fire step instead of in dugouts.- Men sleeping in rearward lines, or in works where they are allowed to take off their equipment, must sleep with their satchels on their person. No soldier is permitted to remove his gas mask satchel for any reason whatsoever while in the front trenches or within eight miles of the front line trenches, (e) Company gas N.C,0.'s will report to company headquarters in readi- ness to assist the company commander should a gas attack occur. Q. Wliat is the best method for the soldier to pursue to protect himself against gas attacks? A. His gas mask is his only protection. The soldier must feel absolute confidence in his mask. It is the only thing that will pull him thru a gas attack successfully. He must remem- 7 98 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE ber that any carelessness may cause him his life. He is absolutely safe as long as his mask is adjusted properly. DISINFECTION OF AMERICAN BOX RESPIRATORS Respirators are to be disinfected immediately after use when- ever they are to be exchanged and worn by other men. Materials to be Used. — Two per cent, cresol solution — Liquor Cresolis Comp. Absorbent cotton. i dish towel for every two respirators. Glass tumblers. (Where glasses cannot be secured, tin cans can be cleaned and neatly trimmed.) i test-tube brush per respirator. Method. — i. Hold the mask in the hand, saturate a pledget of absorbent cotton with disinfectant and sponge the whole of the inside of the mask, including the mouthpiece. 2. Dip the test-tube brush in the disinfectant and insert into opening of the mouthpiece. Push as far as possible with rotary movement and brush back and forth repeatedly. Fifteen seconds active brushing suffices. 3. Dip the mouthpiece up to mask in disinfectant. Do not shake off the excess after removal from solution. 4. Hold the outlet valve between the forefinger and thumb, across the breadth, and cress slightly so as to open valve and dip as deeply as possible into disinfectant. Do not shake off excess. 5. Leave all parts moist with disinfectant for fifteen minutes, then wipe inside of mask (but not mouthpiece) with dish towel (not handkerchief) and allow to dry, if possible, in air before returning to satchel. DRILLS WITH BOX RESPIRATOR Note. — Drill must be word perfect in Practices A, B, and C. No variation whatever should be made at any time either in the wording or the details given below. Practice A. — Adjustment of the box respirator in the " Alert" position. ANTI-GAS 99 On the command GAS ALERT hang the box respirator round the neck with the press buttons next the body. With the right hand seize the satchel by the metal hook, with the left hand seize the sling by the metal loop and clip this on to the metal hook. Undo the press buttons, closing the satchel. The length of whipcord will then be withdrawn from the right- hand compartment, passed through the ring on the right of the satchel and carried round the waist to the ring on the left, where it is fastened. The press buttons closing the satchel will be left undone, but the flap will be put in position to keep the respirator from wet. Practice B. — Drill by numbers to obtain correct adjustment of the box respirator. It is most important that complete adjustment in the drill be obtained by all ranks in SIX SECONDS. Adjust the respirator in the " Alert" position with satchel covered but not buttoned. i. On the command ONE press down both thumbs be- tween the satchel and the body and open the satchel flap. Im- mediately seize the mask with the right hand, the metal elbow tube just outside the mask being in the palm of the hand and the thumb and first finger grasping the wire frame of the nose-clip. 2. On the command TWO bring the mask smartly out of the satchel and hold it in both hands with ALL the fingers outside round the binding and the two thumbs inside, pointing inward and upward under the elastic. At the same time THROW THE CHIN WELL FORWARD ready to enter the mask opposite the nose -clip. 3. On the command THREE bring the mask forward, dig- ging the chin into it and with the same motion bringing the elastic bands back over the crown of the head to the full extent of the retaining tape, using the thumbs. 4. On the command FOUR seize the metal elbow tube out- side the mask, thumb on the right, fingers on the left — all point- ing toward the face. Push the rubber mouthpiece well into the mouth and pull it forward until the rim of the mouthpiece lies between the teeth and the lips, and the two rubber grips are held by the teeth. .-5. On the command FIVE adjust the nose-clip to the nose, 100 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE using the thumb and first three fingers of the right hand. Run the fingers round the mask on either side of the face to make sure that the edges are not folded over. Correct any faults in ad- justment. Come smartly to attention, to show you have com- pleted the movements. Practice C. — To adjust the box respirator when carried over the shoulder and not in "Alert" position. Sling the satchel round so that it hangs in front of the body. Undo the press buttons and adjust the mask as in Practice B, allowing the satchel to hang by the rubber tube. After the nose-clip is put on, at once proceed to adjust the satchel in the " Alert" position, as in Practice A. Practice D. — To Clean Eyepieces. — On the command CLEAN EYEPIECES the right eyepiece will be gripped between the thumb and first finger of the LEFT hand. The first finger of the right hand will then be pushed gently into the fold of the mask behind the right eyepiece which will be cleaned with a gentle circular motion. The left eyepiece will be cleaned in a similar way. Practice E. — Method of Giving Orders. — It is first explained to the squad or class that the nose-clip must not be removed to talk and that before each sentence a long breath must be taken and the mouthpiece removed sideways from the mouth by turning the metal elbow tube outside the mask to one side. After speaking the mouthpiece is replaced. Officers and N.C.O's. will receive special care in Practice E. Practice F. — Method of Clearing Mask from Gas Which may have Leaked in and is Affecting the Eyes. — Press the mask close to the face, forcing out foul air round the sides and then fill again with fresh air from the lungs by blowing out round the mouthpiece. Practice G. — Method of Testing whether Trench or Dugout is Free from Gas. — With the right hand open the facepiece away from the right cheek, then loosen the nose-clip on the nose and smell GENTLY (do not take a breath). If gas is smelt, the nose-clip and mask are replaced. Then as in Drill F, that is, clear the mask and refill with fresh air. Removing Masks. — It must be seen that when masks are removed, this is done without strain on the facepiece or elastic. ANTI-GAS 101 On the command TAKE OFF MASKS, insert the fingers of the right hand under the mask at the chin, bend forward, at the same time removing the mask with an upward motion of the right hand. After all drills the mask must be wiped dry, folded correctly and put away in such a way that the rubber valve is not bent. Mouthpieces and inside of mask should be cleaned frequently. CALISTHENICS By ist Lt. S. A. Rowland, Jr. Q. How are calisthenic exercises classified? A. Neck, shoulder, arm, trunk, leg and combination exercises. Q. How many kinds of commands are used in giving the exercises? A. Two; the preparatory commands, such as arms thrust, indicating the movement to be executed; and the com- mand of execution, such as RAISE, which causes the movement to be executed. Q. How are the men assembled and placed in position for calisthenics? A. They FALL IN, COUNT OFF and TAKE DISTANCE. Q. In what respects do the commands AT EASE and REST, as herein referred to, differ from those ordinarily executed? A. During these exercises, men will not be permitted to as- sume awkward or slouching positions. During AT EASE and REST the head and body will be erect and the weight of the body will be supported equally by both legs, both feet being firmly planted on the ground. The hands (knuckles, if desired) will be placed on the hips or clasped behind the back. The legs may be spread apart if desired, but the weight of the body must not be supported by either leg entirely. Q. What is a starting position? A. An advantageous position from which to start an exercise. Q. Name the starting positions, and the appropriate com- mands to execute them from the position of attention. A. i. i. Arms forward. 2. RAISE. 2. 1. Arms sideward. 2. RAISE. 3. 1. Arms upward. 2. RAISE. 4. 1. Arms backward. 2. CROSS. 5. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 6. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 7. 1. Forearms vertical. 2. RAISE. 102 CALISTHENICS 103 8. i. Hands on shoulders. 2. PLACE. 9. 1. Fingers in rear of head. 2. LACE. 10. 1. To squatting position, hands on hips or hands on ground. 2. BEND. 11. 1. To side straddle position, hands on hips or with arms vertical. 2. HOP. Q. At what commands is the position of attention resumed from the starting positions? A. From Nos. 1 to 9, inclusive: 1. Arms. 2. DOWN. No. 10: 1. To the position of attention. 2. RISE. No. n: 1. To the position of attention. 2. HOP. Q. After the men are in a starting position and the exercise has been indicated, what commands are necessary to cause the execution of the movements? A. 1. Ready. 2. EXERCISE. One, two; one, two; or one, two, three, four, etc. Q. How is the exercise discontinued ? A. By the command HALT. Q. How are the men warned that HALT is to be given, so that they may all stop at the same instant? A. By a rising inflection on the count "one" immediately preceding HALT, except in a two-count exercise, when the rising inflection is placed on the next to the last "one"; i.e., "one," two, one, HALT. Q. What are the commands for the breathing exercise? A. 1. Breathing exercise. 2. INHALE. 3. EXHALE. At the command INHALE the arms are stretched forward and overhead, or stretched sideward and overhead, so that the palms of the hands are turned toward the body, and, at the same time, the lungs are inflated. At the command EXHALE the arms are lowered to the sides and the air expelled from the lungs. NECK EXERCISES 1. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Turn head right (or left), and then back to position. 4. Ready. 5. EX- ERCISE. Executed in two counts. 2. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Bend head forward and backward. Two counts. 104 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 3. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Bend head to right and left. Two counts. 4. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Bend head forward, right, backward, left. Circle exercise in four counts. SHOULDER EXERCISES 1. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Raise shoulders and resume position. Two counts. 2. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Move shoulders forward and back to position. Two counts. 3. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Move shoulders for- ward, upward, backward and downward. Four counts. 4. 1. Curl shoulders forward. Two counts. 5. 1. Hands on shoulders. 2. PLACE. 3. Move elbows forward and back to position. Two counts. ARM EXERCISES 1. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms forward and back to position. Two counts. 2. 1. Hands on shoulders. 2. PLACE. 3. Strike arms sideward and back to position. Two counts. 3. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms forward ; swing them sideward, forward, and back to position. Four counts. 4. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms forward, sideward, upward and downward returning to "arms to thrust" after each movement. Executed in eight counts. 5. 1. Forearms vertical. 2. RAISE. 3. Extend right arm up and the left arm down on the count one; resume fore- arms vertical at count two ; right arm down, left arm up, on count three; forearms vertical at count four. Executed in four counts, beginning slowly and gradually increasing to a rapid cadence. 6. 1 . From position of attention, arm exercise in eight counts, as follows: Forearms vertical on counts 1, 3, 5 and 7. Similar to foregoing exercise excepting in that the position of attention is resumed at counts 4 and 8. Extend the arms — right up, left down, at count two; left arm up, and right arm down, at count six. CALISTHENICS 105 TRUNK EXERCISES i. i. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Quarter bend trunk forward and back to position. Two counts. 2. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Half bend trunk forward and back to position. Two counts. 3. 1. Fingers in rear of head. 2. LACE. 3. Full bend trunk forward. Two counts. 4. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk backward. 5. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk sideward, right or left. 6. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Twist trunk side- ward, right or left. 7. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk ob- liquely forward, right or left. 8. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk forward and backward. 9. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Circle trunk right or left. LEG EXERCISES 1. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE 3. Quarter bend knees. 2. 1. Arms backward. 2. CROSS. 3. Half bend knees. 3. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Full bend knees. 4. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Extend leg forward. 5. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Raise knee. Back to position in each exercise. Two counts for each exercise. COMBINATION EXERCISES 1. 1. Arms forward overhead. 2. RAISE. 3. Swing arms downward and upward. Two counts; arms ex- tended full length; palms inward. 2. 1. Arms sideward overhead. 2. RAISE. 3. Fingers. 4. LACE. 5. Bend trunk sideward, right and left. Four counts. 3. 1. Hop to side straddle; swing arms overhead laterally, and recover position of attention. Two counts. 4. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Full bend knees and extend arms sideward. Arms are extended vigorously to 106 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the side, palms down; execute movements at a moderate cadence; breathe naturally. Two counts. 5. Raise arms, and right or left leg forward; move arms side- ward, and leg backward; move arms and leg forward; and recover position of attention. Four counts. 6. 1. Forearms vertical. 2. RAISE. 3. Extend arms up- ward and raise on toes; resume vertical position; and recover position of attention. Four counts. 7. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Swing right and left leg forward, breast high; extend right and left arm for- ward horizontally, alternating right and left. Four counts. 8. 1. To side straddle with arms overhead. 2. HOP. 3. Bend trunk forward and backward; swing arms down- ward and upward. Two counts. 9. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms side- ward and lunge sideward right and left, alternately. Four counts. 10. 1. Leaning rest in four counts. (Repeat six to eight times.) At "one" knees are bent to squatting position, hands placed on ground between the knees; at "two" the legs are extended backward, body supported by the hands and toes, knees straight, hands directly under the shoulders, back arched, head up, at "three" the first position is resumed; at "four" take the position of atten- tion. Execute the movements moderately fast, breathe naturally. 11. 1. To squatting position. 2. BEND. 3. Hands on hips. 4. PLACE. 5. Balancing the body on one leg, kick out alternately to right and left in four counts; to the right on count "one, " to the left on count "three;" resume starting position at counts "two" and "four." Execute at a moderate cadence. Q. Where can further information concerning these calisthenics be obtained. A. In the "Manual of Physical Training" by Capt. Koehler, published by the Government Printing Office, and sold by the Superintendent of Public Documents, Washington, D. C, for fifty cents. CORDAGE By Capt. R. Fellman COMMON CORDAGE KNOTS AND LASHINGS The following knots are very useful in Artillery Work, and in making quick repairs of bridges that have been partly demol- ished: i. Overhand or thumb knot 14. Bowline on a bight 2. Figure eight 15. Running bowline 3. Square, reef or flat knot 16. Cat's paw 4. Becket bend or single sheet bend 17. Sheepshank 5. Becket bend or double sheet bend 18. Rolling hitch 6. Two half hitches 7. Round turn and 2 half hitches 8. Fisherman's bend or anchor knot 9. Clove hitch 10. Timber hitch n. Telegraph hitch 12. Hawser bend 13. Bowline 19. Blackwall hitch 20. Mooring knot 21. Single wall knot 22. Crown on wall 23. Thief knot 24. Granny 25. Short splice '26. Long splice 27. Eye splice LASHINGS 1. To lash a transom to an upright spar. Fig. 28. 2. Lashing for a pair of shears. Fig. 29. 3. To lash three spars together as for a gin or tripod. Fig. 30. 107 108 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Fig. i. -Overhand or thumb knot. Fig. 2. — Figure-of- eight. Fig. 3. — Square, reef, or flat knot. Fig. 4, — Single sheet bend, or single becket bend. Fig. 5. — Double sheet bend, or double becket bend. Fig. 6. Fig. 7. Fig. 8. Fig. 6. — Two half hitches. Fig. 7. — Round turn and two half hitches. Fig. 8. — Fisherman's bend or anchor knot. {From U. S. Engineers* Manual.) CORDAGE 109 Fig. 9. — Clove hitch. Fig. ga. Fig. gb. Fig. gc. Fig. 10. — Timber hitch. Fig. 11. — Telegraph hitch. Fig. 1 2. —Hawser bend. (From U. 5. Engineers* Manual.) FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Fig. 14. — Bowline on a bight. Fig. 13.—* Bowline. Fig. 15. — Running bowline. Fig. 16a— Cat's paw,. a. Fig. 17.— Sheep- Fig. 18.— Rolling shank. hitch. (From U. S. Engineers' Manual.) CORDAGE 111 Fig. 19. — Blackwall hitch. Fig. 20, — Mooring knot. Fig. 21. Fig. 21a. Figs. 21 and 2ia.-^Single wall knot. Fig. 22. Fig. 22a. Figs. 22 and 22a. — Crown on wall. Fig. 23. — Thief. Fig. 24. — Granny. (From U. S. Engineers' Manual.) 112 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Fig. 25. — Short splice. Fig. 25a. — Short splice. Fig. 25b, — Short splice. Fig. 26a. — Long splice. Fig. 27. Fig. 27a. Fig. 27ft. Fig. 27c. (From U. S. Engineers' Manual) CORDAGE 113 Fig. 28. Fig. 29. Fig. 29a. Fig. 30. {From U. S. Engineers' Manual.) 114 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE QUESTIONS ON CORDAGE Q. What is a strand? A. A strand is a number of yarns twisted together. Q. What are the jaws of a rope? A. The jaws are the spaces between the strands of a rope. Q. For what is an overhand or thumb knot used? A. Used at the end of a rope to prevent unreeving or to prevent the end of the rope from slipping thru a block. Q. For what is the figure eight used? A. Used for the same purpose as the thumb knot. Q. For what is the square, reef or flat knot used? A. Commonly used for joining two ropes of the same size. (a) Why is it tied instead of the thief or granny? A. It can be upset by taking one end of the rope and its standing part and pulling them in opposite direction. The knot is then easily untied. (b) How strong is it? A. With dry rope it is as strong as the rope, with wet rope it slips before the rope breaks. (c) Why must you be careful and not tie a thief knot which looks very much like a flat knot? A. A thief knot will not hold. Q. What is a granny? A. A knot that looks very much like a square knot but will bind and cannot be upset after it has been tightened. Q. For what is a single sheet bend or a Becket bend used? A. Used for joining two ropes of different sizes and is more secure than the reef knot but more difficult to untie. Q. For what is the double sheet or Becket bend used? A. Used also for joining two ropes of unequal sizes, especially wet ones, and is more secure than the single sheet bend. Q. What is a half -hitch? A. Used to secure the loose end of lashings, etc. Q. For what are two half hitches useful? A. Especially useful for belaying or making fast the end of a rope around its own standing part. The end may be lashed down or seized to the standing part, this adds to its security and prevents slipping. Q. What is a round turn and two half hitches? CORDAGE 115 A. Similar to two half hitches except that you first take a turn around the spar or post. Q. For what is a fisherman's bend or anchor knot used? A. Used for fastening a rope to anchor or ring. Q. For what is a clove hitch used? A. Generally used in fastening a rope at right angles to a spar or at the commencement of a lashing. Q. For what is a timber hitch especially used? . A. Used for hauling and hoisting timbers and spars; it can be easily loosed when the strain has been taken off, will not slip under a pull. When used for hauling timbers a half -hitch is added near the end of the timber. Q. For what is a telegraph hitch used? A. Used for hoisting a spar or for pulling in a cable. Q. Explain the use of a hawser bend? A. A haw T ser bend is used for joining two large cables. Each end is seized to its own standing part. Q. What knot is used in forming a loop that will not slip? A. Bowline. (a) Why is the bowline very useful? A. It is easy to untie, can be used for hoisting barrels or boxes in place of sling or strap and has many other uses. Q. For what is a bowline on a bight used? A. It makes an excellent sling and is more comfortable than single bight. Also used for making a loop anywhere on a rope other than the end. Q. What uses has a running bowline? A. The same as a bowline and can also be used as a lariat or for making a slip-knot. Q. For what is the cat's paw used? A. Used to pass over the hook of a block. Q. What uses has a sheepshank? A. Used for shortening a rope or to pass a weak spot in the rope. Q. For what is a rolling hitch useful? A. A very useful knot and quickly made, used for hauling a large rope or cable. Q. What is a Blackwall hitch? A. A turn of a single rope around the hook of a block. Very useful in dismantling a howitzer. 116 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. When is a mooring knot used? A. Whenever it is necessary to be able to give line to avoid breaking from heavy strain. SPLICING Q. When is a short splice made? A. Whenever a rope has been broken and is not used in a block it may be permanently joined by a short splice. Q. When is a long splice used? A. Whenever the rope that is broken is to be used thru a block. Q. What is the eye splice useful for in our line of work? A. Very useful on end of line about six feet long to use as halter tie rope. Can also be used in many other ways. LASHINGS Q. In repairing a transom of a bridge that has been partly de- molished what lashing is used? A. Transom lashing. Q. How do you make a pair of shears? A. Lay two spars of equal length alongside of one another and use the shear lashing. Q. How do you make a gin or tripod? A. Three spars of equal lengths are laid on the ground two of the spars parallel to each other with an interval a little greater than their diameter. Rest their tips on a skid and lay the third spar between them with the butt in the opposite direc- tion, make a mark on each spar the distance from the butt to center of lashing and have the spars laying so that the three marks are on line, then make fast with gin lashing. Q. How should a rope be stored? A. Rope should be stored in a cool dry place and in such a manner as to allow a free circulation of air through the coils. Q. What is meant by whipping a rope? A. Wrapping the end of a rope to prevent its unraveling. Q. What is a strap or sling and for what is it used? A. It is formed by knotting or splicing together the ends of a short rope. It is used for hooking tackles into it. EMPLACEMENTS Q. Why is cover important for the protection of artillery? A. To prevent it from being put out of action. Q. Name the various types of natural cover. A. Hills, woods and ravines. Q. What kinds of entrenchments are used? A. Epaulments, dug-in emplacements and casemate emplace- ments. Q. W 7 hat is the difference between an epaulment and a dug-in emplacement. A. When placed in an epaulment the wheels of the gun carriage are on or near the level of the ground, the dirt simply mounded around the gun; in a dug-in emplacement the wheels of the gun are below the level of the ground. Q. In presence of the enemy, what should be done the instant the battery is in position? A. All men not occupied in the immediate service of the piece should throw up an epaulment. Q. If the position is to be occupied for some time, what is done to an epaulment? A. It is developed into a dug-in emplacement, and the dug-in emplacement may later be changed into a casemate emplace- ment in case of siege. Q. What are some of the advantages of epaulments? A. An epaulment is quickly and easily constructed and allows the guns to be speedily withdrawn. Q. What are some of the disadvantages of epaulments? A. They are easily seen from aeroplanes, because of the shadow they cast, and from balloons by their relief. They are easily destroyed and afford no protection against high-angled fire. Q. How may these disadvantages be made less important (minimized) ? 117 118 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. By constructing the epaulments on the edges of woods, roads, or railroad embankments, by making dummy (fake) guns of logs, etc., in emplacements near the battery to draw Fig. i. — Hasty entrenchment for field artillery. Protection against rifle fire and shrapnel. Fig. 2. — Deliberate entrenchment for field artillery. Portable type when depression is necessary for concealment. {From U. S. Artillery Drill Regulations.) the enemy's fire; by constructing dugouts in the immediate vicinity of the battery into which the men may go for pro- tection when the guns are under fire. Q. By whom should epaulments be most used? EMPLACEMENTS 119 A. By artillery of advancing armies or a body detailed to cover a retirement (retreat). Q. What are the chief advantages of dug-in emplacements? A. They are not easily seen, and afford more protection than does the epaulment. Q. What is the difference between a dug-in and a casemated emplacement ? A. The dug-in usually has no overhead cover, whereas a case- mated emplacement is covered. Q. Are casemated emplacements proof against the penetration of a heavy shell? A. No; practically no roof is proof against heavy shell. Q. How may protection be afforded against large shells? A. By deflecting or making them burst before they penetrate. The following is one example of many and illustrates the general principle. (See Diagram.) Probable direction of hostile shell fire. ft- The protection consists essentially of the following parts, from the top: i. A hard flat "bursting course" which retards a howitzer shell sufficiently to cause the fuze to act very quickly and in the case of a gun shell, with a small angle of descent, may deflect it altogether. 2. A " deflecting course" which turns the shell that has al- ready penetrated the bursting course into a more horizontal direction. 3. A "cushion" in which the shell should explode. It is soft, so that the shock may be disseminated. 4. A supporting framework with splinter-proof cover. 120 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE In ideal conditions each part should be supported separately with a small air space between, so that the shock on each part is borne separately. Practically, i, 2, and 3 should be sup- ported separately from 4. Considering the roof in detail — (a) is a concrete roof about 5 inches thick^ reinforced with expanded metal. This is the "bursting course." Im- mediately under it is a roof (b) of match boarding or corru- gated iron, which held the concrete in position until it had set. If the concrete roof were made thick, it might inclose the explosion and collapse the whole cover. (c) is a. layer of bricks laid on each other so as to form a de- flecting course. (d) is the " cushion" in which the shell is to burst, made of sandbags full of gravel or slag. (e) is a supporting roof of girders, iron rails, or baulks kept up by the stanchions (J) . This must be covered by boarding or corrugated iron to prevent the sandbags escaping. (g) is a small air space which allows a certain amount of sagging of the upper supporting roof before any pressure is borne on the lower supports. (h) is a splinter-proof cushion course laid on the lower sup- porting roof. (k) is the lower supporting roof, rather stronger than (e), as it may have to bear the weight of both roofs. It is supported by stanchions (/). It would be improved by a 6-inch layer of concrete immediately above the support, which would dis- tribute a force on any point over the whole lower roof. Q. How may the fire of a field gun be made more accurate? A. By constructing gun platforms on which to place the guns. Q. How are gun platforms constructed? A. The usual method is to cover the surface where the gun will stand with about a foot of broken brick, etc., so that the wheels will not sink. Large beams are placed on each side of the wheels and wedges driven between the wheels and these beams. The trail is held in position by a large beam, held by stakes, and a sandbag rests between the trail spade and the beam. In this way the shifting of the carriage is mini- mized, and the service of the gun is simplified. FIELD ARTILLERY INFORMATION SERVICE By ist Lt. Kenneth A. Rockwell Q. What are the purposes of the information service? A. (i) To secure information that will favor the movement and employment of guns; (2) to maintain communication between the various commanders concerned; (3) and to provide for the security of the field artillery when such security is not provided by other means, such as protection afforded by nature itself or by auxiliary arms of the service. Q. How is this information secured? A. Information is usually secured by reconnaissance officers and scouts. Q. How is this information communicated? A. Communication is usually maintained by agents, acting as couriers, or by signallers using visual signals, the telephone or buzzer. Pigeons are also used for carrying messages, and signalling is also done by means of flares, rockets, the helio- graph, etc. Q. What is the first rule to be remembered by scouts and agents? A. To obtain the information desired and to get it to the com- manding officer quickly, so that it may be used to advantage. Q. What are the qualifications for scouts and agents? A. 1. Specially keen witted, agile, intelligent and trustworthy soldiers. 2. Good eyesight and hearing. 3. Good physique, healthy and sound. 4. Presence of mind, courage and good judgment. 5. Willing and able to turn his hand to any kind of a task. 6. Good rider and able to swim. 7. Able to read and write. Q. In what must scouts and agents be drilled? A. 1. Signaling, 2. Map reading. 3. Sketching. 121 122 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 4. Reporting information (writing messages and reports). 5. Carrying information (acting as agents, couriers, mes- sengers, etc.). 6. Patrolling. 7. Tracking and following an enemy. 8. Riding across difficult country. 9. Finding one's way in a strange country. 10. Concealment; quickness of eye and ear. n. Care of self. 12. Care of horse. Scouts should also be trained in making reports on: artillery positions bridges, camp sites, country, the enemy, fords, rail- roads, rivers and streams, roads, towns, villages and water. Q. What are the principal duties of agents? A. Agents are employed to act as carriers of written or oral com- munication between the commander and the elements con- cerned. They keep the commander informed as to the location of the several elements and the best route for ap- proaching them, guide the elements into new positions when necessary and transmit information between the commander and troops of other arms. Each battalion and higher head- quarters is provided with sufficient agents for linking the commander with the next higher unit of his command. Q. In what should agents be trained particularly? A. Agents are especially trained and exercised in carrying verbal messages; in map reading, so that they may be able to identify positions of troops, features of the terrain, etc.; in finding their way by day and by night in order to designate posi- tions; in signalling, in the use of the service buzzer. Q. In passing thru strange country, by what method is a scout or agent able to retrace his steps or to return to a certain designated point." A. By the observation of landmarks, peculiarities of the terrain, etc., keeping always on the alert, observing, forming mental pictures of landmarks as they appear when approached, by viewing it after it has been passed, and, if necessary, chang- ing the course sufficiently to get a view of them from the side. The topography, or rise and fall of the terrain, is often of great service in this work. FIELD ARTILLERY INFORMATION SERVICE 123 Q. What are some of the details in connection with the perform- ance of courier duty by agents? A. A courier makes every effort to keep himself informed as to the location of the subdivision to which he belongs, and as -to the route by which it may most readily and easily be reached, When sent on a mission, he should note carefully the country traversed, the facilities or difficulties it offers for the passage of artillery, and endeavors to imprint on his mind the features of the terrain, so that he could, if need be, guide troops thru it if instructed to do so. He moves promptly when on an errand and allows nothing to delay or interrupt him. All military persons are required to expedite the movements of such messengers and to promptly point out the best routes for reaching the subdivision or individual sought. On reaching his destination, if the individual sought is not im- mediately seen or recognized, the courier calls out the name or military designation of the person sought; e.g., " Commanding Officer, Battery A, First Field Artillery. " It is not necessary for a mounted man carrying a message to dismount when addressing or on being addressed by a dismounted officer. Having delivered the message he waits in the presence of the individual who received it until notified whether or not an answer is to be taken. In case of delay he asks for instructions. Important messages should always be in writing and should be acknowledged by the receiver's initials on the envelope, with the date and hour of receipt. Verbal messages should always be repeated by the courier in the presence of the sender before starting on the errand. The message should be couched in concise terms, and the sender should make sure that the courier grasps its spirit and meaning. If a courier is aware of the nature of a message carried and has noted any circumstances bearing upon its subject matter since leaving the sender, he should report the circumstances after delivering the message. If a courier after diligent search is unable to locate the in- dividual to whom he is sent, he should endeavor to find some other person who can take full advantage of the information 124 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE conveyed. Whether or not this can always be done, he always reports back to the sender, with full facts in the case. A courier should note matters of military interest, especially those affecting the subdivision to which he is attached and should make report of any essential matters on his return to the officer to whom he is assigned. RECONNAISSANCE Soil and Cultivation. ii H iiii . iii imii ii u 'iiiiii i Rice swamps ditch and dikes. £=nr*-yj»'=E=: *• = J.' •>=- *-=?LL* -— -■* s^i£i Sand and gravel. Enclosures. Wire Fence Barbed — o o Smooth Rail fence. Public Road Wagon trail Fr.esh marsh Cypress pond. swamp. Communications. ^2i Wooden fence. Stone fence. Hedge. Foot or bridle trail. 20' v T T T T Telegraph, R.R. single track. i niTrn rrrmTrnr R.R. double track. _^_ -^r- Fill -7- Tunnel. 20' Cut Bridges. {From U. S. Engineers* Field Manual.) 125 126 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Military Signs, I nf antry In column d-d-D-OD-o Redoubt In line C 3C 3 \^ A Cavalry In column t B B & S Br In line A AAA. A A Cam P AAAAAA ie Artillery .]. iji »[, .|, J, ,1, Sentrv (|) Vedette £ Headquarters *W* Battle Palisades Wire entanglement Trenches ^TTTnTmrm^^^^^ Gun battery Mortar batte/y Gun V y X /a \ m / j < j / M / / \ -I 4 1 v / y fp / 1 !W {From U. S. Engineers' Field Manual.) GUARD DUTY By Capt. Harold Hellyer and ist Lt. Stuart O. Pusey CATECHISM OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY Q. Into what four classes are guards divided? A. Exterior, interior, military police and provost guards. Q. What is the purpose of exterior guards? A. To prevent surprise, delay attack, and provide for the security of the main body in time of war. Q. What is the purpose of interior guards? A. To preserve order, protect property, and enforce police regulations in camp or garrison. Q. What is the purpose of military police? A. To guard prisoners, arrest stragglers, and deserters. To maintain order in rear of armies, along lines of communica- tion and near large camps. Q. What is the purpose of provost guards? A. To take the place of military police, to aid the civil authori- ties, near large camps to preserve order beyond the interior guard. Q. How is an interior guard classified? A. (a) The main guard, (b) Special guards, stable, park, prisoner, train, etc. Q. How does a relief call off when formed? A. Commencing on the right the men call off alternately rear and front rank, one, two, etc. Q. How is a relief posted? A. The new sentinel approaches the old, halting one pace from him. The corporals face each other, the old corporal on the right of the new sentinel, the new corporal on the left; when the instructions relative to the post are transmitted the new corporal commands "post." Both sentinels face the new corporal and step back so as to allow the relief to pass. 128 GUARD DUTY 129 The old sentinel takes his place in the rear as the relief passes. The new sentinel walks his post after the relief has passed six paces beyond him. ORDERLIES AND COLOR SENTINELS Q. What are the points considered in selecting an orderly? A. (a) Correctness in performance of duty. (b) Military bearing. (c) Neatness of personal appearance and clothing. (d) Condition of arms and accoutrements. Q. When directed to fall out and report as orderly, what will a sentinel do? A. He will give his name, battery and regiment to the sergeant of the guard and proceed to the officer to whom he is assigned. Q. How does an orderly report? A. "Sir, Private Smith, Battery F, reports as orderly. " Q. What should an orderly be careful of, when he is ordered to carry a message? A. That the message is delivered exactly as it was given to him. Q. When does his tour of duty end? A. When he is relieved by the next orderly. Q. How does a color sentinel call the corporal of the guard? A. Corporal of the guard, color line. Q. Will officers and enlisted men salute while passing the uncased colors? A. Yes. Q. Will a sentinel placed over the colors permit them to be moved? A. No. Except in the presence of an armed escort. Q. Who is allowed to touch the colors? A. The color bearer only, unless otherwise ordered by the commanding officer. Q. If any person passes the colors or crosses the color line without saluting the colors, what will the sentinel do? A. The sentinel will caution him to do so, and if the caution is not heeded, he will call the corporal of the guard and report the fact. 130 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE ORDERS Q. What kinds of orders has a sentinel on post? A. General and special. Q. If a sentinel is asked "what are your orders?" how should he answer? A. My orders are of two kinds, general and special. My general orders are: (He then gives his general orders.) My special orders are: (He then gives his special orders.) Q. What are your general orders? A. My general orders are: i. To take charge of this post and all government property in view. 2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping con- stantly on the alert and observing everything that takes place within sight or hearing. 3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce. 4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guard house than my own. 5. To quit my post only when properly relieved. 6. To receive, obey and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, officers and non-commissioned officers of the guard only. 7. To talk to no one except in the line of duty. 8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm. 9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post. 10. In any case not covered by instruction to call the corporal of the guard, n. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased. 12. To be especially watchful at night and during the hours of challenging to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to allow no one to pass without proper authority. GENERAL ORDER NO. 1 Q. Are all persons of whatever rank, required to observe respect toward sentinels and members of the guard? GUARD DUTY 131 A. Yes. When the sentinels are in the performance of their duties. Q. What should a sentry do in case anything suspicious or unusual happens? A. Call the corporal of the guard. Q. What is a sentinel to do to all suspicious persons prowling around his post. A. Arrest them and call the corporal of the guard. Q. Are the numbers and extent of your post part of your general or special orders. A. Part of my special orders. GENERAL ORDER NO. 2 Q. What is the meaning of the word "alert?" A. Watchful, wide awake. GENERAL ORDER NO. 3 Q. What is the meaning of the word "violation." A. Breaking or disobedience. Q. When does a sentinel report violations of orders? A. When inspected or relieved. Unless the violations are seri- ous, in which case he should call the corporal of the guard at once. GENERAL ORDER JNTO. 4 Q. How does a sentinel call the corporal of the guard? A. Corporal of the guard No. . Never say, "Never mind the corporal." GENERAL ORDER NO. 5 Q. How does he call for relief? A. Corporal of the guard No. , relief. GENERAL ORDER NO. 6 Q. Who has the authority to investigate apparent violations of regulations by members of the guard? A. Any officer. 132 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE GENERAL ORDER NO. 7 Q. How does a sentinel hold his pistol while holding conversation at night. A. Raise pistol. GENERAL ORDER NO. 8 Q. How does a sentinel give the alarm in case of fire? A. "Fire. No. ." Q. Should the sentinel put out the fire himself? A. Yes, if it is not too large. Q. In case of disorder what does the sentinel do? A. Calls "the guard No. ." Q. Will he discharge his piece in case of fire or disorder? A. Yes, if the danger is great. GENERAL ORDER NO. 11 Q. Does a sentry salute all officers who pass? A. Yes, if not engaged in the performance of duties which would prevent it. Q. How does a sentry salute? A. Present arms with rifle. Hand salute if armed with pistol. Q. At what distance does a sentinel salute? A. When an officer is at six paces or at the nearest point to him. Q. Does a sentinel armed with a pistol salute after challenging? A. No. Q. Will a sentinel in conversation with an officer interrupt the conversation to salute other officers? A. No. Unless the officer to whom he is talking salutes. Q. What does a sentry on post do at retreat? A. He faces toward the flag during the playing of "To the Colors" or "The Star Spangled Banner." Q. What are colors? A. National and regimental flags carried by foot troops: national, red, white, and blue; regimental, blue for infantry and scarlet for coast artillery. Q. What are standards? A. National and regimental flags carried by mounted troops: GUARD DUTY 133 national, red, white and blue; regimental, yellow for cavalry and scarlet for field artillery. Q. What is the meaning of cased? A. Colors or standards rolled around their staffs and covered by a waterproof case, are said to be " cased.' 5 GENERAL ORDER NO. 12 Q. What does a sentinel do if a person or party comes on his post during challenging hours? A. He advances rapidly toward the person or party to be chal- lenged and when within thirty paces calls, "Halt! Who is there?" and places himself in the best position to receive or arrest the person or party. Q. What does the sentinel do if the person is mounted? A. He should do the same as in challenging a dismounted person except that he challenges, "Halt! Dismount, who is there?" Q. What does the sentry do in case the challenged party consists of more than one person? A. He calls "Halt! who is there?" On receiving his answer to the challenge he calls, "Advance one to be recognized.' ' If he recognizes one of the party he may pass all of the party together. Q. What does a sentry do in case several parties approach his post from several directions at the same time? A. He halts all of them and advances the senior. Q. If a sentry is in conversation with someone and other persons approach, what does he do? A. Halts them in turn and continues his conversation, unless they are senior to the person to whom he is talking, in which case he advances them at once. Q. In what order do officers, officials of the guard and others come in rank? A. Commanding officer, officer of the day, officer of the guard, officers, patrols, reliefs, non-commissioned officers of the guard and friends. SPECIAL ORDERS Q. If a sentinel is asked to give his special orders, what does he answer? 134 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. My special orders are. The number of my post is . It extends from to . Also any further orders or information given him concerning his post. SPECIAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD Q. What orders are the sentinels at the post of the guard (guard house) required to memorize? A. i. Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all persons designated by the commanding officer, for all colors and standards not cased, and in time of war for all armed parties approaching my post, except troops at drill and reliefs and detachments of the guard. 2. At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance no one but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer to the challenge. Q. How does the sentry at the guard house turn out the guard? A. By calling "Turn out the guard, armed party," or "officer of the day/' etc. Q. If the person named does not desire the guard formed he will salute. What does the sentinel do? A. He calls, " Never mind the guard." Q. What does the sentry at the guard house do on the approach of the new guard at guard mounting? A. He calls, "Turn out the guard, armed party." Q. After calling "Turn out the guard" on the approach of an armed party, does the sentinel ever call, "Never mind the guard." A. No. COUNTERSIGNS AND PAROLES Par. 209. Interior guard manual. Forty-fourth article of war. Any person belonging to the armies of the United States who makes known the watchword to any person not entitled to receive it, according to the rules and discipline of war, or pre- sumes to give a parole or watchword different from that which he received, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a courtmartial may direct. Q, What is a countersign? GUARD DUTY 135 A. A word used as an aid to sentinels in identifying persons who are authorized to pass at night. It is usually the name of a battle, Q. What is a parole? A. A word used as a check on the countersign and given only to those who are entitled to inspect the guard. It is usually the name of some general. GENERAL RULES CONCERNING GUARD DUTY Par, 231. Thirty-sixth article of war. No soldier shall hire another to do his duty for him. Par. 232. Thirty-eighth article of war. Any soldier who is found drunk on his guard, party, or other duty, shall suffer such punishment as a courtmartial may direct. Par. 236. Without permission from the commander of the guard, members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the immediate vicinity of the guard house. Permission to leave will not be granted except in cases of necessity. PRISONERS Q, What are the duties of No. 1 concerning prisoners? A. Par. 299. The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of the prisoners except when they have been turned over to the prisoner guard or overseers. (Par. 247 and 300 to 304.) A. HE WILL ALLOW NONE TO ESCAPE. B. HE WILL ALLOW NONE .TO CROSS HIS POST LEAVING THE GUARD HOUSE EXCEPT WHEN PASSED BY AN OFFICER OR NON-COMMIS- SIONED OFFICER OF THE GUARD. C. HE WILL ALLOW NO ONE TO COMMUNICATE WITH PRISONERS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM PROPER AUTHORITY. D. HE WILL PROMPTLY REPORT TO THE COR- PORAL OF THE GUARD ANY T SUSPICIOUS NOISE MADE BY THE PRISONERS. E. HE WILL BE PREPARED TO TELL WHENEVER ASKED HOW MANY PRISONERS ARE IN THE GUARD HOUSE AND HOW MANY ARE OUT AT WORK AND ELSEWHERE. 136 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. What will No. i do when prisoners are returned? A. He will call, " Corporal of the guard — prisoners. " Q. Will he allow prisoners to pass at once? A. No. Only after the corporal of the guard has answered the call and ordered him to do so. Q. What should a sentry do if a prisoner attempts to escape? A. He should call, "Halt!" Call, "Halt!" again and if the prisoner does not halt and the sentry sees no other way of stopping him he shall fire upon him. Also call the corporal of the guard. Q. What are the duties of a sentinel on stables? A. (a) Verifies the number of horses on the line. (&) Permits no horse or equipment to be taken from the picket line, except in the presence of an officer or non- commissioned officer. (c) Should a horse get loose tie him up. If unable to catch him or if a horse is sick, caught or entangled and he is unable to get him loose call the noncommissioned officer of the stable guard. (d) See that the gates are kept closed and the water turned off after dark. (e) Allow no smoking near stables. Q. What does a sentinel do in case of fire at the stables? A. Fires his piece repeatedly and calls, "Fire Stables, Battery ."or "Fire No. ." Q. What is a garrison flag, post flag, storm flag? A. A garrison flag is 38' fly tjy 20' hoist, hoisted at posts author- ized by the W.D. and on holidays, and important occasion. A post flag is 19/ fly by io' hoist, hoisted at garrison posts in pleasant weather. A storm flag is 0/ 6" fly by 5' hoist, hoisted at all occupied posts in stormy weather and used in National Cemeteries. Q. Who raises and lowers the flag? A. A noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard. COURTSMARTIAL Q. If a man enlists making statements that are untrue what punishment may he get? GUARD DUTY 137 A. Under A.W. 54, dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances ; and one year's confinement, Q. What crimes are capital? In peace? In war? A. In peace: (1) Assaulting or disobeying a superior officer (A. W. 64). (2) Mutiny or sedition (A. W. 66). (3) Failure to suppress mutiny or sedition (A. ' W. 67). In war: the above 3 and (4) Desertion (A. W. 58). (5) Advising or aiding another to desert (A. W. 59) . (6) Misbehavior before the enemy (A. W. 75). (7) Subordinates compelling commander to sur- render (A. W. 76). (8) Improper use of countersign (A. W. 77). (9) Forcing a safeguard (A. W. 78). (10) Relieving, corresponding with or aiding the enemy (A. W. 81). (n) Spies (A. W. 82). (12) Misbehavior of sentinels (A. W. 86). Q, What are the punitive articles of war by subject? PUNITIVE ARTICLES (a) Enlistment: muster; returns — Art. 54. Fraudulent enlistment. Art. 55. Officer making unlawful enlistment. Art. 56. Muster rolls — false muster. Art. 57. False returns — omission to render returns. (b) Desertion; absence without leave — Art. 58. Desertion. Art. 59. Advising or aiding another to desert. Art. 60. Entertaining a deserter. Art. 61. Absence without leave. (c) Disrespect; insubordination; mutiny — Art. 62. Disrespect toward the President, Vice President, Congress, Secretary of War, governors, legislatures. Art. 63. Disrespect toward superior officers. Art. 64. Assaulting or willfully disobeying superior officer. 138 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Art. 65. Insubordinate conduct toward noncommissioned officer. Art. 66. Mutiny or sedition. Art. 67. Failure to suppress mutiny or sedition. Art, 68. Quarrels; frays; disorders. (d) Arrest; confinement — Art. 69. Arrest or confinement of accused persons. Art. 70. Investigation of and action upon charges. Art. 71. Refusal to receive and keep prisoners. Art. 72. Report of prisoners received. Art. 73. Releasing prisoner without proper authority. Art. 74. Delivery of offenders to civil authorities. (e) War offenses — Art. 75. Misbehavior before the enemy. Art. 76. Subordinates compelling commander to surrender. Art. 77, Improper use of countersign. Art. 78. Forcing a safeguard. Art. 79. Captured property to be secured for public service. Art. 80. Dealing in captured or abandoned property. Art. 81. Relieving, corresponding with, or aiding the enemy. Art. 82. Spies. (/) Miscellaneous crimes and offenses — Art .83. Military property — willful or negligent loss, damage, or wrongful disposition of. Art. 84. Waste or unlawful disposition of military property issued to soldiers. Art. 85. Drunk on duty. Art. 86. Misbehavior of sentinel. Art. 87. Personal interest in sale of provisions. Art. 88. Intimidation of persons bringing provisions. Art. 89. Good order to be maintained and wrongs redressed. Art. 90. Provoking speeches or gestures. Art. 91. Dueling. Art. 92. Murder — rape. Art. 93. Various crimes. Art. 94. Frauds against the Government, Art. 95. Conduct unbecoming an officer and gentleman. Art. 96 General article. GUNNERY By ist Lt. S. P. Goodenough Q. How may I become a first-class gunner? A. By passing the gunner's examination with an average mark of 85. Q. What is the advantage of becoming a first-class gunner? A. I may wear on my sleeve a chevron (projectile point up with a bar under it) and I will receive an increase in pay. In peace times, if there be at least twenty first-class gunners in my battery, my battery will receive its full allowance of target ammunition. Q. What are the subjects in which I have to qualify to pass the gunner's examination? A. A practical test for accuracy and speed in direct laying. A practical test in accuracy and speed in indirect laying. The ability to drill a gun squad in cannoneer's standing gun drill. A practical test in fuze setting. A knowledge of the nomenclature of the piece and the care of materiel. Knowledge in the nomenclature of harness and its care. Q. How may I prepare myself for these tests? A. By understanding the operation of the sights and becoming dexterous in handling them accurately through actual prac- tice. By close attention to cannoneer's standing gun drill, understanding and being able to explain what each cannon- eer has to do in connection therewith ; and by acquiring knowl- edge of the nomenclature of the piece, materiel and harness, its care and cleaning. Q. Is the examination difficult? A. No. In a well-trained battery there is no reason why every member should not qualify as a first-class gunner. In some batteries as high as 90 per cent, of the membership have so qualified. 139 140 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. What is the axis of the bore? A. A straight line drawn through the center of the bore of a gun in the direction the gun is pointing. Q. What is the line of sight? A. A straight line drawn from the gun to the object used as an aiming point. Q. What is deflection? A. The horizontal angle between the line of sight and the axis of the bore measured in mils. Q. If the aiming point and the target are the same what would be the deflection? A. Zero. Q. If the aiming point is directly in rear of the gun, what would be the deflection? A. 3200. Q. If the aiming point is at a right angle to the right what is the deflection? A. 1600. Q. If the aiming point is at a right angle to the left what is the deflection? A. '4800. Q. What is direct laying? A. When your line of sight is directed at the target. Q. What is indirect laying? A. When your line of sight is directed at some object known as the aiming point, other than the target to be fired upon; pref- erably some well-defined stationary object in the rear such as church steeple. Q. Do you ever set off any deflection in direct laying? A. Yes. Q. When may the peep sight be used? A. Only when laying directly upon the target for "fire at will" in close defense of the guns. Q. How is the deflection determined in indirect or in direct laying? A. By correctly measuring or estimating the angle between a line drawn from the target to the gun and a second line drawn from the gun to the aiming point. This is done by the bat- tery officers or the instrument sergeant. GUNNERY 141 Q. When once the deflection has been announced, how may it be changed? A. Either by announcing a new deflection or by the command "right (left)" so much. The command "right (left)" indi- cates the direction in which the captain wishes to throw the projectile. Q. Assuming the deflection to be 1850, the captain commands left 50, what does the gunner do? A. He adds 50, making the deflection 1900. Left add — right subtract. In other words to throw the projectile to the left increase the deflection — to throw the projectile to the right diminish the deflection. Q. What is parallel fire? A. When the lines of fire of all the guns in the battery are parallel. Q. What is cross fire? A. When the lines of fire of the guns of a battery are crossed. Q. What is an open sheaf? A. When the lines of fire from the several guns of a battery are fan shaped. Q. How is the sheaf opened? A. One of the guns is always designated as the directing piece. The guns on the right of the directing piece must have their muzzles moved to the right, that is away from the directing piece. The guns on the left to the left, that is away from the directing piece. Q. How do you close the sheaf? A. The guns on the right of the directing piece must have their muzzles moved to the left toward the directing piece. Those on the left to the right. Q. In closing or opening the sheaf does the directing piece change its deflection? A. No. Q. Do the other guns each make the same amount of change in deflection? A. No. You must multiply the announced deflection difference for each gun by the number of intervals the gun is distant from the directing piece. Q. How are the guns in the battery numbered? 142 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. Always beginning from the right, i ; 2, 3, 4. Q. If the command should be given "On 1st piece open 5," what change in deflection should be made on each piece? A. First piece — none. Second piece add 5; third piece add 10; fourth piece add 15. Q. If the command should be "On 1st piece close 5?" A. First piece — none. Second piece subtract 5; third piece subtract 10; fourth piece subtract 15. Q. If the command should be "On 4 th piece close 5?" A. Fourth piece — none. Third piece add 5 ; second piece add 10; first piece add 15. Q. If the command should be "On 2nd piece close 5?" A. First piece add 5; second piece — none; third piece subtract 5; fourth piece subtract 10. Q. What is the angle of site for the gun? A. It is the angle between the horizontal plane and the line drawn from the gun to the target. Q. What does the captain mean when he says: "Site 300? " A. He means the gun and the target are on the same level. Q. If the target is 5 mils below the gun what site would the captain announce? A. 295. Q. If 5 mils above? A. 305- Q. If the target is 50 yards higher than the gun and the range 5000 yards, what is the proper angle of site? A. 310. (Divide 50 by the number of thousands of yards in the range, that is 5.) Q. How is the angle of site set off on the panoramic sight? A. By turning the lower index thumb screw on the left side of the panoramic sight, so that it correctly registers the announced angle of site. Q. What is the hand fuze setter? A. It is an instrument used to set mechanically the time fuze on shrapnel, so that the required height of burst may be accu- rately obtained. Q. How many scales are there on a hand fuze setter? A. Two — the range scales and the corrector scale. Q. How is the range scale used? GUNNERY 143 A. The announced range is set of! upon such scale by turning the range thumb screw on the hand fuze setter. Q. What is the corrector used for? A. For more accurate adjustment. After the range has been set off on the range scale, slight changes can be made by using the corrector scale. Q. After the range has been set off and the corrector is announced how is the hand fuze setter used? A. It is placed upon the point of the shrapnel, so that the lug upon the hand fuze setter becomes engaged with the lug upon the time fuze of the shrapnel. It is then turned clockwise until it can be turned no longer. Q. What does this operation do? A. It adjusts the time fuze on the shrapnel, so that the shrapnel will explode at a point in the air at which it is desired to explode in accordance with the range and corrector setting set off on the hand fuze setter. Q. If the shrapnel should explode too high in the air, how is this corrected? A. The captain commands Down (so much) for instance 10, and 10 is then subtracted from the corrector setting on the hand fuze setter by turning the corrector thumb screw. Q. If the shrapnel should explode on the ground, how are sub- sequent rounds adjusted to explode at the proper point? A. By the command Up (so much) and adding the amount announced on the corrector scale. Q. How many zones of fire are used in connection with the 4.7 howitzer. A. Three. Q. How are the different zones of fire regulated? A. By reducing the powder charge. Q. What is the maximum range in the first zone? A. 1980 yards. Q. In the second zone? A. 3525 yards. Q. In the third zone? A. 6640 yards. Q. What is the object of having three zones of fire? A. The 4.7 howitzer has a high angle of fire and is used largely 144 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE for dropping shells into trenches or exploding shrapnel directly over trenches. By reducing the powder charge and using a high angle of fire — sometimes called a high trajectory — a shell may be dropped upon the enemy from above at a shorter range. Q. Just what is meant by trajectory? A. The path the projectile follows in the air from the gun to the target. Q. How many range scales are on the sight shank? A. Three; one for each zone. Q. How is the range set off on the sights? A. By first turning the thumb screw on the front of the sight bar so that the slotted opening will disclose the announced zone range scale. Then by raising or lowering the sight shank, so that the announced range will be disclosed at the index point. If there is to be a large change in range, the sight shank is moved up or down with the right hand after first slightly pulling out and so disengaging the scroll-gear attached to the left of the sight bar. If the range is to be changed slightly the sight shank is moved up or down by simply turning the scroll-gear with the left hand. Q. After the range has been announced, how may it be changed? A. By announcing a new range. Q. In what order is firing data announced? A. Always in the following order: Aiming Point. Deflection. Deflection difference. Angle of site. Corrector. Method of fire. Zone. Range. As for instance: deflection 2800, on first piece close by 5, sight 300, corrector 60, right right (the word range is not used), 4000 fire. If no zone is announced the firing will be in third zone. Q. Are all of these commands habitually given? A. No. Sometimes no deflection difference is announced. In GUNNERY 145 such case none is set off on the sight. -When shell is to be used the command "with shell" is given just before the method of fire is announced, and no corrector is given, because there is no time fuze on shell. Q. After the first round has been fired, how does the captain make any desired corrections? A. To correct the deflection he commands (Right) (Left) (so much). To correct the deflection difference (Open) (Close) on an indicated piece (so much). The angle of site is seldom if ever changed. If so a new angle of site is announced. The corrector (Down) (Up) (so much). And the range is announced each time. Q. In the conduct of fire, does it often occur that all of these changes are made for any one round? A. No. Q. May corrections be made for any one piece, and if so how? A. Yes. By commands such as " Third Piece 'Left 10' or 'Down io.'" In such case the third piece only makes the indicated change. Q. What should the gunner always do before signalling that his piece is correctly laid and ready to be fired? A. He should see that both bubbles are level and that the vertical hair is correctly laid upon the aiming point, that the an- nounced deflection, deflection difference, site and range are properly set. Q. Of what assistance can No. 2, whose post is at the trail hand spike, be to the gunner in correctly and rapidly laying for deflection? A. Of great assistance. They must work together as a team; moving the trail spade one full length to the right adds 150 mils to the deflection. Moving it to the left subtracts 150 mils from the deflection. No. 2 should pay particular atten- tion to all commands changing the deflection and without waiting for the gunner should carefully estimate how much the trail should be shifted on an announced change in deflec- tion and so shift it. For instance at the command " Right 50" he should shift the trail one-third of the length of the spade to the left. If it is impossible to see any common aiming point from the 10 146 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE position of the guns, how are they laid, so that they will be directed at the target and parallel fire established? A. By directing one of the guns at the target by compass or in some other manner, and then establishing parallel fire by reciprocal laying. Q. How is this done? A. Each gunner sets off zero range and levels all bubbles. Then without elevating or depressing the piece raises the sight shank to 6000 yards. This enables him to look thru his panoramic sight and clear the tops of the wheels. The gunner of the piece that has been directed toward the target, then turns his panoramic sight in turn on the panoramic sights of each of the other guns in the battery and reads off the sev- • eral deflections measured on his panoramic sight. The gun- ners to the right of the directing piece add 3200 to the deflection announced by the gunner of the directing piece and lay their gun with such deflection on the panoramic sight of the directing piece. The gunners to the left of the directing piece subtract 3200 from the announced deflec- tion and do likewise. When this has been done, each gunner then lowers his sight shank without traversing his piece, and sets his deflection at 3200. One of the cannoneers in his squad then goes to the rear of the piece with a stake or rod and places it in the ground as directed by the gunner, so that it will be directly in line with the vertical hair of the panoramic sight, set asjbudicated above at 3200. Care must be taken that the individual aiming points so established behind each gun are approximately an equal distance in the rear of their several pieces. They should be located as far in the rear as possible. These stakes are then used as individual aiming points by their respective pieces* Q. Into how many platoons is a firing battery divided? A. Two. Right platoon and left platoon. The first and second guns are in the right platoon — third and fourth in the left platoon. Q. What are the different methods of firing? A. Platoon salve, battery salvo, volley fire, continuous fire, fire at will. Q. What is a platoon salvo? GUNNERY 147 A. When one gun of the platoon fires first followed three seconds later by the second gun. A different time interval than three seconds may be announced. Q. How may a platoon salvo be fired? A. Either from the right (in which case the right gun of the platoon fires followed by the left gun) or vice versa. Q. What would be the command for the right platoon to fire a salvo from the right? A. Right-right. Q. What would be the command for the right platoon to fire a salvo from the left? A. Right-left. Q. What would be the command for the left platoon to fire a salvo from the right? A. Left-right. Q. From the left? A. Left-left. Q. How is a battery salvo fired? A. Either from the right or the left, each gun firing with three seconds interval, unless the captain announce a different interval. Q. What would be the command? A. " Battery right (left)." Q. While one platoon is firing salvos, what does the other platoon do? A. The gunners set off on their sights, all the firing, data an- nounced. The No. 3s set off all changes on the hand fuze setters. The time fuzes, however, are not set nor the guns loaded or fired. Q. What is volley fire? A. Fire in which each gun fires a stated number of rounds, with- out reference to the other guns, as quickly as is compatible with accurate laying. Q. What is continuous fire? A. Fire in which each gun starting from the right or left fires in turn at a stated interval and continues to so fire until the command " Cease Firing" is given. Q. How is the command " Cease Firing" given? 148 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. Either by the command " Cease Firing" or by one long blast on the whistle. Q. What is " Fire at Will?" A. Direct fire for the purpose of defending the battery against a threatened attack. The fuze is set at zero. The range is set at iooo yards and the guns are fired as rapidly as possible. Q. Why is the fuze set at zero? A. This causes the shrapnel to explode about 20 yards from the muzzle of the gun creating a cannister effect — such fire is effective at about 250 yards. Q. What is fire for adjustment? A. Fire to determine the right deflection, distribution of sheaf, height of burst and range Q. How many bags of powder are there in a cartridge case? A. Three. Q. In firing second zone how many are removed? A. One. Q. In the first zone? A. Two. Q. Sow are they removed? A. By tearing off the tin cover and lifting them out. Q. Should this tin cover be removed on firing third zone? A. Yes, although no powder bags are taken out. If the tin cover is not removed it may fly back when the gun is fired and injure someone. Q. What should be done with the bags of powder that are so removed? A. They should be thrown out of the way, collected after the firing, taken to the rear, opened and the powder scattered on the ground. Q. When shrapnel or shell is received from the arsenal, how is • it packed? A. Together with a loaded cartridge case is packed in a wooden container. Q. May this be thrown away? A. No. Moreover, the blocking which holds the shrapnel or shell with its cartridge case within the container should be put back into the container and the cover replaced. GUNNERY 149 Q. What must be done to a shrapnel before the fuze can be set? A. You would first have to remove the tin cap, covering the time fuze and then pull out the wire loop which is inserted in the hole at the top of the fuze. Q. When is this wire so inserted? A. It can only be inserted when the shrapnel fuse is set at safety. The fuze cannot be turned until it is removed. Q. What precautions must always be taken at the close of firing? A. All shrapnel that have been removed from the caisson should be examined before putting them back in the chest to see that their fuzes are set at safety and wires inserted. Q. How is a shrapnel fuze set at safety? A. Set the range index as S and the corrector at 60 on hand fuze setter — and set time fuze accordingly. Q. In using shrapnel for percussion fire is it necessary to remove the wire loop? A. No. A shrapnel explodes on impact providing it is revolving at a sufficiently high rate of speed. This is determined by an auxiliary primer. The hammer discharging it cannot oper- ate unless released by the centrifugal force caused by rapid revolution. Q. What is done with the empty cartridge cases? A. They are carefully collected after firing, put back into the cartridge case carrier in the caisson. On return to the park the primers are removed and the cases washed in solu- tion of sal soda and so made ready for return to the arsenal. Q. What is a masked position? A. A position in which the guns are concealed. Q. What is sight defilade? A. A position behind a mask, such that the target can be seen thru the sights on the guns. Q. What is dismounted defilade? A. A position behind a mask such that a dismounted man can see the target over the mask. Q. What is mounted defilade? A. Such a position that a mounted man can see the target over the mask. Q. What is a flash defilade? A. A position sufficiently behind a mask so that the enemy can- 150 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE not see the flash of the guns. Flash defilade should be such that the flash of the guns will be concealed from the highest point from which the enemy might make observation. Q.^What kind of a position is the best? A. A position of concealment within medium range of the targets. Q. In what manner is fire from such a position concealed? A. By the battery commander from some point where he can observe the effect of the fire. Q. Should every man in the battery be trained as a cannoneer? A. Yes. Casualties in battle may be so great that drivers would have to be dismounted and used. The guns must be served until the last. Q. How should the sights be set at the command "Prepare for Action?" A. Range 4000, third zone, site 300 and deflection zero! Q. How is the fuze setter set at the same command? A. Range 4000, third zone, corrector 60. HARNESSING By ist Lt. Clement Tingle y Q. What is the difference between a pair and a team? A. The horses assigned to a single driver are called a pair ; the horse on the left side is called the near horse ; the other the off horse. The driver rides the near horse. Coat Strap, Fbnvnel^ Quarter Strap, Pomrnt '" FootStapte Low FootStaple Sent Circular. 1.85 in Brass rZing Hatter Square Saddle /Vait^ QuarterStrap Side Stirrup Stra/o Stirrup StrapBuckle Stirrup Hood Xoat StrapCantle u Sadd i e Bag Stud 'FootStapte Lq-w "1.25 in. Brass Ring Toot Staple Hcgh ^Qu-arter StrapCantle Halter Souare Quarter Strap Safe ■Ring Chape Quarter Strap Fling Cinck-a Strap \n.cha Safe C inch, a R,in,g Cincfta Cover Horse Hacr Cin-cka P Stirrup McClellan Pattern. (From School of the Trooper.) The pairs assigned to the traction of a single carriage are termed collectively a team. A team usually consists of not less than three pairs. The leading pair is called the lead 151 152 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE pair; the one attached to the carriage the wheel pair; the pair between these two the swing pail. When there are two pairs between the lead and wheel pairs, the pair next behind the lead pair is called the lead swing; the other the wheel swing pair. When there are five pairs the one between the lead swing and the wheel swing is called the middle swing pair. The Bridle. Headstall: A, crownpiece; B, brow band; C, ornament; D. D, check piece; E, throatlatch. Bit: F. F, mouthpiece; G, port; H.H, branches; I. I, rein rings; K, curb strap; R, reins. Link: L, link strap; M, link snap. {From School of the Trooper.) Q. How and where is harness placed? In garrison? A. In Garrison. — The harness is arranged on two pegs on the heel posts, as follows: On the upper peg: Both bridles hung from the peg by their headstalls; the traces of both horses hung over the peg close to the heel post; the off saddle with its attachments over the seat; the blanket across the saddle; both collars, unlocked, over the blanket. On the lower peg: The near saddle and blanket arranged as prescribed for the off harness. HARNESSING 153 The neck yoke, with martingales attached, is hung from a spike driven into the side of the heel post. To prevent injury to the off saddle when the blankets are out drying, the sack is put over the harness and the collars are then placed across the sack. If the harness pegs are on the left heel post as the driver faces the manger, the saddles are placed with the cantles against the heel post; if the pegs are on the other side of the stall, the pommels are placed against the heel post. Q. In the field? A. In the Field. — The pole prop is placed under the end of the pole. The wheel traces are detached from the collars only and laid back on the footboards. The remainder of the har- ness of the near-wheel horse is placed on the pole next to the double-tree, arranged as follows: The saddle with its attach- ments over it, the blanket across the saddle, the bridle and collar over the blanket. The remainder of the off-wheel har- ness is placed next, then the swing, and lead harness in the same order. The traces of the swing and lead harness, folded once, are placed across the saddle. The neck yoke is placed on the footboard. Q. In entraining? A. In Entraining.— The harness belonging to a single pair is placed in a harness sack in the following order: Neck yoke; collars, one in each end of the sack; bridles, one inside of each collar; traces looped around and' outside of the collars; blan- kets, one on each collar; saddles, one on each blanket. The harness sack is securely tied and is tagged to show (i) the pair in the team, (2) the carriage, (3) the section. When harness sacks are not taken, each horse's harness may be packed in a grain sack and appropriately tagged. Q. What is the order of harnessing by detail? In the field? A. The instructor commands: 1. By detail; 2. HARNESS. Collar. — At this command each driver puts on and locks the collar of his off horse, then that of his near horse. To avoid pinching and clamping a portion of the skin or mane between the collar and the collar pad, the collar is placed w T ell up on the neck, locked, and then lifted gently to its position against the shoulders. By stooping down and looking at it, the driver 154 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE should satisfy himself that the buckle latch is securely locked. Bridle. — He bridles first the off horse, passing the reins through the roller, and then the near horse. Unless otherwise instructed, the halters are removed before bridling. Saddle. — He puts on the blanket of the off horse, then the saddle with its attachments, taking care not to displace the blanket; buckles the collar strap to the saddle; turns back the back strap and, in the case of wheel drivers, the breeching, fastens the crupper and completes the saddling. He then saddles the near horse in like manner. Traces. — He lays the middle of the traces of the off horse over the horse's back, behind the saddle, toggles on opposite sides, and, beginning with the off trace, passes the toggles thru the trace loops from the rear and attaches them to the hame tugs on the collar. The traces of the near horse are then attached in the same manner. The rear ends of the traces are left hanging over the backs of the horses. When the horses are harnessed for drill by pair, the traces, at the direction of the instructor, are either not attached or are toggled up by passing each trace over the back behind the saddle and slipping the ring of the trace chain over the toggle which attaches the opposite trace to the hame tug. Couple. — He turns his pair about so as to face the stable driveway and attaches the hook at the end of the coupling rein to the right pommel ring of the near saddle. He then stands to horse. Yoke. — The wheel driver takes down the neck yoke; places himself between his horses, facing in the same direction with them; fastens the breast strap of the off horse, then that of the near horse; passes the martingale of the near horse between the forelegs, thru the standing loop on the cincha; attaches the hooks at the end of the side straps to the martingale D ring; secures the martingale of the off horse in the same manner; then passes out in rear of the near horse and stands to horse. Q. What is the order of unharnessing by detail? In the field? A. i. By detail; 2. UNHARNESS. Unyoke. — At this command the wheel driver passes between his horses from the rear, unhooks the martingale of his near HARNESSING 155 horse, and draws the martingale thru the standing loop on the cincha; then does the same with respect to the off horse; unhooks the inside end of each breast strap, detaches the neck yoke, and hangs it on its spike. Uncouple. — Each driver steps in front of his pair and un- couples. If the horses are facing the stable driveway, he turns them about to face the manger. Traces off. — He disengages the near trace of the near horse and lays its middle over the saddle, toggle on the near side; disengages the off trace and lays it beside the near trace, tog- gle on the off side; removes the traces and hangs them on their peg. In like manner he removes and hangs up the traces of the off horse. Unsaddle. — He unfastens the crupper of the near horse and places the attachments in the saddle; unfastens the collar strap and then unsaddles the near horse, placing the sad- dle on the lower peg. He removes the blanket from the near horse and places it over the saddle, the folded edge away from the heel post. He then unsaddles the off horse in like manner. Unbridle. — He unbridles the near horse, puts the halter on, fastens the halter to the manger, and hangs the bridle on the upper peg next the heel post. He then unbridles the off horse in like manner. Collar off.— He removes the collar of the near horse, then that of the off horse, and hangs them up, the near collar next to the post, the zinced surfaces away from the heel post. Q. What is the order of harnessing and unharnessing in garrison? A. Executed as in field, but in such order as to suit the disposi- tion of the harness. Thus, the order in harnessing is: Collar, saddle, traces, bridle, couple, yoke. In unharnessing: Un- yoke, uncouple, unbridle, traces off, unsaddle, collar off. Q. Where are the horses tied during harnessing and unharnessing? A. While harnessing and unharnessing, the horses are ordinarily tied by their halters to their carriages, as follows : The lead pair to the right wheel of the gun or caisson or to the end of the pole; the swing or lead swing pair to the right wheel of the limber; the wheel pair to the left wheel of the limber; and the wheel swing pair, if present, to the left wheel of the gun or caisson. 156 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE In harnessing or unharnessing by detail, drivers stand to heel after completing each detail of the instruction. - Q. What is the importance of the fitting and adjusting of harness? A. Drivers must bestow constant and unremitting attention on the adjustment and fitting of their harness. They must learn early that a horse can not properly perform his work unless he is made comfortable in well-fitted harness. If the harness pinches, galls, or otherwise causes him discomfort, his sole idea will be to escape from the annoyance or pain thereby occasioned him, and he will become fretful, nervous, and unsteady in his work. This will not only add to his own distress, thru a useless expenditure of strength and nervous energy, but by rendering the draft of the whole team unsteady it will needlessly increase the work and fatigue of the other horses. Drivers must appreciate the fact that every sore, every injury, every abrasion of the skin, is due to a certain definite cause which, if removed, can produce no further effect. If ill-fitting harness has escaped the notice of a driver while his horses were at work, any injury caused thereby must not escape his notice at the next stables. Failure to discover and report such injury at once to the instructor or to the chief of section is a neglect calling for disciplinary correction. Injuries due to the harness must be discovered in their very beginning and at once reported to the officer in charge of the horses. That officer then performs his duty unsatisfactorily if he lacks ingenuity and skill to modify or correct the fit of the harness so as to remove the cause of the injury. It is only by constant attention on the part of all concerned — ■ drivers, chiefs of section, chiefs of platoon, the officer in charge of the horses, and the captain — that the animals of a battery can be kept up to their work without more or less pro- longed periods of enforced idleness due to harness injuries. The bridle and saddle are fitted as already described. The collar should fit about the horse's shoulders and neck easily and uniformly. It should freely admit the thickness of the hand between the lower part of the collar and the throat and, when pulled to one side, should admit the thickness of the HARNESSING 157 fingers between the sides of the collar' and the neck. A short collar chokes a horse by pressing on the windpipe; a narrow one pinches and rubs the neck. A broad collar works about and galls the shoulders. More injuries result from collars that are too large than from collars that are too small. The final test of the fit of a collar is to observe it carefully when the horse is in draft and, at halts, to notice what effect it is having on his shoulders. After a collar has been properly fitted to a horse it should be marked with his battery number. This is conveniently done by painting the number just above the left draft spring on the inside of the collar. The back strap, when adjusted, should admit the breadth of the hand between it and the horse's back. If too short, the crupper will cut the tail and the saddle will be displaced. The collar strap should not be tight; otherwise it will pull the saddle forward on the withers. The surcingle, when used, should be buckled on the near side of the near horse and on the off side of the off horse, less tight than the girth and over it. The hip straps should be so adjusted as to enable the breech- ing body to bear flat against the thighs and to rest from 12 to 15 inches below the dock. If this strap hangs too low, the action of the horse, when set into the breeching, will be inter- fered with; if it hangs too high > the side straps will rub the stifle. The side straps are adjusted to cause the breeching body to bear quickly should the horse be required to check the car- riage, but not so short as to impede the animaPs movements while in draft. The exact adjustment can be obtained only by watching the horse in draft, both up and down grade. The martingale is fastened by its cincha strap to the neck yoke. The length of this fastening should be such as to per- mit the D ring and D ring safe on the martingale to be well thru the standing loop on the cincha, thus avoiding catch- ing and interfering with the latter when the horse is set into the breeching. The martingale must be kept smooth and soft or it will chafe the inner sides of the legs and rub the belly. The breast straps should support the pole in a horizontal 158 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE position. If the pole is too low, the effort of supporting it is increased; if too high, the martingale and neck yoke may rub the breast. The loin straps should be adjusted so that the traces, when in draft, will be straight and without downward pull on the trace loops. Otherwise, galls on the back will result. The traces. — The length of the lead and swing traces must depend in a great measure on the size of the horse and his stride. The rule for lead and swing pairs is to allow about i 44 31 43 23 Off lV7teel Sfamess ■Shourinp old model bridle PLATE XV Artillery .Harness Horse in draft yard from head to point of buttocks when in draft. The length of the wheel trace is fixed, but allowance may be made for difference in the size of the horses by proper adjustment of the martingale and side straps. This will allow a minimum distance of about 14 inches between hind quarters and single- tree for the average wheel horse when in draft. The traces should be adjusted by a strap under the belly or one over the saddle so that their direction shall be as nearly normal to the shoulders as possible to avoid any downward or upward pull HARNESSING 159 on the collar. A downward pull on the collar will tend to gall or injure the neck, while an upward pull on it will tend to make it rise and choke the horse. The rear trace chains of the lead and swing traces have a ring at one end and a hook at the other; the hook is passed thru a "D" ring at the end of the trace and hooked back into any desired link. By this means the length of the lead and swing traces may be adjusted. Care must be exercised Off Lead Jfarn ess . 3h*Min.$ new me dot Jbridle PLATE XV that the traces belonging to any one horse are of even length. The coupling rein should be so adjusted as to permit the off horse properly to maintain his trace and yet to hold him to his place in the team. THE ARTILLERY HARNESS [Plate XV.} The component parts of the artillery harness are given in the table below. Plate XV shows the harness for the off-wheel and off -lead horses. The nomenclature corresponding to the num- bers on the plate will be found in the table. 160 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Horses in Draft with Full Packs HARNESSING 161 No. on plate Wheel Component parts Lead Near] Off Near Off 'horse 'horse (horse horse Property classifica- tion Class Sec- 3 4 8,9 4 10-19 10 11 •12 18 19 13 14 16 17 20 21 40 22, 23 23 24, 25 24 25 26-23 27 42 Backstrap and crupper, complete. . . Consisting of — Body and hip straps Dock Loin strap Trace loops Backstrap-hooks Breast strap, complete Consisting of — • Breast strap Breast-strap hooks Breeching, complete ". . Consisting of — Backstrap (1) and hip straps (4) Body Dock Back-strap hooks Side-strap hooks Loin strap Side straps Trace loops Bridle, complete Consisting of — Brow band. . . . , Brow-band ornaments Cheek pieces Coupling strap Connecting strap Crownpiece Snaffle bit, model of 191 1 1 Reins (pairs) Throatlatch....* Collar, steel Hame tug, a part of the collar Collar strap Halter, complete Consisting of — Headstall Tie rope Martingale, complete Consisting of — Martingale Cincha strap Saddle, complete Consisting of — Cinchas, with reinforces and loops Cinchas, without reinforces and loops Lead-rein roller and strap Quarter straps, including rings, safes, and cincha straps Cincha strap, a part of the sad- dle quarter strap Coat strap, 33-inch (pommel) . . Coat strap, 45-inch (cantle).. . . IV 1 Twenty curb bits with chains are issued for use in place of snafHe bits on fractious draft horses. 11 162 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE No. on plate Component parts Wheel Lead Property classifica- tion Near horse OS Near horse horse Off horse Class Sec- tion 30 Saddle, complete — Continued, Consisting of — Coat strap, 60-inch 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 IV IX 31 32 Saddletree, leather-covered Stirrups, brass (new style nickel steel) 1 2 2 33 Stirrup straps 34 35 Saddlebags Saddlebag side straps 36 Traces, lead, model of 1908 Consisting of — 1 trace body 1 trace cover 3 links 1 chain 1 toggle 2 sockets 2 cones 2 filler pieces 8 37 Traces, wheel, model of 1908 Consisting of — 1 trace body 2 2 1 trace cover 1 ring 2 sockets 2 links 2 chains 2 toggles 2 cones 2 filler pieces 38 Mogul spring, a part of wheel trace 1 loop hook 1 ring .• 1 Mogul spring loop ..... 1 locking strap 39 Trace chain 2 1 2 2 Whip 1 Sweat leathers 2 1 41 Blanket, issued separately from har- ness 5 STEEL COLLARS Sizes and Directions for Fitting Steel collars are made in the following sizes: 2 A, 2 B, 4 A, 4 B, 5, 5 A, 5 B, 6, 6 A, 6 B, 7, 7 A, 7 B, and 8 A. The number and shape of the collar are stamped on the front side under the ex- tension bolt. The A and B shapes have straighter sides than the numbers without letters. When issued with harness, unless otherwise ordered, 10 per cent of the collars are No. 5, 50 per cent. HARNESSING 163 No. 5 A, and 40 per cent. No. 6. In' requisitions, the size of collars desired should be given. The steel collar pads are made in seven different sizes: No. o is 4 inches wide, No. 1 is 4.5 inches, No. 2 is 5 inches, etc., to No. 6, which is 7 inches wide. The pad connections are also furnished in seven sizes, From No. o to No. 6. For the plain number of collar (5, 6, or 7) the regular adjustment requires a pad connec- tion of the same number as the pad. The A and B shapes have straighter sides and take a pad connection two sizes larger than the pad — that is, it would take a No. 3 connection with a No. 1 pad, etc., for the regular adjustment in these shapes. When the collar is very wide at the top and narrow at the bottom the size of the pad connection must be increased one or two numbers to allow the collar to close easily at the bottom. In the reverse case, a smaller pad connection should be used. The collar pads are numbered on the front inner side. The pad connections are numbered on the side having the round holes, which side must be kept to the front on the collar. In requisitions for collar pads and pad connections, the sizes desired must be stated. The buckle is made in two sizes. No. 2 is 1 inch longer than No. 1, and is used with the larger sizes of collar pad. The correct adjustment and fitting of collars is of the utmost importance. The variety of sizes and shapes of collars, pads, pad connections, and buckles issued by the Ordnance Depart- ment is sufficient to enable any horse to be correctly fitted. Efficient supervision by officers of the fitting of collars and of the adjustment of the point of draft (trace plate) is required to secure proper results. The table of dimensions gives the largest and smallest size that each collar can be made with the No. 3 and No.* 1 pads. Adding 3^ inch in length and width to the smallest dimen- sions given in the table will give the size of the collars when fitted with the No. 2 pads. These examples are given to show the three regular adjustments in each size of collar, but these dimensions can be varied to suit the different shapes of necks. The largest pad can be put in the top of the collar and the bottom taken in to its smallest dimensions, or the smallest pad can be put in the top and the bottom left out. While each collar can be lengthened or shortened and taken in or let out at the bottom by 164 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE means of the adjustments provided, the width at the top can not be changed without using a larger or smaller pad. Table of Dimensions (Size of collars fitted with No. 3 pads) Number of collar Length of collar in- side, ' Width 6 inches down from top, Width 8 inches down from top, Width at draft, 2 A inches 18 18 19M 19H 21 21 21 22^ 22>£ 22>3 24 24 24 25M inches 6% 6}i 7 6H . 7 5 /s 7 6H 7% 7 7 7 5 /& 7 7 7 inches 7H 6% 7H 7H m 7U 7H 83/ 2 7% iH m 7% 7M6 7% inches 2 B 8 4 A %% 4 B %% 5 • 5 A 5 B 9V* 9 8>£ 6 6 A 9% 9H 6 B 9% 7 10H 7 A 9 5 A 7 B 10 8 A 9 3 A (Size of collar fitted with No. 1 pads) 2 A. 2 B. 4 A. 4 B. 5-... 5 A. SB. 6.... 6 A. 6 B. 7.... 7 A. 7B. 8 A. In fitting irregular shapes none of the connections may give just the proper tension on the pad. In such a case use the one that comes nearest and straighten or bend the extension at the top. When the collar requires to be widened at top to relieve HARNESSING 165 the pressure on the pad and make it lock easily at the bottom, open the collar wide and place a round piece of hard wood or iron, i inch in diameter and 2 inches long, between the connec- tion and collar side close up to the hinge; then press the sides together and bend both sides alike, so that they will be the same COLLAR PAD CONNECTlQti COLLAR PAD COLLAR STRAP WRENCH length at the bottom. Do not let the fulcrum rest on the pad, for it will bend it. If the collar sides require straightening to close them tighter on the pad and give more tension on the latch at the bottom, open the colar at the bottom, hook the wrench over 166 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the top of collar side, and press down the lever, treating both sides alike. Both of these operations can be performed with the collar put together. The spare parts furnished for the repair of the collars with the correct names of the parts are shown on Plate XVI. ;.,'-"'.>:■ DRAFT SPRING PAD BOOH m** BOLT At;: 'Vl'Tt-cn 7' r/QN mo B0L7 BOLT ANb NUT for TRA ipi BOLT AND NU\ TRACE 3ACH STRAP CONNECTION PLATE Canvas collar pads are not part of the Artillery harness, but are furnished upon requisition. They are made in sizes Nos. 2 > 3> 4> 5) and 6, as called for; if no size is called for, they are made in equal proportions of Nos. 4, 5, and 6. PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID By Major Norman D. Smith and ist. lt. Edwin St. Clair Wren Q. What is the first requirement for good health? A. Cleanliness of body and clothing. Q. How is cleanliness of body and clothing maintained? A. (a) Frequent bathing, (at least twice a week in cold weather and daily in hot weather), keeps the pores of the skin free and open so that they may secrete the waste matter of the body, which if not secreted would soon produce illness, (b) Very dirty clothing should be soaked first, and then thor- oughly scrubbed. If water is not obtainable, as in some field conditions, the underclothing should be changed, dried in the sun, aired and beaten. Q. What materials are used in making clothing? A. Wool, cotton and linen. Q. What are the advantages of woolen clothing? A. Wool is a poor conductor of heat and a good absorbent of moisture, hence it keeps in the heat of the body in winter, and keeps out the heat of the sun in summer. By absorb- ing and condensing moisture, thus setting forth its latent heat, it keeps the body from getting chilled after excessive perspiration. These properties make it suitable for under- garments, both for summer and winter, and outer garments in winter. Q. What are the advantages of cotton clothing? A. Cotton is a good conductor of heat and a poor absorbent of moisture, which makes it useful as an outer garment in summer. Q. When should the teeth be cleaned? A. Immediately after each meal. Q. What happens if teeth are not cleaned? A. Tartar forms, causing the gums to become soft and spongy, so that they bleed easily and are thus exposed to infection. Q. What protects the teeth from decay? 167 168 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. A hard white covering called enamel, which when broken allows the teeth to decay. Q. What is one of the greatest dangers to which a soldier is exposed? A. Venereal diseases. Q. What is the only certain protection against venereal disease? A. Absolute avoidance of impure intercourse. Q. What is meant by the term continence, as applied to sexual relations? A. By continence is meant, the absolute refraining from sexual intercourse. Q. Is continence harmful to the young and vigorous man? A. Absolutely not. Nature has provided emissions for any excess accumulation of seminal fluid and this occasional occurrence does no harm. Q. How may foot soreness be avoided? A. (i) Properly fitted and shaped shoes. No shoes should be worn except those issued by Quartermaster Department. (2) Clean feet; and (3) Clean dry socks. Q. What care of the feet should be taken on the march? A. Feet should be washed carefully at the end of a march; socks changed and the old pair either washed or at least sunned and dried for the next day's use. If the feet become sore, rub with vaseline, especially between the toes. If vaseline is not available, use foot powder. Q. What is the treatment for blistered feet? A. If the blisters are small, cover them with adhesive plaster but do not open them. If large, make only a small opening and press the fluid out. If the skin is rubbed off cover the blistered area with* plaster. Q. What is meant by chafing and how is it prevented? A. Chafing is an irritation of the skin caused by rubbing, and is most common in the crotch or other joint flexures. The surest preventative is cleanliness, which is accomplished by daily baths. If water is scarce, at least the feet, hands, genitals, and arm-pits should be washed. Q. What is the treatment for lice? A. Lice are generally the result of lack of cleanliness. When found on the body the hair of the parts affected should be PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 169 cut close and blue ointment, or a solution of bichloride (One tab. to a half pint of water) should be applied. Under- clothes should be boiled. Q. How much water is necessary for the average man per day? A. From 3 to 4 pints. Q. What diseases are caused by the presence of (1) the mosquito, (2) the fly? A. Both Malaria and Yellow fever are transmitted by the mosquito. Typhoid fever is transmitted by the fly. Q. From what three diseases, has the soldier been made im- mune? A. Smallpox, by vaccination, and Typhoid fever and Paraty- phoid fever by inoculation. FIRST AID Q. What does the first-aid package contain? A. Two compresses of gauze, sewed to a bandage, and wrapped in waxed paper. Also two safety pins wrapped in wax paper. Q. For what is the first-aid package used? A. Used for all types of open wounds and injuries of such size as justify emergency treatment. It is not for minor scratches and knocks. Q. What first aid treatment will give relief from insect bites? A. Paste of bicarbonate of soda, ammonia, or wood ash, applied to the bitten area. Q. How would you treat a snake bite? A. Cut down at site of bite, suck out poison, cauterize with hot coal or gun powder poured on and ignited, put ligature above the bite. Q. What is Tetanus and how is it prevented? A. Tetanus — commonly known as Lockjaw — is prevented by prompt attention to wounds, especially where they are deep and dirty, and incurred near picket line, or around stable. Q. What is hemorrhage and how do you recognize it? A. Hemorrhage is bleeding. It is recognized by the presence of blood. In severe hemorrhage by the collapse of the patient. Q. Name types of hemorrhage, and means of distinguishing different types. . 170 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. They are of three types; namely, venous, capillary and arterial. In the case of capillary hemorrhage, blood oozes all over wound; venous; rapid, steady flow of dark blood; arterial; bright in color and escapes in spurts. Q. How would you treat the venous and arterial types? A. Venous — by elevation and pressure over wound, that is, with first aid dressing, and pressure below the injury. Arterial — by pressure above the injury. Q. What common method can be used to stop arterial bleeding? A. Pressure above, by (a) ringers, (b) tourniquet. Q. Describe an improvised tourniquet. A. Use a handkerchief, piece of clothing, hat cord, or other binding material to wrap around and above the bleeding point, with knot above the line of blood vessel and tightened until bleeding is controlled, but not too tightly, as it will cause gangrene. Q. What is a dislocation? A. It is the slipping of a bone out of joint. Q. What is the most common dislocation and why? A. Shoulder, because the joint cavity is shallow (to allow of wide range of motion) and because the shoulder is most used and most subject to sprains and injuries. Q. What are most easily recognized signs of dislocation? A. Patient cannot move joint, sickening pain, often numbness or tingling in the affected part; limb is fixed and cannot be moved, limb fixed in an unnatural position and seems longer than the one on the opposite side. Q. How do you feel the difference between a fracture and a dis- location? A. In fracture there is an unnatural degree of motion between the joint, instead of fixed joint; movement also produces grating sound and sensation. The deformity is between the joints and often the affected limb is shorter than the one on the sound side. Q. What is a fracture? A. A fracture is a broken bone. Q. What are the main types and describe them? A. Simple and compound — A simple fracture occurs when the bone is broken without the skin being ruptured. In a com- PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 171 pound fracture, the ragged edge of the bone protrudes through the skin and may be easily seen from the outside. Q. What are the usual symptoms of fracture? A. Pain, tenderness, unusual amount of motion between joints, grating sensation on motion, shortening of the affected limb. Q. What would be your first aid treatment of a simple fracture? A. Make patient comfortable, place limb in straight line — handling carefully, so as not to push broken bones thru skin; fix limb rigidly by some method of splint so as to render it immovable. Q. Name some common materials from which splints may be improvised. A. Small limbs and twigs of trees, rifles, bayonets, blankets, hay ; sticks or anything which will hold the limb immovable. Q. Describe sunstroke. A. Sunstroke is caused by prolonged exposure to excessive heat, as sunlight. Patient first has headache and dizziness, and then sensation of looking thru red haze. He falls uncon- scious, skin is dry and very hot, pulse becomes very full, he has deep breathing resembling snore and cannot be aroused. Q. What is the treatment? A. Place in cool shady place and remove clothes. Apply ice or cold water to head and over body. Q. What is heat exhaustion? A. Heat exhaustion is similar to fainting. The patient falls, but is not unconscious, face is pale, skin moist and clammy, pulse weak, and breathing very shallow. Q. What is the treatment? A. Place patient in shade, loosen clothing, keep head low, give water and keep body warm. Q. What are symptoms of frost bite? A. Unpleasant sensation of cold with pain, the part becomes red, and finally white. The affected part is hard and painless. Q. What is the treatment? A. Prevent body from quickly becoming warm. Remember not to move into warm room. Rub well with ice or wet snow. After the pain and redness reappears, put on wet dressing. Q. Give first aid treatment for burns. 172 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. First remove clothing from burned area, then apply any substance which will exclude the air, such as vaseline, lard, butter or lubricating oil. Q. What is the treatment for unconsciousness? A. Place patient flat on back, give plenty of fresh air, sprinkle face and neck with cold water. Keep bystanders away. Q. Give treatment of fits. A. Loosen clothing, restrain patient, and protect tongue from being bitten by placing wooden peg, folded towel or knife handle between the teeth. After recovering consciousness allow patient to sleep and rest. Q. What should be done in case of fire in one's clothing? A. Do not run as this would tend to fan the flame and increase it. Roll on the floor or ground and smother the fire in that manner or by wrapping up in a rug or blanket. Great care should be taken not to inhale the flame. Q. Give treatment for sprains of ankle, wrist, hand or foot. A. Put into water as hot as possible for ten or fifteen minutes, then apply a tight bandage and elevate. Q. What is the treatment of Ivy-poisoning? A. Wash affected part with soap and water to dissolve and re- move any remaining poison that may be on the skin and apply solution of baking soda, or 20 drops of bromine to 1 oz. of glycerine. Q. What is the treatment of ptomaine poisoning? A. Empty the stomach by drinking warm mustard water (table spoon of mustard to a tumbler of water) or by sticking the index finger down the throat. Make the bowels move freely by using Epsom salts or Castor oil. Give stimulants and apply heat externally. Q. Give treatment for drowning. A. In drowning water gets into the air passages and mechanically shuts off the air. To clear the lungs of- water turn the patient on his face with forehead on his wrist with a roll of clothing under his chest. Get astride the body, press on the back to force out the water, next place your hands under his abdomen and lift up his body with head hanging down so that water will run out. PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 173 Follow this with artificial respiration as follows: Place patient on his back, shoulders slightly raised by small pillows or folded coat, clear nose and throat of mucus, froth and dirt, draw the tongue forward to keep it from drop- ping back and closing the opening of the larynx. Keep it forward by forcing a pencil between the last teeth and over the tongue or by having an assistant hold it between his fingers covered by a handkerchief. Loosen all clothing; kneel behind patient's head facing his feet; grasp his forearms just below the elbows and press them . against the front and sides of the chest, throwing the weight of your body forward and upon his arms and chest. This forces the air out of the lungs. Then draw his forearms slowly upward above patient's head throwing your own body back, so as to make the extension complete; this draws the lower ribs upward and outward, expands the chest and the air rushes in; repeat these movements about fifteen times to the minute and keep it up until patient begins to breathe by himself or until there appears no possibility of his doing so. Keep artificial respiration working at least one hour before giving up and at the same time snuff, tobacco, pepper or smelling salts may be applied to the nostrils to aid in stimula- ting respiration. FIRST AID DENTISTRY Q. How often should the teeth be cleaned? A. After each meal if possible, and if at no other time just before retiring and immediately upon arising. Q. How should the tooth brush be used? A. With a rotary, up and down motion so as to better cleanse between the teeth, this for at least two minutes, by the watch. Brush gums, palate, tongue, etc., as well. Q. What cleansing materials are best for teeth and mouth? A. Any good tooth paste or powder, or common table salt if the others are not obtainable, a clean, stiff tooth brush with plenty of water. A teaspoonful of salt to a glass of warm water makes an ideal mouth wash. Q. What happens when the teeth are not properly cleansed? 174 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. Food gathers about the teeth which in time becomes putrid and acid in reaction. This acid condition acts upon the enamel of the tooth disintegrating it, causing a decay which later on develops into a toothache. Remember a CLEAN TOOTH WILL NOT DECAY. Q. How can you distinguish between an ache caused by a "live tooth" and one caused by a "dead one?" A. A "live tooth" will respond to hots, colds, sweets, etc. "A dead tooth" is only affected by heat, the pain being caused by the expansion of the gases in the dead pulp. Q. What remedies will relieve an ache in a live tooth? A. Oil of cloves, eugenol, campho-phenique, oil of cinnamon, carbolic acid (in very minute quantities only) on pledget of cotton placed in cavity. Place a second pledget of cotton, which has been dipped in sandarac or vaseline upon the first pledget in the cavity as a sealing. Where no drugs are available use heat, either liquid or dry, cleanse cavity as much as possible and close same with pledgets of cotton • which have been dipped in sandarac or vaseline, to keep cav- ity air-tight. Q. What will relieve an ache in a "dead" tooth? A. DO NOT CLOSE THE CAVITY and DO NOT apply heat to the outside of the face. Cleanse the cavity as much as is possible, suck the tooth in order to relieve pressure of gases, paint gums with iodine or a strong liniment. Apply a hot fig or raisin on gums directly over the pain. This treatment will also apply to an abscessed tooth. Q. What is smoker's sore mouth and treatment for same? A. Symptoms are large, swollen, very red, dry patches on roof of mouth, extending over palate which are extremely painful, in reality blisters. Treatment: Let the patient hold a five grain tablet of chlor- ate of potassium in his mouth until it dissolves, do not chew; then in two hours another one, after that he will be able to smoke, if not repeat the treatment. These tablets can be obtained from the Sanitary Detachments. Q. What is a simple treatment for sore gums? A. Paint the affected parts with iodine and use warm salt water as a mouth wash. PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 175 Q. What oral or mouth conditions would indicate active syphilis? A. The Primary Lesion of acquired syphilis appears from ten to ninety days, an average of twenty-one days after, and at the particular place of infection. It may appear as an eroded, hard pimple, which after a few days will lose its coating and will develop into a raw ulceration encircled by a hard tough ring. This sore or chancre is painless. The Lymphatic Glands lying in adjacent parts become swollen. These chancres frequently appear upon the lips. The Secondary Stage, the most infectious and virulent, will generally be observed in and about the mouth. These mu- cous patches are not local infections but the result of the gen- eral progress of the disease; they will be found upon the mucous membrane and upon any other portion of the Oral cavity, the inflammation even extending to the pharynx and larynx. These patches are often confused with the ordinary, harmless fever blister. "Safety First" is the rule to follow, as this disease may be contracted by kissing a person thus infected. The Tertiary Stage likewise presents its symptoms manifested in and about the oral cavity, but before the patient has reached this stage he will have been isolated and subjected to treatment. Consult the Surgeon immediately; DO NOT try any home remedies. Q. How would you treat a fever blister or cold sore? A. Clean the parts affected with alcohol or peroxide of hydrogen after which apply campho-phenique. Q. What are "Cankers" and how are they treated? A. Cankers are small, painful ulcers which appear in the mucous membrane of the mouth, the gums, and the tongue, especially on that surface near its junction with the floor of the mouth. They vary in size and depth according to their stage of pro- gress and are always painful. Treatment: The use of a good antiseptic mouth wash is recommended. The ulcer should be cleansed with a pledget of cotton saturated with peroxide of hydrogen. This can be followed by touching the affected part with a pledget of cotton saturated with carbolic acid. One treatment is usu- 176 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE ally sufficient. (Carbolic acid should be used with the great- est care and in the most minute quantities, preferably by the surgeon or some member of the Sanitary Detachment.) Q. Will tobacco injure the teeth and gums? A. No, it merely stains the teeth and as long as all particles are removed from between the teeth and the margins of the gums by thorough cleansing, no ill effects will be experienced; in fact many authorities claim tobacco will preserve the teeth and prevent their decaying. In order to prevent abscesses, infections, stomach troubles, rheumatism and numerous other general disorders it is recom- mended that all broken down teeth, beyond repair, and de- cayed roots be extracted before going into the field. No man can enjoy perfect health nor be a first-class fighting unit when he is reducing his resistance by constantly taking into his system a quantity of pus, etc., with each mouthful of' food he swallows. Should you become wounded so that your life was endangered, or suffer some serious illness, these ab- scesses would become more active, the flow of pus would be increased and should your body, in its weakened condition, be unable to throw off this added infection, death would result. Keep the doorway of your body scrupulously clean. INSTRUMENTS iST Lt. Kenneth D. Rockwell Q. What unit of measure is used in computing angles for artil- lery purposes? A. The mil. Q. What is a mil? A. A mil is the angle which subtends i yard at iooo yards range. Therefore, the value of a mil at any particular point is one-one-thousandth (Kooo) of the range in yards to that point. There are 6400 mils in the circumference of a circle. Q. What instruments are used for measuring these angles? (See Mil. page 4) A. The Battery Commander's Telescope (Scissors Instrument) and the Aiming Circle. THE BATTERY COMMANDER'S TELESCOPE Q. How is the Battery Commander's Telescope set up? A. The tripod is first removed from the case, the thumbscrews at the bottom of the wooden part of the legs unloosened, the metal extensions drawn out, and tripod set up so that the legs will not be placed too far apart. The head of the tripod, containing the spindle, must be as level as possible. The instrument should be removed from its case, the elevating worm case straightened out, and the instrument seated on the spindle of the tripod after pressing in the locking plunger. Q. How is the instrument leveled? A. The vertical spindle clamping lever should be loosened and the instrument so adjusted that the bubble on the Azimuth worm case is centered when looking at it from two directions at right angles one from the other. Q. How is the instrument focused? A. The telescope is directed on a distant object, one eye is closed and the eyepiece for the other is focused by twisting the ad- 177 12 178 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE justing screw until the object appears clearly denned. Repeat the process for the other eyepiece. The interpupilary dis- tance is adjusted by turning the interpupilary adjusting screw until the distant object appears in a clear, distinct image. Q. How is the angle of deflection, or a horizontal angle measured? A. The Azimuth scale is set at zero, and, without altering the reading — by loosening the lower free motion screw — the vertical cross-hairs are directed on the aiming point ; the free motion screw is set up and any error corrected with the aid of the slow motion screw immediately above it. After this has been done the Azimuth scale should be released and the vertical cross-hair put on the object to which the angle is to be measured. The angle is then set off and easily read. Q. How is vertical, or angle of site measured? A. The instrument is set up and leveled. A sight is made on the object to which the angle is to be measured, instrument being adjusted to bring the horizontal cross-hair on the base of the object. The bubble between the tubes is leveled and the reading appearing on the attached scale is the angle. THE AIMING CIRCLE Q. How is the aiming circle set up? A. The tripod is set up and the instrument mounted on it and leveled by centering the bubble in the middle of the upper face. Q. How is an angle of deflection measured? A. The Azimuth scale is set at zero and the instrument turned until the cross-hairs appear exactly on the aiming point, the lower worm knob being used for this purpose. The head is then released by means of the Azimuth worm lever and turned so that the cross-hairs will appear on the target or object to which the angle is to be measured. Read the angle. Q. How may an angle of site be measured? A. The instrument being level, the cross-hairs are placed on the base of the target by operating the thumbscrew located below the eyepiece, the bubble at the end of the telescope elbow centered by means of the worm scale. The reading on the angle of site scale is the angle of site. INSTRUMENTS 179 Q. In the event of these instruments being destroyed by shell fire, by what means may the horizontal or angles of de- flection be measured? A. By means of the Battery Commander's Ruler and by the use of the fist. Q. How should the string on the B. C. Ruler be adjusted so that the ruler will accurately measure 300 mils. A. With the Battery Commander's Telescope lay of! 300 mils on the side of a building, subdividing the last 100 mils into 50 mil parts. One of these parts should be again divided, and the last 25 mils further divided into 5 equal parts of 5 mils each. Drive a stake at the point over which the B. C. Instrument was set up. Then by standing so that eye is over stake and holding the cord of the ruler against the teeth and shortening or lengthening it a point may be determined such that when the ruler is so held it will accurately measure 300 mils. Tie a knot in the string at this point. Q. How may the mil value of your fist be determined? A. By standing at the stake above mentioned and extending the arm horizontally to the side, fist closed, read along the line of knuckles the number of mils covered. The hand may then be opened and fingers calibrated. Q. If the angle to be measured approached, or was slightly greater than 3200 mils (a straight line) how could its value be quickly determined? A. By taking tw T o rocks or two sticks and placing one of them on the ground in front of the body and pointing to the aiming point; then moving back 20 or 30 feet align the body with the first marker and the aiming point, place the other stick or rock on this line. Then move back toward the aim- ing point in the direction of the first stick, turn about and align the body with the two markers. Sight over the markers and locate a distant point or object in continuation of the line. Measure the remaining distance to the target, adding or subtracting this amount from 3200, as the conditions may require. If care is exercised, the angle may be measured very accurately in this manner. Q. If the angle to be measured were about 1600 mils (aright angle), how could it be measured? 180 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. By taking a book or some object with a square corner, hold ing it horizontally on the finger ends and sighting along one side at the aiming point hold the book for an assistant to sight along the edge at right angles and locate a point. The distance between the two points so determined would sub- tend an angle of 1600 mils. As in the preceding method measure any remaining distance with the B. C. Ruler, and add or subtract this amount from 1600, as the case may necessitate. THE RANGE FINDER ' Q. How are ranges determined? A. By means of the range finder. The range finder is a long cylindrical instrument padded at each end and mounted on a tripod. The focus is obtained by turning the eyepiece. Q. How is a range finder operated? A. Adjust by the turn screw in front so that the two eyes of the instrument will include the object, the range of which is desired. Two images will be seen — one upright, the other inverted, separated by a medial horizontal line into which both images can be made to merge and on which both images can be horizontally aligned so that they are equidistant. To secure this equidistant, horizontal alignment of both images, turn the knurled roller screw (halving screw) in the lower right arm of the instrument. To align both images vertically so that they will merge into each other perfectly on the horizontal line already referred to, turn the knurled roller screw (ranging screw) in the upper right arm of the instrument. Read off the range in yards thru the window in the left arm of the instrument. Caution: (1) Adjust for only one object at a time and only some definite part of that one object, as right or left edge; (2) Do not disturb the regis- tration reading in the little window on the right arm of the instrument — this reading is the manufacturer's check for the original true adjustment of your particular instrument. Q. How may a range be determined when the range finder is not available? ■ A. Examine the object to which the range is to be found thru glasses and, basing an estimate on previous experience in INSTRUMENTS 181 estimating distances and heights, estimate its height in yards. Then, by holding the B. C. Ruler in a vertical position, or by using the mil scale in the glasses, determine the height of the object. Divide the number of yards of your estimate by the number of mils, and the result will be the value of a mil at that distance. Multiply by iooo and the range will be determined. Care in the estimation of the height of the ob- ject in question will lead to accurate results. Q. What is the purpose of an angle of deflection in the artillery service ? A. So that the gun may be pointed as accurately as possible at the target whether seen or not seen by the gunner. Q. What is an aiming point ? A. An aiming point is some sharply denned and easily recogniz- able object, or feature of the terrain, either in front or in rear of the guns, used for reference to secure accuracy of fire. The farther an aiming point is from the guns the better it serves to increase accuracy of fire. Q. How is the aiming point used? A. The Battery commander, with his Detail, establishes his sta- tion at some point as near the guns as possible, from which he is able to observe both the target and the aiming point. By the use of the instruments — the B. C. Telescope or the Aiming Circle, he measures the angle (A) from aiming point (A. P.) to target (T) and corrects this by the proper difference for the same angle at the guns — which angle is then sent down as De- flection. The correction can be made most quickly by the Parallel Method as follows: lay zero of the instrument on a point as far from the A. P. as you are from the line joining the A. P. and the gun and on the same side of that line as your station, read around counter-clockwise to a point correspond- ing with T, which point will be as far from T as you are from the line joining T and the gun and on the same side of that line as your station. The reading will be the deflection and by means of the panoramic sights on the guns, the gunners are able to lay precisely the same angle on the same aiming point so as to point muzzles automatically on the target. Q. What are auxiliary aiming points? A. Points established by executive officer or chiefs of section for 182 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE individual guns so that accurate laying may be secured when all the guns cannot lay on the same distant aiming point. Q. What is parallax? A. Parallax is the angular difference in deflection for guns, the unit of measurement being the angle subtending an arc the chord of which is one platoon front (20 yards). Q. What is the angle of site? A. The angle of site is the vertical angle formed between a hori- zontal plane and a line from the gun to the target. Q. Why is it necessary to figure an angle of site? A. Because differences of elevation between guns and targets have practically the same effect as differences in range. In order, therefore, to fire accurately, it is necessary to determine the angle of site and use it in conjunction with the determined range to compute the gun range for the particular situation. HORSEMANSHIP By Capt. H. W. Banks and 2D Lt. E. J. Laing GROOMING Q. Why is grooming necessary? A. Because a horse throws off a great deal of waste matter through the pores of his skin, and if this is not removed from the surface of the body the skin clogs up and is unable to per- form its proper functions, and the horse becomes sick from not being able to get rid of the waste matter. The friction of the brush stimulates the circulation of the blood and makes the skin healthy. The brush should be applied vigorously, and frequently, during the grooming process, cleaned on the curry- comb. The currycomb may be used to loosen hard dirt and mud, but must not be used below the knees and hocks, or on any place where the bones or joints are near the surface. A thorough grooming acts in the same manner as a bath. A horse with a clean skin is less likely to get sores from the saddle and harness, than is one which has not been properly groomed. Q. Why is it necessary to clean the feet? A. Because manure and dirt collects in the clefts between the frog and the sole, where it rots and causes thrush or other foot diseases, if the foot is not cleaned regularly. In the course of cleaning a horse's feet, always inspect them to determine whether any of the shoes are loose, or the nails broken or twisted. If anything is wrong, the stable sergeant should be notified immediately, as a loose shoe will cause a great deal of trouble if not securely fastened as soon as it is located.. Q. If only a few minutes are given for grooming, what parts should receive particular attention? A. The feet, shoulders, back and cincha place. Q. What is the order for grooming by detail? A. To groom by detail the instructor causes the men to stand to 183 184 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE heel and commands: (i) By detail, (2) COMMENCE GROOMING. Clean and brush front legs from the knees down, rubbing under the fetlocks and around the coronets with the brush and hand; time, 2 minutes. (3) CHANGE. Same as at second co mmand, the hind legs from the 1 hocks down; time, 2 minutes. (4) CHANGE. On the near side, with curry comb and brush, groom neck, shoulder, arm, elbow, back, side, flank, loins, croup, and the hind leg to the hock; time, 4 minutes. (5) CHANGE. First on the near side, after finishing up on the off side, groom chest between the forelegs, the belly, and between the hind legs; time, 3 minutes. (6) CHANGE. Same as 4, on the off side; time, 4 minutes. (7) CHANGE. Brush head, ears, and throat; with the hand rub the throat and between the forks of the lower jaw r ; time, 1 minute. (8) CHANGE. Brush and lay forelock and mane;, time, 2 minutes. (9) CHANGE. Brush out the tail; time, 2 minutes. (10) CHANGE. With the grooming cloth, or with a damp cloth or sponge if the parts are foul, wipe out the eyes and nostrils; wipe the muzzle, dock, sheath, and up between the hind legs; time, 2 minutes, (n) CHANGE. Clean out the feet; time, 2 minutes. (12) CHANGE. Com- plete any unfinished work. (13) CEASE GROOMING. (14) STAND TO HEEL. Total time required for the horse, at least 24 minutes. To facilitate supervision, the men must be required to change promptly at the command. To judge the cleanliness of a horse, the hand may be passed the reverse way of the hair to get a view of the skin. When the points of the fingers are run firmly against the set of the coat, lines of gray are left on the coat of a dirty skin and the points of the skin are covered w r ith scurf. Between the branches of the under jaw, under the crownpiece of the halter, at the bends of the knees and hocks, under the belly and between the forelegs and thighs are the places usually neglected when the work is not thorough and which should be looked at when the horse is being inspected. Q. How should a horse be dried when he is wet and muddy? A. He should be thoroughly rubbed with a straw wisp and his hair laid flat with a brush. HORSEMANSHIP 185 Q. What are the characteristics of a horse that should be borne in mind in order to handle him properly? A. That he is an animal of small intelligence. That he has an excellent memory; that his education is based on the prin- ciple of certain movements being demanded in a definite manner; and his rewards for their proper performance given immediately. Q. When should a horse be punished? A. Immediately after he disobeys, or while he is in the act of disobeying. Punishment after the act has been committed and forgotten does more harm than not punishing him when the act is being performed. Q. What qualities make a good horseman? A. Patience, more than anything else. If you lose your temper with a horse and punish him while in the heat of anger, you are liable to ruin the results of all your previous efforts in training him. Under no condition should a horse be struck about the head. Q. How would you describe a good seat? A. Weight resting evenly on the buttocks, thighs in contact wdth the horse, legs from the knees down hanging easily. The body should be erect not inclined forward or backward, shoulders square, head up. The arms should hang naturally, with the elbows close to the sides, hands low with thumbs up and the backs of the hands turned out. The body should be without stiffness and an easy seat maintained by balance and friction rather than by a grip of the knees. The reins must never be used as a means of support. Q. Is lounging in the saddle permitted while riding at route order? A. Never. If the weight is unevenly distributed over the saddle, it may cause a sore back. A good seat makes it easier for the horse to carry the weight. Q. What do you mean by the aids? A. The means at the disposal of the rider for controlling the movements and gaits of his horse are his legs, reins, and weight. These are termed the aids. On suitable occasions the aids are assisted or emphasized by a proper use of the spurs, the whip, and the voice. According to their very na- ture, the legs are the driving, while the reins are the restrain- 186 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE ing aids. Both are effectively assisted by the weight of the rider. Of the two aids, the driving and restraining, the for- mer are overwhelmingly predominating. As the training of a horse or rider progresses, the aids must become more refined and less noticeable until the horse, without perceptible effort on the part of the rider, seems to obey the latter's thoughts alone. Any of the aids prescribed should be used intermittently, rather than by means of a steady pressure. The whip must be used to direct the off horse by light taps on the shoulders or haunches, to make him keep his place in the team. Q. What is the use of the reins? A. To control the forward movement of the horse and to direct the forehand, i.e., the part of the horse in front of the rider. The forehand is moved to either side by pressure of the rein against the neck and a slightly increased pull on the opposite rein. Q. How should the legs be used? A. The legs govern the movement of the haunches, i.e., the part of the horse behind the rider. The legs should act behind the girth, and always together. When the pressure of the legs is equal, it makes the horse move forward. When the right leg acts more strongly than the left, the haunches are moved to the left. The legs should tap the horse lightly and not apply a steady pressure. > Q. What is meant by keeping a horse up to the bit? A. It means keeping a light even pressure through the reins in contact with the horse's mouth. The movement of his head is taken up through the rider's fingers and wrists. Q. How is a horse kept up to the bit? A. By means of the legs. If the reins hang loose, it is an indica- tion that no control is being exercised over the forehand. If he leans heavily against the bit, the mouth is liable to become hardened and insensitive, thus making him hard to control. For the same reason, a steady pressure through the reins is to be discouraged. Contact with his mouth should be main- tained through successive tightening and loosening of the reins with the fingers and wrists. The reins should never be jerked. HORSEMANSHIP 187 Q. How should the spurs be used? A. Spurs are only used to increase the effect of the leg pressures. The spurs should be applied lightly after the legs have failed to execute the desired movement. Spurs are also used to punish the horse while he is disobeying — never afterward. Q. How is the horse gathered? A. By closing the legs lightly behind the girth and putting a slight pressure on the bit, without permitting the horse to move forward. Q. What is the object of gathering the horse? A. To get his legs under him and to concentrate his attention, so that he will move in the desired direction at the command. It is similar to calling a dismounted man to attention before executing a movement. The same thing must be done when- ever it is desired to increase or decrease the gait, or to change the direction of march. Q. How should a horse be halted? A. He should be gathered, the weight of the body thrown slightly backward, the legs closed and the pressure on the bit increased, meanwhile keeping his haunches straight through the aid of the legs. Q. How should a horse be backed? A. Gather him, increase the pressure on the bit, release the pres- sure on the bit after the first step has been taken and again increase it for the second step, etc., until the desired distance has been taken up. A steady pressure will confuse the horse so that he will not understand what is required. Haunches should be kept straight with the legs. Q. How is the snafHe bridle fitted? A. (a) The cheek straps are adjusted so that they are of even length and so that the snatfie rests easily in, but does not draw up the corners of the mouth. A mouthpiece that is too low strikes the tushes and makes them sore; one that is too high causes the horse discomfort and makes the corners of his mouth sore, (b) The browband is examined. If it is too short, it causes the sensitive skin at the base and back of the ears to be galled or cut by the crownpiece. If it is too high on the crownpiece, it causes the same trouble at the base and sides of the ears, (c) The throatlatch is buckled loosely, 188 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE HORSEMANSHIP 189 being only sufficiently tight to prevent the crownpiece from slipping over the horse's ears. Generally speaking, it should permit the entire flat of the hand to be inserted between it and the throat when the horse's head is reined in. A tight throatlatch interferes with the large blood vessels of the neck, with the gullet, and also with the windpipe, (d) The mane and forelock are carefully smoothed out under the crownpiece to avoid causing a sore at the poll and also to present a neat and tidy appearance. Q. How is the double bridle fitted? A. (a) The snaffle is fitted as described in the preceding para- graph, (b) A curb bit is selected with a mouthpiece of such length that the branches bear easily against the horse's lips. A narrow bit pinches the lips, while a wide one works about and bruises the lips and the bars. The mouthpiece is best examined for width by inspecting it from the underside of the lower jaw. (c) The cheek straps are adjusted so that the mouthpiece of the bit rests as near as possible opposite the chin groove, but touching neither the tushes nor the corners of the mouth. Generally speaking, the bit should rest about i inch above the tushes of horses and about 2 inches above Points of the Horse, 1. Lips. 18. Ribs, of barrel. 35. Pastern. 2. Muzzle. 19. Girth. 36. Coronet. 3. Face. 20. Loins. 37. Foot. 4. Forehead. 21. Croup. 38. Fetlock. 5. Eyebrows. 22. Tail. 39. Point of the hip. 6. Forelock. 23. Dock. 39a. Haunch. 7. Ears. 24. Flank. 40. Thigh. 8. Lower jaw. 25. Belly. 41. Stifle. 9. Cheek. 26. Sheath. 42. Buttock. 10. Nostril. 27. Testicles. 43. Gaskin. 11. Poll. 28. Point of shoulder. 44. Hock. 11a. Throat. 28a. Shoulder. 44a. Point of hock. 12. Parotid. 286. Arm. 45. Chestnut. 13. Neck. 29. Elbow. 46. Cannon. 13a. Mane. 30. Forearm. 47. Fetlock joint. 14. Jugular channel .31. Chestnut. 48. Fetlock. 15. Breast (front of 32. Knee. 49. Pastern. chest). 16. Withers. 33. Cannon. 50. Coronet. 17. Back. 34. Fetlock joint. 51. Foot. (Reproduced from The Army Horse in Acci dent and Disease.) 190 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the corner teeth of mares. It rides below the snaffle, (d) The curb chain is fastened outside and below the snaffle. It must be twisted to the right until it lies flat, and it should rest in the chin groove opposite the mouthpiece of the bit. If not properly adjusted, it will have a tendency to ride up and press upon the sharp bones of the lower jaw. The curb chain should be loose enough to admit the flat of two fingers between it and the chin groove when the branches of the bit are in line with the cheek straps. When brought to bear the branches of the curb bit should make an angle of about 45° with the line of the horse's mouth, (e) The throatlatch and brow band are fitted as directed in paragraph above. Q. How is the bridle removed? A. UNBRIDLE: Unbuckle the throatlatch. Grasp the mid- dle of the reins with the crownpiece in the right hand. Take hold of the bit or bits with the left hand. Carefully and gently slip the crownpiece over the ears, at the same time steadying the bits with the left hand so they will not roughly strike against the tushes or teeth. Straighten the reins out together and fold them over the crownpiece. Q. How is the horse blanket folded? A. The blanket, after being well shaken, will be folded into six thicknesses, as follows: Hold it well up by two adjacent cor- ners, the longer edges vertical; double it lengthwise, so the fold will come between the " U " and " S," the folded corner in the left hand; take the folded corner between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, thumb pointing to the left; slip the left hand down the folded edge two-thirds of its length and seize it with the thumb and second finger; raise the hands to the height of the shoulders, the blanket extended between them; bring the hands together, the double fold falling out- ward; pass the folded corner from the right hand into the left hand, between the thumb and forefinger, slip the second finger of the right hand between the folds, seize the double folded corner; turn the left, disengaged corner in and seize it with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the second finger of the right hand stretching and evening the folds; after evening the folds, grasp the corners and shake the blanket well in order to smooth the folds; raise the blanket and hold HORSEMANSHIP 191 the upper edge between the chin and breast; slip the hands down halfway, the first two fingers outside, the other fingers and thumb of each hand inside; seize the blanket with the thumbs and first two fingers, let the part under the chin fall forward; hold the blanket up, arms extended, even the lower edges; retake the middle points between the thumb and fore- finger and flirt the outside part over the right arm; the blan- ket is thus held before placing it on the horse. Q. How are the blanket and surcingle put on? A. The instructor commands : BLANKET. Approach the horse on the near side, with the blanket folded and held as just described; place it well forward on his back by tossing the part of the blanket over the right arm to the off side of the horse, still keeping hold of the middle points; slide the blanket once or twice from front to rear to smooth the hair, being careful to raise the blanket in bringing it forward; place the blanket with the forefinger of the left hand on the withers and the fore- finger of the right hand on the backbone, the blanket smooth; it should then be well forward with the edges on the left side; remove the locks of mane that may be under it; pass the buckle end of the surcingle over the middle of the blanket and buckle it on the near side, a little below the edge of the blanket. Q. How is the saddle put on? A. For instruction, the saddle may be placed 4 yards in rear or in front of the horse. The stirrups are crossed over the seat, the right stirrup uppermost; then the cincha and cincha strap are crossed above the stirrups, the strap uppermost. The blan- ket, without the surcingle, having been placed as previously explained, the instructor commands: SADDLE. Seize the pommel of the saddle with the left hand and the cantle with the right; approach the horse on the near side from the direction of the croup and place the center of the saddle on the middle of the horse's back, the front ends of the side bars about three ringer widths behind the points of the shoulder blades; let down the cincha strap and cincha; pass to the off side, adjust the cincha and straps and see that the blanket is smooth; return to the near side, run the left hand, back up, down the withers so as to raise the blanket slightly 192 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE under the pommel arch, in order that the withers may not be pinched or pressed upon; take the cincha strap in the right hand, reach under the horse and seize the cincha ring with the left hand, pass the end of the strap between the ring and safe and thru the ring, then up thru the upper ring from the outside; if necessary, make another fold in the same manner. The strap is fastened as follows: Pass the end thru the upper ring to the front; seize it with the left hand, place the fingers of the right hand between the outside folds of the strap; pull slowly from the horse with the right hand and take up the slack with the left; cross the strap over the folds, pass the end of it, with the right hand, underneath and thru the upper ring back to the folds, then down and under the loop that crosses the folds and draw it tightly; secure the end of the strap. Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as follows: Pass the end thru the upper ring to the rear; seize it with the right hand, place the fingers of the left between the outer folds of the strap; pull slowly from the horse with the left hand and take up the slack with the right; pass the end of the strap underneath and draw it thru the upper ring until a loop is formed; double the loose end of the strap and push it thru the loop and draw the loop taut. The free end should then be long enough conveniently to seize with the hand. Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right stirrup, then the left. The surcingle, if used, is then buckled over the saddle, and should be a little looser than the cincha. A. In saddling a horse the cincha must be tightened gradually, and not with violence, a practice that if persisted in renders a horse ill tempered and mean in saddling. Q. How is the saddle removed? A. UNSADDLE. — Stand on the near side of the horse; unbuckle and remove the surcingle; cross the left stirrup over the sad- dle; loosen the cincha strap and let down the cincha; pass to the off side, cross the right stirrup, then the cincha over the saddle; pass to the near side, cross the cincha strap over the HORSEMANSHIP 193 saddle; grasp the pommel with the left-hand, the cantle with the right, remove the saddle over the croup and place it in front or in the rear of the horse as may be directed, pommel to the front; if in the stable, place the saddle on its peg; grasp the blanket at the withers with the left hand and at the loin with the right; remove it in the direction of the croup, the edges falling together, wet side in, and place it across the saddle, folded edge on the pommel. FITTING THE SADDLE Great care must be taken in the fitting and adjustment of saddles, to prevent sore backs. Q. What are some axioms in saddle fitting? A. There are six axioms in saddle fitting: i. The withers must not be pinched nor pressed upon. 2. The central line of the back must have no pressure put upon it. 3. The shoulder blades must have full and unhampered movement. 4. The loins must not carry weight. 5. The weight must be put upon the ribs thru the medium of the muscles covering them. 6. The weight must be evenly distributed over a surface which extends from the play of the shoulders to the last true rib. Q. How do you proceed in fitting a saddle? A. (a) The saddle, without blanket, is placed in its proper posi- tion on the back. It is noted whether the upper or lower edges or the front or rear of the side bars gouge into the back at any place. If this occurs or if the saddle when lifted from the back a distance corresponding to the thick- ness of the blanket otherwise fails perceptibly to conform to the outlines of the back, the test and remedy described under (e) should be made and applied. (b) The existence of wither pressure is determined by blanket- ing and saddling the horse and placing an assistant in the saddle. The hand is run over the top and along both sides of the withers beneath the blanket. To make the test effect- ive the man in the saddle should lean forward, and the exam- 13 194 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE iner should not be satisfied with anything less than the intro- duction of his entire hand. (c) It is noted that the central line of the back and also that the loins bear no weight even when the assistant in the saddle leans to the front, rear, or either side. (d) To determine if the blade bones have unhampered move- ment, the hand is passed underneath the blanket from the front until the play of the shoulder blade can be felt. The fore leg is raised and advanced to its full extent to the front by an assistant while the hand is in this position. If this can be done while the man in the saddle is leaning for- ward without pinching the fingers between the side bars and the shoulder blade, the fit in this respect is satisfactory. The test should be made on both shoulders. If the fingers are pinched, the blade bones will also be pinched and the action of the horse restricted. To correct the difficulty the saddle must be raised, assuming that it is at the proper place on the back, by placing under it a greater thickness of blanket or by attaching pieces of felt under the side bars. (e) To ascertain whether the pressure of the side bars is evenly distributed the saddle is ridden in for half an hour or more. On completion of the ride the saddle is carefully ungirthed and lifted from the blanket without disturbing the latter in any way. The blanket will be found to bear the imprint of the side bars, and an examination of this depression will show at a glance whether the bars press evenly from top to bottom and from front to rear. This examination must be made quickly as the elasticity of the blanket soon causes it to lose the impression of the side bars. Any irregularity in the fit of the side bars may be remedied by the introduction of pieces of felt to fill up the spaces between the side bars and the blan- ket. With very little practice these pieces of felt may be cut to the required shape and thickness with a very sharp knife. Some edges will need to be as thin as a knife edge; other parts may require the addition of more than one thickness. After determining where these pieces of felt are to rest they are attached to the side bars with glue and bound in place by sheepskin tacked to the side bars. The most radical altera- tions in the fit of the side bars can in this manner be affected. HORSEMANSHIP 195 The method is simple and quick and can easily be performed by the average battery saddler. (/) The cincha should be sufficiently tight to keep the saddle in its place and no tighter. Generally speaking, correct cinching has been obtained when the flat of the hand is easily admitted under the quarter ring safe. With most horses, after exercising for a while, the cincha will be found too loose, and should be taken up. A tight cincha restricts the animal's breathing and also brings too much pressure upon and strangles the tissues. Especially is this apt to be the case under the quarter and cincha ring safes, where strangulation soon causes lumps, puffs, and sores. (g) Care is taken that the quarter straps are so adjusted and the cincha so selected that the cincha ring safe will be a suffi- cient distance from the quarter ring safe to avoid pinching and galling the skin between them. Q. How is the double bridle put on? A. BRIDLE. — Take the double reins in the right hand, the crownpiece in the left; approach the horse on the near side; slip the reins over his head, letting them rest on his neck; take the crownpiece in the right hand and the lower left branch of the curb bit in the left, the forefinger against the mouthpiece; bring the crownpiece in front of and slightly below its proper position; insert the left thumb into the left side of the mouth above the tush; press upon the lower jaw, insert both bits by raising the crownpiece, then with the left hand draw the ears gently under the crownpiece, beginning with the left ear arrange the forelock, secure the throat latch and the curb chain, taking care to adjust them properly. Q. How is the bridle with the snaffle bit only, put on? The bridle with snaffle bit only, used on team horses, is put on in a similar manner. Q. What should you know about curb bits? A. A bridle with curb bit only is not permitted to be used on the horses of individually mounted men, because the curb when used alone is a powerful instrument requiring such dexterity in its use that only an expert horseman on a perfectly trained horse is capable of using it with sufficient delicacy 196 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE and discretion to obtain perfect control without injuring the horse. Q. How should the snaffle reins be held? A. If in both hands, the backs of the hands should be turned out, thumbs up, the reins coming into the hands under the little fingers .and held in place with the thumbs, the bight of the reins falling to the right. If in the left hand, the left rein should be held under the little finger and the right rein over the little finger, the bight held with the thumb and falling to the right. Q. How should the reins of the double bridle be held? A. The left snaffle rein should be held under the little finger, left curb rein above the little finger, right curb rein below the mid- dle finger, right snaffle rein above the middle finger; i.e., the curb rein in the middle, with the snaffle rein on the outside... The bights of the reins come out under the thumb and fall to the right. The right hand is used to adjust the length of the reins. Ordinarily the curb rein should be looser than the snaffle reins. POSTING Q. What is the advantage of posting? Explain how it is executed. A. Posting, or rising to the trot, greatly diminishes the concus- sion produced by the rider's weight on the back and joints of the horse. It also makes breathing easier and facilitates the impulsion from the engagement of the hind feet. It is also less fatiguing to the rider than sitting down to the trot. It is executed as follows: The horse moving at a trot, the rider inclines the upper part of his body forward, then sup- porting himself on the stirrups while maintaining the grip of the knees, he rises under the impulsion of the horse, maintain- ing his position detached from the saddle while the succeeding impulse is produced, again sits down in the saddle shoving his buttocks forward in doing so, and continues in this way, always avoiding every other impulse. At the beginning the mechanism of posting is made easier to the rider by causing him to stroke the horse's neck or to grasp HORSEMANSHIP 197 a lock of the mane or the pommel with either hand, thus deter- mining the forward inclination of the body. Its proper execution requires that the seat shall be raised moderately; that contact with the saddle shall be resumed gently and without shock; that the full support of the stirrup is obtained, while keeping the lower leg steady; that the ankle joint shall be supple; and that the heel shall be kept lower than the toe. Above all, the rider must be supple in the loins and convex them backward. CHANGING THE DIAGONAL IN POSTING Q. What is meant by changing the Diagonal? A. In posting the rider is said to post on the right diagonal when after rising he sits down in the saddle at the instant the right fore foot comes to the ground. It is important to instruct the rider to post for a time on one diagonal and then change to the other, so that the horse's legs will each perform the same amount of work and the chance of injury from the equipment will be reduced. In the riding school the rider should always rise on the inside hind foot, because this foot, in response to the inner leg aid, is the only one that can properly place itself under the mass of the horse and support the weight during the change of direction in the corners; hence to insure automatically that the posting is done as much on one diagonal as on the other, the riders may be required to post on the left diagonal when riding to the right hand on the track and on the right diagonal when riding to the left. The instructor occasionally requires each rider to inform him on which diagonal he is posting. To teach the rider to change the diagonal the instructor directs him to diminish the weight borne on the stirrups and to retain his seat in the saddle for two successive beats of the horse's feet instead of one, and then to rise as before. The rider will thus find himself posting on the diagonal opposite to the one on which he was posting before. 198 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE SUPPLING EXERCISES Flexion of the Loins Q. What are some of the principal suppling exercises? A. BEND TO THE RIGHT (LEFT). The rider, without de- ranging his seat, legs, or the position of his hands, slowly in- clines his body to the right by bending at the loins. The head, shoulders, and arms conform to the movement of the trunk. He returns slowly to the initial position. This exercise can profitably be used to combat general con- traction, stiff back, stiffness in the loins. STROKE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK. The rider sits down in the saddle by pushing the buttocks forward; turns the body at the loins, and leaning backward but not to the side, places the right hand as low as possible on the horse's flank. To combat general contraction, stiff back, leaning forward, letting buttocks rise and go too far to the rear, riding on crotch, legs sticking too far to the front, stiffness in the loins. i. RIGHT (LEFT) HAND ON CANTLE; 2. LEAN BACK. The rider places the palm of the indicated hand on the cantle of his saddle so that the arm rests against his body at or below the loins. He pushes his legs and knees well down and elevates his toes. Without deranging the position of his legs or thighs, and without pulling on the reins, he slowly leans to the rear as far as he can, touching the croup of the horse if possible, with his head, which is well thrown back. He returns slowly to the initial position. Executed only at the halt or the walk. To combat general contraction, stiff back, thighs carried too high, legs pushed too far to front. It is also the best exercise for suppling the muscles of the groin. This exercise should not be used until the position of the buttocks and thighs has been fairly well established by other simple flexions. Rotation of the Loins RIGHT (LEFT) HAND STROKE LEFT (RIGHT) HAUNCH. The rider turns to the left at the loins, being careful not to de- range the seat or the position of the other hand or of the thighs, and strokes the left haunch with the right hand. He avoids HORSEMANSHIP 199 opening out the other elbow or pulling on the reins. He turns his head, but is careful to keep it erect. To combat general contraction, stiff back, unsteady hands, or involuntary movement of the rein hand. Strengthening the Thighs GRIP HORSE WITH THIGHS AND RELAX. The rider without deranging seat, body, legs, or arms, squeezes his thighs together as though he wished to crush the horse be- tween them. To combat loose, wobbly, insecure seat insufficient strength in the leg muscles. Rotation of the Arms ROTATE RIGHT (LEFT) ARM VERTICALLY: The rider takes a deep breath while extending his arm upward to its full extent, where he pauses a moment, and then describes slowly, with uniform movement, large vertical circles from front to rear and from below upward, exhaling and keeping the head erect and high while the arm is descending. v To combat general contraction, stiffness in the shoulders, con- traction in the arms, depressed chest, round shoulders. This exercise is especially valuable for giving the upper body a proper poise and posture upon the hips and for opening the chest and shoulders. ROTATE RIGHT (LEFT) ARM HORIZONTALLY: The rider extends his arm forward, palm up, and describes slowly, with uniform movement, large horizontal arcs from front to rear and back to the front, constantly keeping his eye upon the palm of the hand. The seat and thighs must remain fixed, the upper body rotating at the loins. The other hand must remain in place. The rider avoids opening out the other elbow or pulling on the reins. To combat general contraction, stiffness in the shoulders and in the loins, contractions in the arms. Properly executed this exercise becomes at once the simplest and one of the best means of acquiring balance. To be exe- cuted properly the rider must constantly keep his eyes upon 200 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the palm of the hand. Its most important use is during jumping to overcome the involuntary contractions and move- ments usually shown by the beginner. The exercise should be begun before the obstacle is reached, continued throughout the jump and until at least 30 yards beyond the obstacle. Carrying the Head TURN HEAD RIGHT AND LEFT: The rider sits erect on his horse with his head up and eyes* sweeping the horizon. While in this position and without deranging any other part of his body he slowly turns his head as far as he can first to the right, then to the left. To combat leaning to the front and carrying the head and eyes too low. BEND HEAD FORWARD AND BACKWARD : The rider sits erect on his horse with his head up and eyes sweeping the horizon. While in this position and without deranging any other part of his body he throws the head up and back as far as he can, returning slowly to the initial position. To combat leaning to the front and carrying the head and eyes too low. Rotation of the Thighs ROTATE RIGHT (LEFT) THIGH: The rider carries the knee outward from the saddle, then moves it to the rear, straightening the leg, toes slightly elevated, heels depressed; he then turns the knee in as much as possible and replaces the thigh flat upon the saddle. All muscles are then relaxed and the leg and foot are permitted to hang naturally. To combat general contraction, leaning to the rear with thighs rising to the front, rolling the thighs away from the saddle and holding on with the calves, toes turned out too much, knees bent too much, daylight under knees. Flexion of the Thighs 1. HANDS ON POMMEL, 2. RAISE RIGHT (LEFT) THIGH AND KICK TO THE REAR: The rider places both hands on the pommel and draws himself forward and into HORSEMANSHIP 201 the bottom of his saddle. He raises the thigh to the front and slightly away from the horse's side, then with toe raised, heel well pushed down, he kicks to the rear as if to strike between the horse's hind legs; he straightens the entire leg in the direction of the horse's hock. He slowly brings the flat of the thigh to its position against the saddle. To combat general contraction, leaning to the rear with thighs rising to the front, rolling the thighs away from the saddle and holding on with the calves, toes turned out too much, knees too high, daylight under knees. RATES OF SPEED Three gaits are recognized in military equitation, drill, and maneuver, as follows : The walk, trot, and gallop. These, how- ever, are subject to different rates of speed. Those usually considered are as follows: Slow walk : 2^ to 3 miles per hour, 66 to 88 yards per minute. Walk (regulation) : 4 miles per hour, 118 yards per minute. Walk out: 4 to 5 miles per hour, 118 to 147 yards per minute. Slow trot (a jog trot): 6 to 6% miles per hour, 176 to 190 yards per minute. Trot (regulation) : 8 miles per hour, 235 yards per minute. Trot out: 10 miles per hour, 295 yards per minute. Extended trot: 12 miles per hour, 352 yards per minute. Slow gallop: 9 to 10 miles per hour, 265 to 295 yards per minute. Gallop (regulation): 12 miles per hour, 352 yards per minute. Extended gallop: 16 miles per hour, 470 yards per minute. Q. What information should you possess concerning the feeding of horses? A. Three principles should be adhered to in feeding: 1. Water a thirsty horse before feeding him. 2. Feed in small quantities and often. 3. Do not work a horse hard immediately after a full feed. The water which a horse drinks passes almost immediately from his stomach intp the small intestines and thence, in the course of a few minutes, to the caecum or blind gut, which is the reservoir from which it is absorbed and used by the horse as needed. To water a thirsty horse immediately after 202 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE he has eaten causes a considerable portion of the contents of his stomach to be carried with the water into the intestines. As a consequence digestion is incomplete, there is avoidable loss of nourishment, and indigestion or colic may result. The digestive organs of the horse are arranged to admit of leisurely feeding for long periods at a time. Thus a horse will graze 22 out of 24 hours. The fact that the stomach of a horse is small, the capacity of the functional stomach being only about 1% gallons, points to the necessity for frequent feeding in small quantities. The intestines, on the other hand, are very large and require a considerable bulk of forage to fill them. If bulk is withheld, horses will eat quantities of earth or sand or otherwise become depraved in appetite to fill up the void. A horse will not thrive if bulk of forage in the form of hay or other good roughage is not supplied him, even if highly nutritive food is given in abundant quantities. A horse requires, roughly, about 2% pounds of provender daily for each 100 pounds of live weight; that is, about 25 pounds for a 1000-pound horse. Of this amount the propor- tion of grain to hay should depend upon the severity of his work. When the work is very light one-third of the allow- ance should be grain and two-thirds hay; when the work is very heavy two-thirds should be grain and one-third hay. The proportion varies between these limits according to the amount of work the horse is doing. The daily allowance of oats, barley, or corn is 12 pounds, and of hay 14 pounds for each light artillery horse. It is 14 pounds of grain and 17 pounds of hay for each field artillery horse of the heavy draft type weighing 1300 pounds or more. Substitutions of hay for grain or grain for hay are authorized, so that in garrison the horses of an organization may at all times be properly fed in accordance with the severity of their work. The best substitute for the slow, continuous feeding natural to the horse is regular and frequent feeding. The value of regularity is abundantly proven by experience. The diges- tive organs become organs of habit, and perform their func- tions best if called upon to work at fixed and regular times. If not limited by other important considerations, five feeds HORSEMANSHIP 203 daily would be better than three, the first one being not later than 6 a. m. and the last at n p. m., the other three so that the intervals between feeds are as nearly equal as the work may permit. In the service such frequent feeding is impracticable. Artillery horses should be fed at least three times a day, at reveille, in the middle of the day, and at night. Ordinarily one-third of the grain ration is fed each time. Hay, if the horses are at work, is not fed in the morning, but about one- third of the ration should be fed at noon and the remainder at night. Immediately after a full feed the stomach and bowels are distended. If hard work is given at once they press against the lungs and impede their power of expansion, thus leading to blowing and distress. Fast work should therefore be avoided after a full feed. Moreover, though such work rarely results in colic, it interferes with digestion to such an extent that looseness of the bowels occurs and the food passes thru undigested and is wasted. Food remains in the stomach about one and one-half hours. Fast or heavy work should therefore be deferred for from one and one-half to two hours after a full feed. A bran mash acts as a mild laxative and should be fed once or twice a week to stabled horses. A little dry bran mixed with the oats is of value in compelling more thorough mastication and prevents greedy animals from bolting their grain. In spring or early summer the animals should be grazed daily when practicable. A lump of salt should be kept in each manger. Before feeding hay it should be thoroughly shaken out with a fork so as to get rid of dust and seed; it is also advisable to moisten the hay before giving it to the horse. The grain, if possible, should be run over wire screens or allowed to fall thru the air to remove dust. It is advisable to feed at least a portion of the allowance of hay before feeding the grain. Grain should never be fed or placed in the mangers until it is certain that the horses are thoroughly cool. In the morning horses are usually fed at or before reveille. The noon feed of hay is usually placed in the mangers while 204 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the organization is at drill, but the grain is not fed until the horses are thoroughly cool. The evening feed is placed in the mangers after the stables have been thoroughly policed for the night. All horses do not require the same amount of forage; the amount given each horse must be based, therefore, upon his individual requirements. When forage cannot be obtained, grazing should be re- quired at every spare moment, especially early in the morning when dew is on the grass, but not if it is covered with frost. All forage should be inspected by the lieutenant in charge to see that it is up to weight and contract specifications. A for- age book, showing daily entries of all forage drawn, fed, and remaining on hand, together with the number of the public and private animals fed, will be kept by the stable sergeant and checked daily by the lieutenant in charge. All officers should be familiar with the characteristics of good forage and the manner in which it is commercially graded for contract specifications. To obtain this knowledge, officers should be encouraged to visit large commercial stables. Barley possesses a husk so tough and indigestible that it should always be crushed before being fed, else a very great part of its nutrient value is lost. Sudden changes in food are to be avoided. The digestive organs are frequently unable to accommodate themselves to a sudden change and scouring, constipation, or colic may result. If sudden changes become necessary, the ration of the new feed should be greatly reduced and then increased gradually to the full requirements. Good oats weigh about 40 pounds to the bushel; barley about 48 pounds; corn about 56 pounds. Pressed hay weighs about n pounds per cubic foot. The standard bushel in the United States contains 2150.4 cubic inches. A cubic yard contains 21.69 bushels. A box 16 by 16.8 by 8 inches holds 1 bushel; a box 12 by 11. 2 by 8 inches holds half a bushel; a box 8 by 8 by 8.4 inches holds 1 peck; a box 8 by 8 by 4.2 inches holds one-half peck or 4 quarts. HORSEMANSHIP 205 Q. What information should you possess concerning the watering of horses? A. Except when they are heated it is desirable that horses should have free access to water at all times. It is always best to water a horse so frequently that he will never be unduly thirsty. As frequent watering, however, is usually impossible it becomes necessary to water at stated times. Horses should, if possible, be watered before feeding, or not until two hours after feeding. As horses rarely drink in the early morning, the watering must follow the feeding, but after the proper interval, if practicable. A horse requires from 5 to 15 gallons of water daily; de- pending upon the temperature and upon the work he is doing. Except in very cold weather horses should be watered at least three times daily — in the morning, before the noon feed- ing, and before the evening feeding. In warm weather, water drawn from a cold well or spring should be allowed to stand long enough for the chill to pass, off before the horse is allowed to drink. A horse should be allowed ample time to drink his fill and not be led away the first time he raises his head from the water. This must be carefully explained to the untrained man who thinks, because a horse puts up his head to get his wind after his first fill, that he has finished. Horses are al- ways led or ridden to and from water at a walk. MEANS OF CONTROL Q. What is the underlying principle in controlling a horse? A. To make the horse believe at all times that you are his master, as well as his protector. Q. How is this accomplished? A. By the use of various mechanical means of restraint and punishment when he disobeys, and by rewarding him when he does obey. Q. What is the form of restraint known as the "loop twitch?" A. It is simply the use of a rope with a pulley or loop on one end applied to the horse's head by holding the loop opposite the left eye, rope extending upward and over the poll, down the 206 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE right side of the face, thru the mouth, up the left side of the face, thru the loop and then down to the hand. Q. What advantage does it have over the "nose twitch" and how is it used? A. It is much more easily applied to nervous horses; it permits instant punishment on the slightest provocation; and allows the punishment to be discontinued immediately, thus elimi- nating the danger of doing injury to the horse. It may be used singly or in conjunction with other means of restraint. By jerking on the end of the rope considerable pain is caused, and by relaxing the pressure when the horse executes the de- sired movement properly he is made to understand that he must obey. Q. Name some instances when it may be used? A. It may be used when a horse refuses to pick up his feet, when he kicks, refuses to stand still, balks, when he refuses to be harnessed, to correct practically all minor vices and to per- form minor operations. Q. Describe the application of one form of war bridle. A. Make a loop in the end of a % 6 -inch rope (preferable sash cord) large enough to easily slip over the horse's lower jaw; carry the rope up the right side of the head, over the poll, down the left side, opposite the left eye and grasp the rope at this point. Holding the rope in this position, carry it up and alongside the descending rope, over the poll from left to right, down the right side of the face, above the upper teeth, but under the upper lip, up the left side of the face thru the loop formed when the rope was returned to a point just opposite the horse's left eye, pass the free end of the rope thru the loop, carry it down and pass it thru the first loop placed around the lower jaw, take up any slack which may have formed in any part of the bridle. By jerking on the free end of the rope when the horse disobeys, he may easily and quickly be punished. Q. How should one handle a horse that is a "halter puller" or one that throws his head into the air so as to make it difficult or impossible to handle him? A. Tie a loop on one end of a %-inch rope, swing the loop over the horse's back and across his loins, reach under his belly HORSEMANSHIP 207 and grasp the loop, pass the free end- of the rope thru the loop, forming a sliding noose about his body; pass the rope between his front legs, thru the ring of his halter and tie to a strong post. Approach him from the front. If he steps back the noose will tighten about his body. In the event that he still refuses to come forward, force him farther to the rear by pulling on his halter or by waving a coat in front of him, being careful meanwhile not to hurt him in any way with the coat. Persist in this treatment until the horse no longer jerks back. O How should one handle a horse who refuses to permit shoeing, or one that will not allow cleaning of his feet? A. Tie as above described and apply a "loop twitch" or "war bridle." Put a hobble on one of the front feet; attach a rope to the hobble and throw the free end over his withers to be held by an assistant. Take the end of the twitch in your left hand, pressing the body against his left shoulder, with your right hand grasp the rope opposite his knee and try to lift his foot. If he refuses to raise his foot, jerk on the twitch until he does. After it is raised, the assistant holds it up from the other side. If the horse sinks on one knee punish him with the twitch until he stands quietly. Adjustment for the back foot is very much the same. Place a hobble on the hind foot, take the twitch in one hand and the rope attached to the hobble in the other and pull the foot for- ward and upward. To get the hind foot back, tie a rope to his tail, pass the free end thru the ring and carry the rope back to several assistants; pull his foot off the ground and up, waiting until he ceases to fight and then pick up in the ordinary manner. Q. How should a horse that balks be treated? A. First try to ascertain the reason for his balking and, if possible, remove the cause. A tight fitting, or choking collar, a stone lodged in his hoof, or anything that tends to make him un- comfortable might be the cause of his balking. If his actions are found to be, after a thoro examination, the result of stubbornness, do not continue to beat him. Tie a rope about his neck in such manner that the knot will not slip, pass the rope thru his mouth, down and under his lower 208 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE jaw, between the rope coming from his neck and under his lower jaw. Then stand back opposite his girth and have the driver give the command to move forward. If the horse refuses, he should again repeat the command and punish the horse in the rear with the whip and the spurs, at the same time the assistant holding the end of the rope should run forward and slightly to one side, giving the rope a quick jerk as he does so. It is important that the command to move, the punishment from the rear and the jerk from the front occur all at the same time. Repeat the punishment until the horse moves as desired. This treatment is of value in correcting horses that refuse to move from the picket line. Q. How may a safe, quick acting bridle be made from a halter rope? A. Double a rope, drop the center of it over the poll, allowing the single ends to drop down each side of the head, pass the rope on the left side of the head thru the mouth to the right side and the rope on the right side thru the mouth to the left side, crossing the ropes in the mouth, carry the ends back and tie over the withers. Q. What points should be noted in an inspection of shoeing? A. The following examination should be made while the horse is standing on a level floor with the foot on the ground: (a) Are the axes correct when viewed from the front and from the side? (b) Does the shoe follow the outer line of the wall to the last nail hole and from there extend outward, allowing about y% inch at the heel for expansion? Has the rule against rasping the hoof to fit the shoe been violated? (c) Is the toe clip in the center properly made and properly seated? (d) Are the nails driven at the proper height and proper distance apart? Have any old stubs been left in the wall? (e) Are the clinches well turned and set in, of the proper size, and have they been smoothed off but not rasped sufficiently to weaken them? The foot should be raised and the examination continued. (/) Is the shoe of the proper size and weight; the last nail hole back of the bend of the quarter? (g) Has enough horn been removed? Has too much been removed? Is the foot level? (J) Does the shoe rest evenly on the wall, covering the buttresses, and show- HORSEMANSHIP 209 ing no air space at any point? (i) Is the shoe properly concaved so as to avoid pressure on the sole? (i) Has the knife been used on the bars, sole, or frog? (k) Are the nails well seated and of the proper size? (/) Are the heels of the shoe correct in width and thickness and are they prop- erly rounded without sharp edges or points? Is their length even with the bulb of the frog? 14 THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES Q. What would lead you to think a horse is sick? A. When a horse by his actions or attitude appears to be abnor- mal, as revealed by a systematic examination, carried out ac- cording to the " Table of Examination/' which shows that any organ, set of organs, or his body as a whole is not func- tionating properly, he is known to be sick. Q. How should a horse be drenched? A. Have an assistant to hold the horse's head fairly high, insert bottle in the side of mouth, and pour in a mouthful of medi- cine at a time, allowing the animal to swallow each mouthful before pouring in another. If difficulty is experienced in get- ting the horse to swallow, insert finger between the bars and rub the roof of the mouth, or press the nostrils together, excluding all air, until he swallows ; if neither of these methods serve the purpose a tablespoonful of cold water poured into the nostril will often force the animal to swallow. Medicine must not at any time be administered thru the nose. Q. What dangers are sometimes encountered in drenching? A. Care must at all times be exercised to prevent the breaking of the bottle in the horse's mouth. To alleviate this danger, a rubber flask, or a piece of rubber garden hose attached to the neck of a glass bottle, should be used. Another danger fre- quently experienced is choking, caused by the medicine pass- ing down the windpipe. This will cause the horse to cough violently, upon which immediately lower his head and allow him to fully recover before the further administration of medicine. Q. Name the things that are important in the care of sick animals. A. Furnish the animal with a roomy box stall, if at all available. If a box stall is unobtainable, improvise some means of shelter to protect him from cold or draughts. This shelter should be at a convenient place, but, if possible, quiet and removed from 210 THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 211 well or healthy horses, (b) Proper ventilating facilities should at all times be provided, (c) Stall should be kept free of manure, moisture and odors. Sufficient bedding should be furnished to tempt the horse to lie down, (d) Food should be given in small quantities at frequent intervals ; unconsumed food should be removed — excepting hay. To encourage the horse's appetite, he should be furnished with delicacies, such as turnips, apples, carrots, green grass, etc. Fresh water and salt should be within easy reach at all times. Q. How should a wound be treated? A. In case of a hemorrhage, if the flow of blood is profuse, it must be checked before proceeding with other treatment. In all cases, where possible, a tourniquet (rubber band or rope tightly applied between the wound and the heart to compress the blood vessels) should be applied. If the bleeding is from a large vessel, pick up the ruptured ends and tie off with a piece of thread or string. If unable to apply a tourniquet, apply pressure in the form of pads or bandages directly over the wound. Cold water or ice, iron heated to a cherry red, or astringent agents such as alum, copperas, etc., may be applied. After checking the hemorrhage, cleanse the wound and parts thoroughly with a weak antiseptic solution, such as creolin, bichloride of mercury, potassium permanganate; remove all threads or tissue; apply healing preparations such as 2 per cent creolin solution, boric acid, iodoform powder, etc.; apply bandage to part. Old wounds may be treated without bandaging, unless in a position where they might be injured. Simple abrasions, such as collar sores, saddle galls, etc., may be treated by antiseptic cleansing, after which they should be kept dry by the use of dusting powders and salves. Q. Give cause and treatment for scratches. A. Scratches are caused by improper cleansing of the fetlocks and pasterns and as a result of neglect to keep these parts dry. To treat, first wash with castile soap and water, dry, and apply an astringent powder, such as tannic acid, iodo- form, alum and boric acid, salves such as zinc oxide oint- ment, a mixture of equal parts of sulphur and vaseline, or paint with tincture of iodine. 212 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. How should a case of thrush be treated? A. Clean the foot and pare away the unhealthy portions of the frog, then apply burning drugs, such as alum, copperas or formalin. Q. How would you proceed in the case of a horse picking up a nail? A. If a veterinarian is near by, always leave the nail in the foot until he arrives, otherwise withdraw the nail carefully and allow the wound to bleed for a short time, then pare the hoof down around the nail hole making the cutting about the size of a quarter and until the hoof springs under the pressure of the finger, clean thoroughly with antiseptics and inject tincture of iodine or turpentine into the nail hole, pack the foot with gauze or cotton soaked in iodine or pine tar, adjust a bag or bandage to prevent foreign matter from coming in contact with the hole. Thereafter soak the foot daily in warm bichloride solution for an hour or more, then readjust the packing and bandages as described. Rest the animal until all traces of lameness disappear. Q. What is founder, and what measure should be taken imme- diately it is noticed? A. Founder or laminitis is an acute inflammation of the sensitive leaves or laminae directly underlying the horny hoof or foot box. Usually occurs in the front feet, but may affect all four. It may be caused by pounding of the feet on hard or uneven roads, or overexertion, digestive disturbances or in- judicious feeding and by sudden chilling, as from draught or drinking of large quantities of cold water when overheated. The animal stands with his hind feet well up under his belly, and refuses to move his fore feet. Early action should be taken to remedy this condition. The shoes should first be removed and the affected feet soaked in cold water for long periods. Give the animal epsom salt, one pound at a dose, dissolved in warm water. For the first twelve to eighteen hours withhold drinking water and grain. Q. What is meant by the "spraining" of a part? A. When a muscle or muscle fibres, a tendon or tendon fibres, a ligament joint or joint capsule, has been overstretched, over- tired, or perhaps torn, they are said to be sprained. THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 213 Q. What is the general treatment for sprains? A. Keep animal quiet. If swelling and inflammation are pro- nounced, apply cold to the part by means of running water or ice packs, for the first twenty-four hours, then apply warm applications, warm water bathings, alcohol or liniment rubs, or tincture of iodine where the swelling is not excessive, keep the part at rest by the use of bandages. Q. How should bruises be treated? A. Practically the same as sprains. If swollen, massage away from the center and the swelling will frequently disappear. Q. How should rope burns be treated? A. In the same manner as scratches. Cleanse the part thor- oughly with antiseptic solutions, such as weak dilution of creolin or bichloride; dry the part and apply healing remedies, such as zinc oxide ointment, equal parts of borax and char- coal, corn starch, tincture of iodine, etc. Q. What is considered to be a good drench for colic? A. A mixture of y% pint of turpentine, }i pint of aromatic spirits of ammonia and enough linseed or cottonseed oil to make a pint. Give as one dose. Q. What should be administered for a case of diarrhea? A. Put animal on half rations, but allow hay, give little water to drink. Give wheat flour and water, chalk, aromatic sul- phuric acid, }/i teaspoonful in one half pint of water, three times daily. Q. How may over-heating affect a horse? A. He becomes dull, weak and may stagger, his breathing be- comes more rapid, eyes may water and be slightly reddened, nostrils distended and perhaps of a reddish purple color, heart can be felt pounding on wall of chest, pulse full and fast, sweating is usually profuse, but in some rare cases this fea- ture may be absent and instead the animal be chilly, with a temperature lower than ioo°F. Q. How should an animal affected by the heat be treated? A. Immediately take him from the team, at the same time re- move all harness, get the animal in the shade and apply cold water or ice to the head, and make cold water injections into the rectum. Give mild stimulants, such as alcohol, nitre, aromatic spirits of ammonia. In the rare case mentioned, 214 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE where the animal is apparently chilly with a subnormal tem- perature, give stimulants, but do not apply cold in any form. Q. How should colds, bronchitis and pneumonia be treated? A. In all cases keep the animal in a well ventilated place, yet one that is free from draught. If throat is swollen, apply mild liniment. It is also well to encourage the appetite and keep bowels open. If animal is in great distress, apply mus- tard plaster or cloths soaked in warm water, turpentine to the region of the lungs and rub the limbs energetically with the hand. Q. What are the symptoms which indicate glanders? A. The horse having a prune-juice colored discharge from the nose should be held for examination for a veterinarian. For further confirmation of the existence of glanders the lining of the nose should be examined for ulcers or ulcers and whitish scars. The space between the branches of the lower jaw should also be examined for swellings, and the external body — particularly the limbs — should be gone over carefully to note any ulcers or running sores. Q. How should horses with glanders, or those appearing to have this disease, be handled? A. Isolate all suspicious cases at some place far removed from the healthy animals. Do not allow attendants to handle animals thought to be afflicted and the healthy animals at the same time. Attendants should be acquainted with the danger of the disease, both to humans and to animals. Veteri- narian should be consulted immediately for definite diagnosis and disposition. THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 215 HISTORY ATTITUDE AND GENERAL CONDITIONS Length of ownership CIRCULATORY SYSTEM TEMPERA- TURE Table of Examination ITime Place Kind of work (Kind Food and water ] Quantity [ Period of feeding Previous owner Previous work Method of transportation From part of country re- ceived Any other horses similarly affected . Treatment already given f Position of feet and legs Standing position j Position of head [ Position of back and tail [ Stretched out Lying position j Sitting [ Curled with nose in flank Fat or thin i Rough or slick Pliable or hide bound Dry or sweaty Painful Wild Sleepy Tense Relaxed [ Excitable Nervous system j Dull [ Coma [ Color Visible mucous membranes { Swollen [injured, etc. Pulse taken on jaw bone (33 to 38 per minute) Sounds of the heart Original circulation of various parts Fever Normal (99.5 to 101 deg. Fahrenheit) Subnormal Muscles 216 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM DIGESTIVE SYSTEM URINARY AND SEXUAL ORGANS Number of respiratory movements (Normal 8 to 16) Odor of breath Noise made in breathing Nasal discharge Cough Noise heard in lungs Appetite and manner of eating Mouth and teeth Throat I Tucked up Bloated [ Increase Noise produced by bowels j or ab- [ sence [Odor Excrement j Color [ Consistency Urine Manner of voiding External appearance Ordnance spoon = Ordnance tin cup DRY MEASURE i ounce of lead acetate % " " zinc sulphate 2 drams or Ji ounce of salts = % of a quart Full day's ration of medium oats =14 cups weight LIQUID MEASURE One drop = One minim, 60 to the dram. One teaspoonful = One fluid dram, 8 to the ounce. One tablespoonful = ^ fluid ounce. Tin cup = 28 ounces or % of a quart. THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 217 TO MAKE VARIOUS STRENGTHS OF SOLUTIONS 128 teaspoonfuls = 1 fluid pint 1 Y± " added to a pint of water equals a 1 per cent, solution. (To make other strength solutions use the 1 per cent, solution as a basis and multiply and divide for strength of solution desired, as follows: 5 X i}i or 6J4 teaspoonsful of liquid to a pint of water equals a 5 per cent, solu- tion.) VETERINARY MEDICINES ACETANILID. — Is a febrifuge and antiseptic. Used in- ternally to lower fever in doses of from 1 to 4 drams. Used externally as an antiseptic in the form of a dry dressing. ACID, ARSENIOUS (arsenic). — Is an irritant, corrosive poison, given internally in doses of from 1 to 6 grains as a digestive tonic, and for skin diseases, usually in combination with iron sulphate and gentian. Externally it is used to remove warts, in the form of an ointment, 1 part of arsenic to 8 or 10 of lard. ACID, BORACIC. — Action, antiseptic; a saturated solution is very useful in conjunctivitis. With oxide of zinc it makes a very nice dressing for abrasions, scratches, etc. ACID, CARBOLIC, — A valuable antiseptic and disinfectant. A 1 to 20 solution makes a very good wash for all wounds. A very good prescription for local use is the following: Carbolic acid, 6 drams. Glycerin, 1% ounces. Water to make 1 pint. ACID, SALICYLIC. — A useful antiseptic; a saturated solution of salicylic acid in alcohol is a good dressing for indolent sores and ulcers. Salicylic acid dusted upon a wound will remove the granulations of proud flesh. ACID, TANNIC. — An astringent and antiseptic. It is given internally in diarrhea and dysentery. Dose, 3o"grains to 1 dram. 218 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE The following prescription may be used: Acid, tannic, \^ to i dram. Opium, powdered, % to i dram. Make into one ball and repeat every two hours until the diar- rhea is checked. Tannic acid is an excellent remedy, used in the form of a saturated solution (with witch-hazel water), for hardening tender shoulders. ACONITE. — Is a dangerous poison and should not be used in- ternally, but locally. Mixed with other drugs it makes a good anodyne liniment. Aconite, 2 ounces. Alcohol, 5 ounces. Opium, tincture, 4 ounces. Witch-hazel, distilled, 5 ounces. Mix and apply several times daily. ALCOHOL. — Stimulant. Given for a weak heart in debili- tating diseased, such as lung troubles, etc. Dose, 2 to 4 ounces in 1 pint of water, and repeated every four to six hours, as required. It is useful in the formation of liniments. ALOES, BARBADOS.— Is the general purgative for the horse. Dose 6 to 8 drams. Aloes, Barbados, 6 to 8 drams. Ginger, 1 dram. Make into a ball and give upon an empty stomach. The "cathartic capsule/ ' to be supplied, will take the place of aloes. It will contain aloin, strychnine, ginger, and calomel. A purgative should never be given in diseases of the respiratory system. It generally takes about twenty-four hours to operate. ALUM. — Astringent. It is useful as a wash for sore mouths; used in the strength of % ounce to 1 quart of water. Ex- ternally it is a valuable remedy in the treatment of thrush. Burnt alum is useful for the removal of proud flesh. AMMONIA, AROMATIC SPIRITS OF.— Stimulant and carminative. A very useful remedy in the treatment of colics, and exhaustion. Dose, 1 to 3 ounces, well diluted. THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 219 AMMONIA, SOLUTION OF.— Used ' externally only, in combination with other drugs, as a stimulating liniment. Ammonia, solution of, i part. Turpentine, oil of, i part. Olive oil, 2 parts. To be well shaken before using. It is an excellent external application for sore throat, AMMONIA, CHLORIDE OF.— Used in all cases where an expectorant is indicated, such as diseases of the respiratory system. Dose, i to 4 drams. For catarrhal diseases it is usually combined with quinine and nitrate of potash, prepared in the following manner: Ammonia, chloride of, 3 ounces. Quinine sulphate, 6 drams. Nitrate of potash, 3 ounces. Make into twelve powders and give one every three or four hours. BELLADONNA, FLUID EXTRACT.— Antispasmodic and anodyne. Used in cases of colic in conjunction with other medicines. Dose, 1 to 2 drams. When applied to the eyes it dilates the pupil and soothes the irritated membrane. Generally used in combination with sulphate of zinc or boracic-acid solutions. A very useful wash for the treatment of conjunctivitis is made as follows: Sulphate of zinc, 20 grains. Belladonna, rid. ext., 1 dram. Water, 3% ounces. Apply twice a day. CAMPHOR, GUM.— Antispasmodic and antiseptic. Dose, 1 to 2 drams. A very good remedy for diarrhea is made as follows: Camphor, gum, 1 dram. Opium, powdered, 1 dram. Make into a ball; give, and repeat every two hours until relief is afforded. 220 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Externally it is useful for sprains, combined with other medi- cines, forming what is known as soap liniment. Castile soap, 10 parts. Camphor, 5 parts. Alcohol, 70 parts. Water, 15 parts. To be used externally as a mild, stimulating, anodyne liniment. A useful dressing for wounds is made of gum camphor, 8 ounces, carbolic acid, 3 ounces. This is especially valuable in fly time. CANNABIS, INDICA (Indian Hemp).— Antispasmodic and anodyne. Its main use is in colic, as it relieves pain without causing constipation. Dose, 2 to 4 drams. Cannabis, indica, 2 to 4 drams. Ammonia, aromatic spirits, 1 ounce. Water, 1 pint. Give at one dose and repeat in three-quarters of an hour if necessary. This is an excellent remedy for colic. CANTHARIDES, POWDERED (Spanish Fly).— Used only for its blistering effect. Prepare by rubbing the cantharides and cosmoline together (1 to 5 or 6) with a spatula or a piece of glass. CAPSICUM (cayenne pepper). — Stomachic and carminative. Given internally in combination with gentian and ginger in mild cases of indigestion attended with flatulency. Dose, K to 1 dram. CHARCOAL. — A mild antiseptic and deodorant. It is very good mixed with poultices, especially for wounds and sores that have a foul odor. It may be dusted on the surface of foul sores and will soon destroy the odor. Internally it is given in doses of 2 to 4 drams, and is useful in chronic indigestion and diarrhea. COPPER SULPHATE (blue vitriol, bluestone).— A caustic tonic, vermicide and astringent. Used principally as a caustic for thrush and canker. A good remedy for thrush or canker is equal parts of sulphate of copper (powdered), sulphate of zinc, THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 221 and sulphate of iron: "The Three Sulphates." This powder can be applied two or three times daily. Used also internally as a tonic in chronic nasal catarrh. Dose, i to 2 drams. COLLODION. — When painted over wounds it forms an air tight coating and in small wounds keeps the edges in a fixed position and promotes healing. Especially valuable when applied to punctured wounds of joints. CHLOROFORM. — Antispasmodic, stimulant, and anodyne. Useful in colics. Dose, 1 to 2 drams, well diluted. It may be added to anodyne liniments. When inhaled it acts as an anesthetic. COSMOLINE. — A by-product of petroleum. Used as a base for ointments. It is also valuable to apply upon the skin, when wound secretions are abundant to prevent dropping out of the hair. CREOLIN. — A nonpoisonous, nonirritating antiseptic and parasiticide. It is one of the best medicines that we have, not only as a valuable application for all wounds, but to destroy all parasites with which the animal may become infested. Used in solution or ointment in a strength of 1 to 50 or 1 to 20. For mange it is useful in a 1 to 10 solution. DIGITALIS, FLUID EXTRACT OF.— A very dangerous poison, and should not be administered internally. A valuable diuretic when applied over the kidneys and well rubbed in. ETHER, NITROUS, SPIRITS OF (sweet spirits of nitre).— Stimulant, antispasmodic, diuretic, and diaphoretic. Dose, 1 to 2 ounces. A very useful stimulant in all cases of weakness of the heart action. For its stimulating and antispasmodic actions it is given in colics combined with belladonna or cannabis indica. ETHER, SULPHURIC— Stimulant, antispasmodic, and car- minative. Dose, 1 to 3 ounces, well diluted. Combined with belladonna or cannabis indica its antispas- modic action is increased. FENUGREEK. — Aromatic and stomachic. Sometimes com- bined with tonics to disguise their odors. Dose, 1 ounce. FLAXSEED MEAL.— Used for poultices. GENTIAN. — Stomachic and bitter tonic. It improves the appetite and general tonic. Dose, H to 1 ounce. 222 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE GINGER. — Stomachic and carminative. Combined with purgatives it diminishes their tendency to gripe, and also some : what hastens their action. Dose, ^ to i ounce. GLYCERIN. — Used, as a base in the same manner as cosmo- line. Useful, combined with equal parts of iodine, in the treat- ment of grease. IODINE. — Given internally in diabetes insipidus. Dose, 20 grains to 1 dram, to be repeated three times daily until the quantity of urine is lessened. Best given when made into a ball with flaxseed meal. Externally it is used for the removal of swellings, curbs, enlarged tendons, etc. It is also a useful stimulant for indolent sores and ulcers. A good solution for external use is made as follows: Iodine, 1 ounce. Iodide of potassium, 3 ounces. Water, 1 pint. To be applied several times daily. Tincture of iodine is made of iodine, 1 ounce; alcohol, 1 pint. IODOFORM. — Antiseptic. Used externally as a dry dressing, either alone or combined with other drugs, such as boracic acid, acetanilid, etc. IRON, TINCTURE OF THE CHLORIDE OF.— A valuable tonic, building up the system and enriching the blood. Useful in purpura and in convalescence after all debilitating diseases. Dose, 1 to 2 ounces, well diluted. Used externally as an astringent and styptic in serious hemor- rhages. A small piece of cotton saturated with it and applied to the bleeding part is the proper mode of application. IRON, SULPHATE OF (Ferrisulphate).— Tonic and vermi- cide. It increases the appetite and builds up the system. Dose, % to 1 dram. Frequently combined with nux vomica, etc. LANOLIN* — Used as a base for ointments in the same manner as cosmoline. LEAD, ACETATE OF.— Astringent and a valuable remedy for relieving local pain. Used externally to cool and relieve sprains, inflamed tendons and joints, and to relieve itching skin diseases. THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 223 The white lotion is made as follows: Acetate of lead, i ounce. Sulphate of zinc, i ounce. Water, i quart. Shake well and apply several times daily. The lotion is a very valuable remedy for the relief of all external diseases accompanied by heat and swelling; also an excellent dressing for wounds. LEVEE, CHLORIDE OF.— This is the best disinfectant that we have. Four ounces to i gallon of water is the proper strength. This solution should be used as a wash for the disinfection of stables. A small portion of chloride of lime placed around in stables will destroy the odor arising from decomposed urine. LUNAR CAUSTIC— Used for the removal of warts and proud flesh. Four grains to i ounce of water make a good application for the removal of the cloudiness remaining after an attack of ophthalmia. MERCURY, BICHLORIDE OF.— (Corrosive sublimate, anti- septic tablets). — Dissolved in water this is the most energetic antiseptic; i to iooo solution is the proper strength to use in the treatment of all wounds. Two tablets to a quart of water give this strength; if the bichloride is in bulk, use 15 grains to a quart of water, and add 15 grains of chloride of ammonia to insure complete dissolution. * MERCURY, MILD CHLORIDE (calomel) .—Internally, a cholagogue. Dose, ^2 to 2 drams. It is not used alone, but is combined with aloes. Calomel, 1 dram. Barbados aloes, 4 drams. Ginger, 1 dram. Water to make a ball. Externally, antiseptic and drying. Used in the treatment of ulcers and thrush. MERCURY, BINIODIDE.— Used as a blister; its effects are very penetrating. Used principally in the treatment of spavins, splints, sidebones, ringbones, and all bony enlargements. 224 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Biniodide of mercury, i part. Cosmoline, 5 to 6 parts. Mix and rub together thoroughly. Apply with friction for at least ten minutes. NUX VOMICA, POWDERED.— A nerve stimulant and tonic. Dose, }4 to 1 dram. It is a very useful tonic in building up the tone of the system in convalescence from debilitating diseases and general lack of vitality. Generally given in combination with gentian, iron and other tonics. OIL, LINSEED.— Laxative (mild purgative). Dose, Y 2 to 1 quart. Do not use boiled oil. OIL, OLIVE. — Generally used as a vehicle in making liniments and oily solutions. OIL OF TAR (pine tar) . — Useful for plugging holes and cavi- ties in the hoof after all suppuration has ceased. OIL OF TURPENTINE.— Diuretic, stimulant, antispasmodic, vermicide, and expectorant. Dose, 1 to 3 ounces diluted with oil. Externally it is used in the formation of liniments (see Solution of Ammonia). OPIUM, TINCTURE OF (laudanum).— Anodyne, antispas- modic. Checks secretion of mucous membrane. On account of these properties it is a valuable remedy in diarrhea and dysen- tery. Very useful in the treatment of all abdominal pain where there are no symptoms of constipation, but as a rule belladonna and cannabis indica are preferable. Dose, 1 to 2 ounces. Externally, opium tincture is used to relieve pain of sprains and bruises. A very good lotion is made as follows: Opium tincture, 4 ounces. Acetate of lead, 2 ounces. Water to make 1 quart. Apply every few hours. OPIUM, POWDERED.— Not used externally. It is used in- ternally for the same purpose as the tincture. Dose, K to 2 drams. THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 225 POTASSIUM BROMIDE.— Nerve sedative. Dose, Y 2 to 2 ounces. In tetanus this medicine can be given in large doses. POTASSIUM NITRATE (saltpeter) .—Alterative, febrifuge, and diuretic. Dose, 1 to 4 drams. In the treatment of laminitis the dose is 2 to 4 ounces, repeated three times a day. Exter- nally it makes a good cooling lotion: Nitrate potassium (saltpeter), 5 ounces. Chloride of ammonia, 5 ounces. Water, 16 ounces. Mix and keep the affected parts saturated with this lotion Internally, saltpeter is the most excellent medicine in the treatment of catarrhal and febrile diseases. It is also useful in the treatment of swollen legs. POTASSIUM IODIDE.— Alterative, diuretic, and expecto- rant. Dose, 2 to 4 drams. It is given to promote absorption of enlargements, such as enlarged glands in lymphangitis, and in partial paralysis resulting from injury to the brain and spinal cord. For such purposes full doses are given twice a day for two weeks. POTASSIUM PERMANGANATE.— Antiseptic, disinfectant, and deodorant. Useful for the removal of foul odors arising from unhealthy wounds; also for cleansing hands and instruments. From 1 to 4 drams, water 1 pint, isJ:he proper strength of the solution for use. QUININE, SULPHATE OF.— Tonic, stomachic, antiseptic, and mild febrifuge. Dose, J^ to 1 dram, repeated three times a day. It is given in all febrile and debilitating diseases. Com- bined with sulphate of iron it is very useful in purpura. In influenza and pneumonia it is generally combined with gentian and nitrate of potash, made into powders in the following proportions: Quinine sulphate, 1 ounce. Gentian, 3 ounces. Make twelve powders and give three times a day. SALOL. — Antiseptic. Used internally and externally for its antiseptic properties. Dose, 2 to 4 drams. 15 226 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE SODIUM BICARBONATE.— Carminative, stomachic, re- lieves acidity of the stomach. Dose, i to 2 drams. This is an excellent medicine in chronic indigestion and flatulency. SULPHUR. — Parasiticide. This medicine may be used for the treatment of mange, but it is inferior to creolin or carbolic acid. WITCH-HAZEL. — A cooling astringent wash, very useful when combined with other mdiecines in the form of liniments or lotions. ZINC SULPHATE.— Externally it is much used as a caustic and astringent for wounds, foul ulcers, etc. It is an excellent remedy for the treatment of thrush and canker. Sulphate of zinc ] Sulphate of copper \ Equal parts. Sulphate of iron J ZINC OXIDE. — Antiseptic and astringent. Used either as a dry powder dusted on the wounds or can be made into an oint- ment with lanolin. Zinc oxide, 1 part. Lanolin, 6 parts. ZINC CHLORIDE. — An irritant and corrosive poison, never given internally. Externally it is applied as a stimulant, as- tringent, caustic and parasiticide. It is also used as an antisep- tic, disinfectant and deodorant. From 2 to 4 drams to the pint of water used for ordinary antiseptic purposes. DOSES Grouped according to amounts; for reference and for conven- ience is memorizing: GRAINS Arsenic 1 to 6. Iodine 20 to 60. DRAMS y 2 to 1 Capsicum; Iron sulphate; Nux vomica, powdered; Quinine sul- phate; Tannic acid. y 2 to 2 Calomel; Opium, powdered. THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 227 1 tO 2 Belladonna, fluid extract; Camphor, gum; Chloroform; Copper sulphate; Sodium bicarbonate, i to 4 Acetaniiid; Ammonia, chloride; Potassium, nitrate. 2 to 4 Cannabis indica, fluid extract; Charcoal; Potassium iodide; Salol. 6 to 8 Aloes. OUNCES K to i Gentian; Ginger. i Fenugreek. 12 to 2 Bromide of potassium. 1 tO 2 Sulphuric ether; Sweet spirits of niter; Tinct. Chloride of iron; Tinct. Opium, i to 3 Aromatic spirits of ammonia; Oil of turpentine. 2 to 4 Alcohol; Potassium nitrate (in laminitis). NOMENCLATURE AMMUNITION, FUZES AND MATERIEL By Capts. Walton Clark and W. H. Schoellkopf Q. Is ammunition fixed or unfixed? A. For the 3 inch gun it is fixed. For the 4.7 inch howitzer it is unfixed. For the 6 inch howitzer it is unfixed. Q. What kinds of ammunition are used? A. Common shrapnel, high explosive shrapnel and high explosive shell. Q. What do the projectiles weigh? A. 3 inch, 15 pounds; 4.7 inch, 60 pounds; 6 inch, 120 pounds. Q. What do the complete rounds weigh? A. 3 inch, 18% pounds; 4.7 inch, 67 pounds; 6 inch, 132 pounds. Q. From what materiel are the cartridge cases made? A. Drawn brass. Q. What is stamped on the base of the cartridge case? A. Name of the gun, initials of place and year of manufacture, also the ammunition lot number. Q. What is the primer? A. It is composed of a percussion cap, which, when hit by the firing pin, ignites an auxiliary charge of black powder. The ignition of the black powder charges insures the uniform and complete ignition of the smokeless powder charge. Q. What is the weight of the explosive used as a bursting charge in common steel shell? What is its name? A. 3 inch gun, 13.12 ounces; 4.7 inch howitzer, 3.36 pounds; 6 inch howitzer, 13.87 pounds. It is termed " Explosive D." Q. What are the fundamental parts of a round of shrapnel? A. Propelling charge; steel case containing the bursting charge and the shrapnel balls; separated by a steel diaphragm from the bursting charge; the balls, embedded in a smoke pro- ducing matrix; and a combination time and percussion fuze. 228 NOMENCLATURE 229 Q. How many balls does a shrapnel contain? A. 3 inch gun, 252; 4.7 inch howitzer, 711; 6 inch howitzer, 1084. Q. How much does each weigh? A. 3 inch gun, 167 grains; 4,7 inch howitzer, 230 grains; 6 inch howitzer, 306 grains. Q. What is their diameter? A. 3 inch gun, 0.5; 4.7 inch howitzer, 0.54; 6 inch howitzer, 0.54. Q. How thickly should they fall on the enemy. A. One per square yard. Q. What should be done to shrapnel before it is fired? A. The waterproof hood removed. In the case of the 4.7 inch and 6 inch howitzer the safety wire also removed. The fuze set for range and corrector. Q. What is the name of the fuze chiefly used? A. Frankford Arsenal, 31 second combination, time and per- cussion, fuze. Q. Why does not a shrapnel explode or its time train start when it is dropped? A. Because the fuze is so constructed that the concussion re- sistance ring holds the concussion plunger in place, unless the projectile received a tremendous blow or impact from the rear. Also because the percussion plunger has a firing pin that is held at 90 deg. from the direction of the per- cussion primer by a spring which can only be compressed and the firing pin brought into position to fire when the rapid rotary motion of the projectile sets up a centrifugal force sufficient to compress the spring holding the firing pin out of position. Q. If the fuze should be set at safety and the time or concussion plunger accidentally fired what would happen? A. The solid portion of the upper time ring, which covers the vent connecting the upper and lower time trains, would force the time train to burn out without communicating the flame to the lower train. Q. How should fuzes be set for travel and transportation in ammunition chests? A. At safety. Q. How are boxes with ammunition marked? A. On the sides and both ends with a borut and flame To 230 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the right of this figure "30," "47H" or "6H" to indicate 3 inch gun, 4.7 inch howitzer or 6 inch howitzer and still farther to the right a star if the shell or shrapnel has a train. The numerals 3, 4.7 or 6 are printed in red for high explosive shrapnel, black for steel shell, and yellow for common shrapnel. For blank ammunition the figures 4.7 and H are in blue. Q. Of what is the powder charge composed? A. Twenty-four ounces of nitrocellulose powder for the 3 inch gun, 28.9 ounces of nitrocellulose powder packed in three raw silk bags for the 4.7 inch howitzer and 3 pounds 12.25 ounces for the 6 inch howitzer. THREE INCH GUN, FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH HOWITZER, SIX INCH HOWITZER— WHEELED MATERIEL Q. How many guns in one battery? Caissons? A. Four guns. Twelve caissons. Q. How is a gun or howitzer made? A. Built of nickel steel. A gun consists of a tube, jacket, locking hoop and clip. A howitzer of the body and breech hoop. Q. How is the gun or the howitzer attached to the recoil cylinder? A. By means of a lug which projects from the under side of the jacket in guns and from the upper side of the breech hoop in howitzers. Q. How is the breech block dismantled? A. Grasp the operating lever and open the mechanism. When the mechanism is opened, force the block latch out of its seat in the block by gently pressing it into its seat in the carrier. Take hold of the block and revolve it to the left until it stops, then pull it out to the rear, taking care not to drop it. Q. How is the firing lock case and firing mechanism complete removed from the howitzer? A. Take hold of the milled headed locking bolt situated at the lower end of the firing lock case, pull it to the rear, at the same time revolve the firing lock case down and about 45 and pull it gently to the rear. This will remove the case with the firing mechanism complete from the howitzer. NOMENCLATURE 231 Q. How is the cylinder of a howitzer filled? To fill the cylinder. — Practically all damages to the rear cradle head and parts of cylinder can be traced to the fact that the cylinder was not completely filled with oil. For that reason the cylinder should be filled with the greatest care; a commissioned officer should, himself, verify that the cylinder is full and that no air is left in it, with the exception of the void noted below. The easiest way to fill the cylinder is to fill it when disassembled from the carriage. If this is impracticable, fill, as follows: The piston rod, recoil valve, counter recoil buffer and cylinder heads being assembled, the piston is drawn out until clear of the counter recoil buffer, approximately 25 inches. With the cylinder assembled to the howitzer lug in such a location as to bring one of the filling and drain plugs as near the top of the cylinder head as possible, elevate the howitzer to maximum elevation. Remove both plugs and fill slowly through either hole. When about two-thirds full replace the plugs and depress to zero eleva- tion to permit the air pocketed in the counter recoil buffer recess to escape. The piston rod is now forced in to within an inch of its firing position. The cradle is again elevated, the cylinder entirely filled, and the rod forced in. Before final insertion of the plugs the valves should be rotated slowly to permit the escape of any entrapped air in the by-pass; also allow plenty of time for pocketed air to escape. When satisfied that the cylinder is entirely full allow about 4 cubic inches {about one-eighth pint) of oil to escape, thus providing a void for the expansion of the oil. Tighten both plugs and secure them with copper wire. Q. How is the cylinder of a 3 inch gun rilled? A. The gun is first brought to its maximum elevation and the filling and drain plugs removed (it is necessary that the drain plug hole be located on the top of the cylinder); fill through the hole in the piston rod, allowing a few minutes for the air to escape and the oil to settle; refill. When the cylinder is entirely refilled, insert both plugs and depress the gun as far as possible. After a few minutes have elapsed, again elevate and unscrew both plugs and refill as described. When entirely full allow about 1 tablespoonful to escape. Insert both plugs and lash them with copper wire. 232 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. What kind of oil and how much is required? A. Hydroline oil; 9 pints for the 3 inch gun and 22 pints for the 4.7 inch howitzer. Q. What is the purpose of the traveling lock? A. To relieve the elevating and traversing mechanism from the strain of travel. Q. How is the howitzer dismounted? A. Get the howitzer in a position slightly elevated and secure it so that it will not slide out too fast when the cylinder retaining ring is unscrewed. Unscrew the cylinder retaining ring on the rear end of the cylinder and draw the piece to the rear until the rails are free from the cradle gun slides. Q. How is the 3 inch gun dismounted? A. Remove the recoil indicator throw, unscrew the cylinder end ' stud nut and shove the gun to the rear until the clips are free of the guides. Q. How is the howitzer mounted? A. Shove the piece from the rear with the gun slides engaging the rails, guiding the cylinder carefully into the lug on the howitzer, taking care that the locating pin in the bore of the lug enters one of the notches on the exterior surface of the cylinder. Assemble the cylinder retaining ring locking it in place on the cylinder with the locking screw. In moving the piece on or off the cradle particular care must be taken to support the breech end so that the howitzer rails are in prolongation of the cradle gun slides. Great care must be exercised during this operation not to injure the other mechanisms about the howitzer carriage. Q. How is the gun mounted? A. Shove the piece (from the rear) over the cradle guides, with the clips engaging the guides ; assemble the cylinder end stud nut, taking care that the locking stud on the recoil lug enters one of the recesses provided for it in the end of the cylinder; assemble the recoil indicator throw. In moving the gun on or off the cradle, care must be taken to support the breech end so that the gun clips remain in line with the gun slides. Q. What does the gun weigh? Trje howitzer? NOMENCLATURE 233 A. 3 inch gun, 788 pounds; 4.7 inch howitzer, 1056 pounds; 6 inch howitzer, 1925 pounds. Q. What is the caliber? A. 3 inch gun, 3 inches; 4.7 inch howitzer, 4.7 inches; 6 inch howitzer, 6 inches. Q. How long are they? A. 3 inch gun, 87.8 inches; 4.7 inch howitzer, 69 inches; 6 inch howitzer, 87 inches. Q. What is the rifling? A. The grooves on the inside of the bore. Q. How many grooves are there? A. 3 inch gun, 24^4.7 inch howitzer, 42; 6 inch howitzer, 54. Q. Which way does the rifling twist? A. As a right hand screw; i.e., in inspecting it through the breech, in a clockwise direction. Q. What is the muzzle velocity? - A. 3 inch gun, 1700 feet per second; 4.7 inch howitzer, 900 feet per second; 6 inch howitzer 900 feet per second. Q. What is the maximum range and at what angle must the firing be made to get it. A. 3 inch gun, 6000 yards, 15 deg. elevation; 4.7 inch howitzer, 6640 yards, 40 deg. elevation; 6 inches, 6704, 40 deg. elevation. Q. What are the weights of the gun and howitzer carriages complete? A. 3 inch gun, 2520 pounds; 4.7 inch howitzer, 3988 pounds; 6 inch howitzer 5443 pounds. Q. What are the weights of the gun and howitzer carriages com- plete with gun and howitzer limbers loaded and equipped? A. 3 inch gun and limber, 4260 pounds; 4.7 inch howitzer, 5252 pounds; 6 inch howitzer 7354 pounds. Q. What is the length of recoil? A. 3 inch G, 45 inches; 4.7 and 6 inch H's at horizontal 52 and 6s inches, at 40 deg. elevation 24 and 26 inches. Q. What is the amount of free height under the carriage and limber? A. 3 inch gun, 22 inches; 4.7 inch howitzer, 20 inches; 6 inch howitzer 20 inches. Q. What is the action of the recoil mechanism during firing? A. The 3 inch piece moves to the rear on the cradle; the 4.7 inch 234 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE howitzer slides to the rear suspended from the cradle. Both carry the cylinder with them and compress the counter recoil springs. The piston rod is attached to a stationary part of the carriage and the action of the cylinder in moving to the rear forces the oil to pass from one side of the piston to the other. The energy of the gun's recoil is absorbed or counteracted by the resistance which the oil offers on being forced thru the small openings past the piston, assisted by the shock absorption of the recoil springs. The energy transmitted to the springs in turn reacts to force the gun or howitzer into its original position. The recoil of the gun should be the same at all elevations, about 45 inches. With the howitzer, however, the recoil is less when the piece is elevated than when horizon- tal. This is due to the controlling properties of the gears which turn the piston and piston rod as the howitzer is elevated or depressed in order to provide fewer or more holes for the oil to pass through. Q. What nuts should not be removed unless the springs they engage are to be dismounted in the presence of an officer? Where are they? A. The two swing bolt nuts on the side clips of the cradle head front that hold in the retaining ring, which in turn fastens the springs in place. Q. How does the forge limber differ from the gun or caisson limbers? A. It is the same, except in the construction of the chest and foot rest, which are fitted to carry tools and supplies pertaining to a farrier's shop. Q. To what is the forge limber attached? A. To the battery wagon. Q. What is the battery wagon? A. A wagon carrying the following: Two spare wheels; one carpenter's chest; two saddler's chests; three chests for clean- ing materiel and small spare parts; and four chests for spare sights. Q. What is the store limber? A. It is substantially the same as the forge limber, excepting that it is constructed to carry the instruments used by the Battery Commander. Q. To what is it attached? NOMENCLATURE 235 A. To the store wagon used to carry spare parts. Q. How much does the caisson and limber, completely equipped and with ammunition weigh? A. 4560 pounds. Q. How much does the forge limber and battery wagon equipped and loaded weigh? A. 4524 pounds. Q. How much does the store limber and store wagon, completely equipped, weigh? A. 4208 pounds. THE THREE-INCH FIELD GUNS, MODELS OF 1902, 1904, AND 1905 Weights, Dimensions, Etc. Weight: Models of 1902 and 1904 pounds. . 835 Model of 1905 do. . . . 788 Caliber inches . . . 3 Total length , do. . . . ' 87.8 Length of bore do. . . . 84 Length of rifled portion of bore do. . . . 72.72 Rifling: Number of grooves 24 Width of grooves inch 0.2927 Depth of grooves do ... . o . 03 Width of lands do ... . o . 1 Models of 1902 and 1904: 1 turn in 50 calibers at origin to 1 turn in 25 calibers at 12.52 inches from muzzle, thence uniform. Model of 1905: o turns at origin to 1 turn in 25 calibers at 9.72 inches from muzzle, thence uni- form. Weight of projectile, filled and fuzed pounds. . 15 Weight of cartridge case. . . do. . . . 2 . 25 Weight of fixed ammunition (1 round) do. . . . 18.75 Capacity of cartridge case cubic inches. . 66. 5 Muzzle velocity feet per second. . 1,700 Maximum pressure per square inch .pounds. . 33,000 Range at 15 elevation yards. . 6,000 Maximum range ; about do 8,500 Twist, right-hand. 236 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE THE THREE-INCH GUN CARRIAGE, MODEL OF 1902 Weights, Principal Dimensions, Etc. Weight of carriage, complete, with 4 rounds of ammunition, weighing 75 pounds pounds. . 1,685 Weight of gun and carriage, complete do. . . . 2,520 Weight at end of trail, carriage limbered do ... . 115 Diameter of wheels inches. . . 56 Width of track do ... . 60 Length of recoil of gun on carriage do. . . . 45 Height of axis of gun do ... . 40 . 875 Height of line of peep sight do ... . 44 . 9 Length of peep-sight radius do. . . . 36 . 75 Maximum angle of elevation degrees. . 15 Maximum angle of depression do ... . 5 Amount of traverse of gun and carriage mils. . 140 Rounds of ammunition carried on carriage 4 THE FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH HOWITZER, MODEL OF 1908 Weights, Dimensions, Etc. Weight pounds. . 1,056 Caliber inches. . . 4.7 Total length do . . . 69 Length of bore do. . . 64. 15 Length of rifled portion of bore do. . . 54.05 Rifling: Number of grooves 42 Depth of grooves inches. . . 0.04 Width of grooves do. . . 0.2116 Width of lands do . . . 0.14 Twist, right-hand, uniform, one turn in 20 calibers. Weight of projectile, rilled and fuzed pounds. 60 Weight of powder charge do. . . 2 Weight of cartridge case do. . . 5.1 Capacity of powder chamber cubic inches. . 114.0 Muzzle velocity feet per second. . 900 Maximum pressure per square inch pounds. . 16,500 Range at 15 deg. elevation yards. . 3,575 Maximum range, 40 deg. elevation do. . . 6,640 NOMENCLATURE 237 THE FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH HOWITZER CARRIAGE, MODEL OF 1908 Weights, Dimensions, Etc. Weight of carriage, complete pounds. . 2,745 Weight of howitzer and carriage, complete do. . . 3,988 Weight at end of trail, carriage, limbered, howitzer engaged in traveling lock, pounds 149 Diameter of wheel .inches. . . 58 Width of track do . . . 60 Height of axis of howitzer above ground do . . . 38 Height of line of peep sight above ground do. . . 47.25 Length of sight radius do. . . 19 Maximum angle of elevation degrees . 40 Maximum angle of depression do . . . 5 Length of recoil of howitzer on carriage, zero eleva- tion , inches ... 52 Length of recoil of howitzer at 40 deg. elevation do. . . 24 Amount of traverse of howitzer on carriage milliemes. . . 107 Weight of carriage limber (model of 1909), com- pletely equipped pounds. . 1,264 Weight of howitzer carriage and limber, loaded and equipped do. . . 5,252 Free height under limber and carriage inches. . . 20 Turning angle degrees. . 112 Distance, center of limber axle to center of carriage axle when limbered (wheel base) inches. . . 160 238 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE THE SIX INCH HOWITZER, MODEL OF 1908. Weights, Dimensions, Etc. Weight pounds. . 1,925 Caliber . inches . . 6 Total length do 87 Length of bore do. . . . 81 .5 Length of rifled portion of bore do ... . 69 . 05 Rifling- Number of grooves 54 Depth of grooves inches . . .05 Width of grooves do 2091 Width of lands do ... . .14 Twist-right-hand, uniform one turn in 18 calibers. Weight of projectiles, filled and fuzed pounds . . 120 Weight of powder charge do ... . 3.75 Weight of cartridge case do ... . 8 Capacity of powder chamber cubic inches. . 291 Muzzle velocity (zone 3) feet per second. . 900 Maximum pressure per square inch . pounds. . 20,000 Maximum range yards. . 6,704 Travel of projectile inches . . 71 . 95 THE SIX INCH HOWITZER CARRIAGE, MODEL OF 1908 Weights, Principal Dimensions, Etc. Weight of carriage, complete pounds . . 5,443 Weight of howitzer and carriage, complete do. . . . 7,354 Weight at lunette, carriage limbered and in battery. do. ... 455 Weight at lunette, carnage limbered and howitzer in travel- ing position do ... . 1,193 Diameter of wheels inches . . 60 Width of track do ... . 60 Maximum angle of elevation degrees. . 40 Maximum angle of depression do. . . . 5 Amount of traverse of howitzer on carriage, . milliemes. . 107 Length of recoil of howitzer on carriage, howitzer at zero degrees elevation inches . . 63 Length of recoil of howitzer on carriage, howitzer at 40 degrees elevation do: ... 26 Height of axis of howitzer do ... . 43 Height of line of peep sight do ... . 51 Length of sight radius do ... . 19 CLEANING: MATERIEL, HARNESS, INSTRUMENTS Q. In the case of harness and materiel, what oils and greases are issued and to what uses are they applied? A. Oils and Greases. — Lubricating oil, sperm oil, clock oil, and petroleum or vaseline, for lubrication; Light slushing oil and cosmic as rust preventives; Coal or kerosene oil for the cleaning of metal parts and for lanterns; Boiled linseed oil, raw linseed oil, and turpentine as ingredi- ents of prepared paint; NeatVfoot oil for softening and preserving leather; Hydroline oil for rilling recoil cylinders. This oil should be used for no other purpose. Officers and men should be able to distinguish the different oils and greases by the color, smell, or viscosity. Q. What oil cans are issued to a battery? How large are they and how much do they hold? A. The oil cans issued to a battery, their capacities, disposition, and contents are as follows: Coal oil, gallons Hydro- line oil, gallons Lubricat- ing oil, gallons Three 5-gallon oil cans on battery wagon.. . 5 Three 5-gallon oil cans on store wagon ' 5 Two tubular two-thirds gallon oil cans on forge limber ! % Two tubular oil cans on store limber \ % Forty-eight tubular oil cans, 3 in each 1im- ber, 1 of each kind of oil I0 % Four i-pint horizontal oilers, 1 in each trail I box .... Total ! 22 239 10% 2 A 240 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. Name some materiels for painting. A. Materiel for Painting. — Second coat and third coat olive drab paint for the wheeled materiel. Brown enamel primer for painting horse collars, trace chains, etc. Rubberine paint for sealing blank charges. Sal soda for removing dirt and grease before painting. Powdered lye for removing old paint. Sandpaper for smoothing surfaces before painting. Japan drier as an ingredient for hastening the drying. Boiled linseed oil as an ingredient for hastening the drying and for making the paint more^ suitable for interior work. Raw linseed oil as an ingredient for making the paint more suitable for outside work. Turpentine for thinning paint. Sash and varnish brushes for painting. Q. Name some miscellaneous materiels and state their uses. A. Miscellaneous Materiels. — Borax as a flux in welding; Camel's hair brushes for removing dust and lint from optical instruments; Castile soap for cleaning leather; Chamois skin as a wiping cloth for instruments except on the lenses; Crocus cloth for polishing metal; Emery cloth for cleaning metal by abrasion or wearing away of the surface; H. and H. or Paco soap for cleaning cloth and web equipment; Lavaline for polishing metal, such as bearing surfaces of collars, etc.; Russet leather dressing for polishing leather after cleaning; Saddle soap as a dressing for leather; Soap polish as a substitute for lavaline; Sponges: Large size for washing carriages, small size for cleaning leather; Waste as a wiper for general cleaning; Wax for rubbing on thread before sewing. Q. Why is frequent cleaning of carriages desirable? A. To preserve them from rust, or corrosion, to protect the CLEANING 241 bearing surfaces, and to aid in detecting the loss of small parts and parts broken, cracked or out of adjustment, Q. Should any metal part be struck directly with a hammer? A. No, use a copper drift pin or a wooden block. Q. What is the proper way to fold a canvas bucket? A. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground and hold it in place with both feet, grasp the top with both hands and twist the bucket. Q. Is it necessary to keep the tools carried in the carriages in good condition? A. Yes; working edges sharp, surfaces bright and smooth. Q. How should the paulins be folded for use as cushions? A. The paulin is made of five strips. Spread the paulin on the ground, throw the ropes on it, fold each outside strip over onto the strip next to it; fold both these double strips onto the middle strip, making the paulin the width of one strip only. Fold the paulin once down the middle lengthwise; then fold both ends over making the finished paulin one-third the length of the strip. Q. Why is it bad practice to wash carriages with a hose? A. Water reaches parts not easily dried. Q. How should brakes be released? A. By a steady pull, never by a kick or sudden blow. Q. What is lubrication and why is it necessary? A. By lubrication is meant the practice of keeping a thin film of the proper type of oil between all working or bearing surfaces. It is necessary for the proper working of all parts and to preserve them from wear. Q. What precaution should be taken during oiling? A. The old oil should, if possible, be wiped from the surface and the grit cleaned from it; the parts to be oiled are moved back and forth to make sure that enough oil reaches the entire bearing surface. Oil that spills on any other surface than where required should be wiped off to prevent accumulation of dust. Oil holes should be cleaned before oiling to prevent grit from running in, and should be closed immediately after use. Q. How much cleaning is necessary after the firing of a gun and when should it be done? 16 242 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. As soon as possible after firing, the bores of the guns should be cleaned with a solution of ingredients in the following pro- portion: One-half pound of sal soda to one gallon of boiling water. They are then dried carefully and oiled. Also, the exploded primers should be removed from the car- tridge cases and and cases washed by immersing them com- pletely in a hot but somewhat weaker solution of sal soda; they are then dried carefully. Neither acids nor solutions of acids will be used for cleaning cartridge cases. Q. What care is necessary in assembling parts? A. A light coating of oil should be given all unpainted surfaces, to prevent rust, and on threads and nuts, to make the next disassembling easier. All split pins should be replaced and opened. Q. What are some things to remember in filling, cleaning and assembling the recoil cylinder? A. Use only Hydroline oil (or water) inside the cylinders. Strain all the oil thru a clean, fine cloth and do not keep it in dirty containers. Never clamp the cylinder in a vise. Keep all grit out of the cylinders. Cotton cloth is better than waste, as the threads from the waste are apt to clog the ports in the valve. Q. Under what conditions may water be used in the recoil cylinders ? A. When no Hydroline oil can be obtained. Water rusts, and in cold weather, is apt to freeze in the cylinder. Q. When should harness and horse equipment be cleaned? A. Immediately after use. This obligation, like the care of a horse, is to be regarded as a part of the mounted duty, and exercises will not be considered complete until horses, har- ness, and equipment have been put in order. Q. Explain the cleaning and dressing of harness. A. Take the harness apart, unbuckling straps and slipping back all keepers. With a sponge dampened — but not wet — with water, wipe off all dust and mud; rinse out the sponge, moisten it in clean water, squeeze it until nearly dry, rub it on castile soap and work up a thick, creamy lather. Clean each piece thoroughly in this lather, each piece being drawn CLEANING 243 its entire length thru the lathered sponge to remove all salt, sweat and dirt. Again rinse out the sponge thoroughly and make a thick lather with sponge as dry as it can be squeezed. Go over each piece as before, and place the parts in the shade to dry. While these parts are drying, clean the buckles and other metal parts of the harness. When leather has become partially dry, rub hard with a cloth. Assemble the harness. Q. When is it necessary to oil harness and how is it done? A. As long as the saddle soap keeps the leather pliable, no oil is necessary; when the leather becomes hard and stiff, Neat's foot oil dressing is required. While the leather is still damp from castile soap dressing apply the oil to the flesh side of the leather with a cloth moistened, but not soaked in oil. Oil should be applied evenly with long, light strokes, care being taken to reach every part of the harness. The seat of the saddle hardly requires oil. Q. Why should oil be applied to the flesh side of leather? A. It is absorbed more easily and preserves the leather longer. Q. What is a general rule about handling harness? A. Never throw it about; saddles may be broken, collars bent, or straps torn by rough handling. Q. What should be done with the saddle blanket after use? A. It should be folded, wet side in, and placed across the saddle. This will cause the blanket to ^shape to the horse, and the wet portions will dry soft and not wiry. When necessary, clean the blanket by repeatedly sousing up and down in warm soapsuds and hang it over a line without pressing or wringing it out. Q. Where should wet harness be dried? A. In a warm, shady place; never near the stove or in the sun, as this will harden and crack the leather. Q. How should the leather straps on the carriages be cared for? A. As prescribed for harness. Q. Is it necessary to overhaul harness every day? A. No, after every drill the driver wipes and cleans, with a damp cloth, the bits, the bearing surfaces of the collars and the leather parts of the harness, paying particular attention to the places where the leather is wet from perspiration; 244 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE dries the bits and rubs them with a cloth dampened with oil, and puts the harness in order. Q. What is the chief of section responsible for in cleaning harness? A. He is responsible that the cleaning done by his section is carried out properly, that the mat6riels issued are properly expended, and that the harness is left in good order. Q. Is the use of polish on leather equipment permitted? A. It is forbidden to use any dressing or polish except those issued by the Ordnance Department. Q. What care should be taken of the instruments of a battery? A. The instructions contained in the Handbook, in Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1795, and in Signal Corps Manual No. 3, for the care and disassembling of the range-finding and fire- control and signal equipment will be followed. Q. When should instruments be cleaned and by whom? A. The equipment will be cared for as soon as possible after being used, the work on each instrument being performed habitually by the individual assigned to its service. Q. How should they be cleaned? A. In caring for the instruments chamois skin is ordinarily used as a wiper on parts other than optical surfaces. To clean such surfaces, remove with a camel's hair brush all particles that might scratch the surface, moisten the surface with the breath, wipe it carefully with the special lens paper that can be procured from the Ordnance Department or with a piece of old soft linen, and remove any remaining lint with the brush. Water is harmful to optical surfaces except in very small quantities, as from the condensation of the breath. The perspiration of the body contains an acid that decomposes optical glass, and for that reason drops of perspiration and finger marks should not be permitted to remain thereon. Under no circumstances will dirty cloth, chamois skin, cotton waste, or similar materiels be used for cleaning optical surfaces, and oil will never be allowed to reach them. It is important that optical parts of instruments be kept in warm, dry places when not in use. PISTOL POSITION AND AIMING AND MANUAL By ist Lt. Erroll B. Hay Q. What are the principal parts of the Colt .45 Pistol? A. Slide, front and rear sights, slide stop, barrel, barrel bush- ing, recoil spring, recoil spring guide, safety lock, firing pin, hammer, trigger, trigger guard, magazine. Q. How should a pistol be handled to avoid accident? A. On taking the pistol from the arm rack or holster, take out the magazine and see that it is empty before replacing it, then draw back the slide and make sure that the piece is unloaded, looking thru the bore as an added precaution. Observe the same precaution on the range and before beginning a drill. Q. What is the purpose of pistol instruction? A. To make the soldier a good shot under war conditions. Q. How may this be done ? A. By means of prehminary drills and gallery practice the soldier is trained in the fundamental principles of marksmanship. By means of range practice he is taught to apply these principles. Q. What is the position, dismounted? A. Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is most comfortable when the arm is extended toward the target ; the feet far enough apart to insure firmness and steadiness of position (about 8 to 10 inches). Weight of body borne equally upon both feet; right arm fully extended, left arm hanging naturally. Q. How is the pistol grasped? A. Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb and last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the thumb extending along the stock. The barrel, hand and fore- arm should be as nearly in one line as possible when the 245 246 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE weapon is pointed toward the target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause tremors of the hand or arm to be come municated to the weapon, but should be firm enough to avoid losing the grip when the recoil takes place. To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same grip for each shot — the tension of the grip must be uniform. The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger should be steadily increased and should be straight back and not sidewise. Q. What is the best way to sight? A. Except when delivering rapid or quick fire the rear and front sights of the pistol are used in the same manner as the rifle. The normal sight is used and the line of sight is directed upon a point just under the bull's-eye at "6 o'clock. " The front sight must be seen through the middle of the rear-sight notch, the top being on a line with the top of the notch. Do not cant the pistol to either side. Q. How is the pistol aimed at the target while mounted? A. Position and aiming drill mounted: Rapid aim must be taken while in motion. To practise this drill frequently going thru the motions of aiming and firing (at will) at silhouette targets and other objects placed along the track and 5 yards from it, practise while moving at a walk, trot and gallop. In quick-aimed fire this can best be done t$r holding the pistol pointed toward the targets and moving the arm up and down. With both eyes fixed on the target, point the pistol just as it starts on the upward motion and squeeze the trigger. MANUAL OF THE PISTOL Both before and after drill or other exercise with the pistol, remove the magazine to see that it is empty, and draw back the slide and examine the bore to see that the pistol is not loaded. The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 1. Raise; 2. PISTOL. At the command raise, unbutton the flap of the holster and grasp the handle with the last three fingers of the right hand, back of the hand to the right. At the command, pistol, PISTOL 247 lift the pistol straight up, closing the thumb on the stock as it clears the holster, and extend the forefinger outside of the trigger guard. Carry the pistol forward and upward to a position 6 inches in front of the point of the right shoulder, barrel to the rear and inclined forward about 30 degrees. Being at raise pistol: 1. Return; 2. PISTOL. If the pistol is loaded, see that the hammer is down or that the safety lock is in the locking position. Lower the pistol and raise the flap of the holster with the right hand.- Insert the pistol in the holster and force it down. Button the flap with the right hand. Being at raise pistol: 1. Inspection ; 2 . PISTOL. Without deranging the position of the hand, rotate the pistol so that the sights move to the left, the barrel pointing to the right front and upward. With the thumb and forefinger of the left hand grasp the slide and pull it toward the body. If the magazine is empty, as it should be, the slide stop will lock the slide in the open position. Drop the left hand by the side. Carry the pistol to a position about 6 inches in front of the center of the body, barrel pointing upward at an angle of about 45 degrees and to the left, wrist straight and as high as the breast. When the inspection is completed, resume raise pistol, release the slide stop with the left thumb, and lower the hammer by pressing the trigger. The pistol being in the holster: Prepare for inspection. At this command the flap of the magazine pocket is unbut- toned and turned back with the left hand. Each man in turn executes raise pistol and inspection pistol in time to be at the latter position as the inspection of the man on his right is com- menced by the inspector. As soon as the inspector passes, the soldier completes in- spection pistol, executes return pistol, and with the left hand closes the magazine pocket. Being at raise pistol to remove the magazine: Without deranging the position of the hand, rotate the pistol so that the sights move to the right, the barrel pointing to the left front and upward; press the magazine catch with the right thumb and remove the magazine with the left hand. 248 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE To charge the magazine: Hold the magazine in the left hand, open end up, rounded side to the right. Take the car- tridge in the right hand, thumb on the rim, bullet end pointing to the right ; place the rim on the end of the magazine follower ; force down the magazine spring and slip the cartridge to the left into the magazine. The next cartridge is similarly slipped in by placing it on the cartridge just inserted and forcing down the spring. The magazine may be charged with any number of cartridges from one to seven. The pistol being in the position for removing the maga- zine, to insert the magazine : With the left hand insert the magazine in the handle and shove it home, not by striking it, but with a quick continuous movement, making sure that it engages with the magazine catch. Resume raise pistol. Being at raise pistol with at least one cartridge in the magazine: LOAD. Rotate the pistol as in inspection pistol. With the thumb and forefinger of the left hand grasp the slide, and by pulling it toward the body until fully back and then quickly releas- ing it, cause a cartridge to enter the chamber of the barrel. If the pistol is to be kept in the hand and not fired at once, the safety lock is moved to the locking position with the right thumb. If the loaded pistol is to be carried in the hol- ster the hammer must be fully lowered. Resume raise pistol. The pistol being loaded, to lower the hammer. The pistol being in the position for loading, place the left hand around the grip over the right, seat the left thumb firmly on the hammer, and insert the right forefinger inside the trigger guard. Exert sufficient pressure with the left thumb to control the movement of the hammer, press the trigger and the grip safety with the right hand, and carefully and slowly lower the hammer completely down. Remove the forefinger from the trigger. To again cock the pistol, move the forefinger clear of the trigger, place the right thumb on the hammer, and bring the hammer back to the position of full cock. To unload: UNLOAD. PISTOL 249 Remove the magazine. Execute the motions of load, thereby throwing the cartridge from the chamber. Being at raise pistol, to fire: With the right thumb release the safety lock, if in the locking position; extend the arm, bring the sights on the target, and press the trigger. The energy of recoil causes the mechanism of the pistol to eject the empty cartridge case, load, and prepare the pistol for the next shot. Pressure must be entirely relieved from the trigger after each shot in order that the trigger may re- engage the sear. At the firing of the last cartridge, as the slide moves to the rear, it is automatically locked in the open position by the slide stop, thus calling attention to the fact that the magazine is empty. Q. What oils can be used on pistols? A. For metallic surfaces, sperm oil, cosmic, or "3 in 1." When arms are stored, cosmic should be used. The stock should be wiped off occasionally with a cloth moistened with any of the oils named. ROLLS AND PACKS By ist Lt. H. R. Southall Q. What departments furnish field equipment for the men? A. The articles comprising the field kit vary with the duties of the men and are furnished by the Ordnance Department, the Quartermaster Corps and the Medical Department. Q. What comprises the field kit of individually mounted men? A. The field kit for individually mounted men consists of and is carried as shown below. ORDNANCE PROPERTY (a) personal equipment Articles Where carried i can, bacon Near saddle pocket. i canteen Near cantle ring. i canteen cover On canteen. i cup i fork i knife } Mess kit. i spoon i meat can i pistol, belt, holster, magazine pockets, 2 extra magazines, 21 cartridges 1 pouch for first-aid packet 1 spurs, pair 1 spur straps, pair. On canteen, under cover. Near saddle pocket. Near saddle pocket. Near saddle pocket. k Near saddle pocket. On person, belt outside all clothing, pistol on right hip, first-aid packet on left of and toward front of belt, magazine pocket in front of first-aid packet. On person, buckles outside. (b) horse equipment 1 bridle On horse. 1 halter headstall On horse. 1 halter tie rope On halter, free end secured in near pommel ring. 1 link On bridle, free end snapped up. 1 saddle blanket On horse. 1 saddle On horse. 250 ROLLS AND PACKS 251 i saddlebags, pair On saddle, the saddlebag straps passed through the cincha rings. i surcingle Over saddle, buckled on near side. i currycomb f > grooming kit. . . Off saddle pocket, i horse brush J i feed bag On saddle. i grain bag In feed bag. QUARTERMASTER PROPERTY (c) EQUIPMENT 2 identification tags. . .One slung around neck by tape, other tied to it. 5 pins, tent, shelter 1 _ . . . J „ v ' ' . > In blanket roll. i pole, tent, shelter J i tent, shelter, half, mounted . . Around and forming part of blanket roll. (d) clothing component i blanket In blanket roll. i slicker Rolled and strapped to pommel of saddle, i towel Off saddle pocket, outside canvas lining, i comb ] i soap, cake [ Wrapped in towel. i toothbrush; i drawers, pair . . . ] 2 stockings, pairs j- In blanket roll. i undershirt J Note. — War Department requires for winter wear: 3 blankets 3 undershirts 3 drawers 5 stockings (e) rations 2 reserve rations, each consisting of — 12 ounces bacon In bacon can. 16 ounces hard bread Divided between saddle pockets. i.i 2 ounces coffee, R. & G In coffee bag of saddlebags, in near pocket. 2.4 ounces sugar In sugar bag of saddlebags, in near pocket. 0.16 ounce salt In salt bag of saddlebags, in near pocket. 252 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE (f) forage i feed, 4 pounds of grain In grain bag. (g) medical property i first-aid packet In pouch on belt. Q. When and where are the sweater and overcoat carried? A. The sweater and the overcoat form part of the equipment to be carried with the men in the field only when climatic con- ditions require them. When they are not ordered carried they are made up in bundles, secured and marked so that they may be forwarded whenever necessary. When the sweater is carried and is not worn on the person it is placed in the blanket roll. When the overcoat is carried and is not worn it is rolled and strapped on the pommel of the saddle. Q. Describe how to roll the overcoat and slicker. A. Spread the slicker or overcoat on the ground, inside down, skirt buttoned throughout, sleeves parallel to the middle seam, collar turned over on the shoulders. Turn the tails of the coat under about 9 inches, the folded edge perpendicular to the back seam. Fold over the sides to form a rectangle not more than 34 inches across, according to the size of the coat. Roll tightly from the collar with the hands and knees, and bring over the whole roll that part of skirt which was turned under, thus binding the roll. Q. Describe how to make the blanket roll for mounted men. A. Spread shelter half (model 1904) on the ground, roll straps underneath, and fold over the triangular part on the rect- angular part. Turn under the roll strap edge of the shelter half so that the width of the fold will be 8 inches. Fold the blanket once across the longer edges and lay the blanket on the shelter half, folded edge within 1 inch of the roll strap edge of the shelter half. Fold the sides of the blanket and of the shelter half inward, width of folds about n inches. The shelter tent pole and pins are now laid on the blanket at the edge farthest from the roll strap edge, pole on one side of the center line, pins on the other, so as to allow the roll when completed to bend at the center. Place the underclothing ROLLS AND PACKS 253 on the blanket. If the sweater is to go in the roll, spread it smoothly over the blanket. Roll tightly toward the roll strap edge, using hands and knees, and bring over the entire roll the part of the shelter half which was turned under, thus binding the roll. Buckle the two available roll straps about the roll, passing them around twice. The roll thus formed should be about 44 inches long. Q. Describe how to pack the feed bag for individually mounted men. A. The grain is placed in the grain sack and equally divided be- tween the two halves. The elongated grain sack is then placed inside the feed bag and the whole lashed tightly to the blanket roll by the web straps at each end of the feed bag, so that the open part of the feed bag is closed against the blanket roll. If empty, the feed bag, with grain sack in- closed and all web straps buried in the bag, is lashed to the blanket roll by the coat straps. Q. How is the feed bag packed with the blanket roll? A. To pack the blanket roll with the attached feed bag, three coat straps are used, one to fasten the middle of the roll to the middle of the cantle of the saddle, and one at each end to fasten the end of the roll to the saddlebag strap ring. The blanket roll is placed on the cantle so that the feed bag will be uppermost. The coat straps are passed twice around the roll and buckled. Q. How does the driver's equipment differ from that of indi- vidually mounted men ? A. The equipment of each driver is the same as for individually mounted men with the exception of horse equipment and grain. The driver's horse equipment consists of 1 horse brush, 1 currycomb, 2 feed bags, 2 grain bags, and 2 surcingles. Each driver carries a feed of grain for each horse. Halters, saddle- bags, saddle blankets, etc., are included in the harness. The driver's canteen is snapped in the near pommel ring of the off saddle. His saddlebags, blanket roll, feed bags, slicker, etc., are likewise packed on the off saddle. After attaching his slicker the driver turns the top of the roll over 254 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE the pommel down into the saddle so as to avoid any inter- ference with the rein roller on the off saddle. Q. Describe how to pack the driver's blanket roll and feed bags. A. The grain is placed in the grain sacks and each sack placed in its feed bag. The two feed bags are tied securely together at their open ends, using the "nose and head" web straps, the two bags being tied as closely as possible to prevent the lower ends chafing against the traces. The two feed bags are then suspended across the seat of the saddle of the off horse and lashed in place by the 6o-inch coat straps on each side, as follows: Pass the coat strap under the rear quarter strap and take one turn around the nose bag, if necessary punching a "throat" into the bag near the lower end to prevent the coat strap slipping. The blanket roll being lashed to the center of . the cantle, bring the free end of the roll forward so as to bind over the feed bag and take two turns around the end of the blanket roll with the coat strap. They pass the free end of this strap over the straps thus in place and buckle tightly. Do the same on the other side. If more than one feed is to be carried, place the grain for the first feed in the closed end of the feed bag and lash the feed bag tightly with the rawhide thong. Put the remainder of the grain in the grain sack, and place the grain sack in the feed bag; secure the two feed bags to the off saddle as above. The surcingles are carried one on each horse, buckled over the saddle. With the exceptions noted, all articles of the driver's equip- ment are packed and carried in a manner similar to that de- scribed for individually mounted men. Q. What additional equipment do corporals and members of special details carry? A. In addition to the kits above prescribed, each corporal is provided with a housewife which he will carry in his haver- sack or off saddle pocket. The members of the special details and of the headquarters company are provided with various equipment which they carry on their persons. The field glasses will be carried on the right side, the flag kit on the back, the strap in each case passing over the left shoulder. ROLLS AND PACKS 255 Q. What is the field kit for cannoneers and other dismounted men? A. The field kit for cannoneers and all men not mounted, in- cluding Xos. S trained as spare drivers, consists of and is car- ried as shown below: ORDNANCE PROPERTY (a) personal equipment Articles i can, bacon i can, condiment j i canteen On right rear of pistol belt, i canteen cover On canteen. Where carried .In haversack. i cup i fork i knife i spoon i meat can Mess kit. On canteen under cover. In haversack In haversack. In haversack. In haversack. On person, belt outside all clothing on right hip, first- aid packet on left of and toward front of belt, maga- zine pocket in front of first- aid packet, i haversack On person. i pistol, belt, holster, magazine ] pocket, 2 extra magazines, 21 cartridges. i pouch for first-aid packet. QUARTERMASTER PROPERTY (C) EQUIPMENT 2 identification tags. .One slung around neck by tape, other tied to it. .In blanket roll. 5 pins, tent, shelter I i pole, tent, shelter J i tent, shelter, half mounted Around and forming part of the blanket roll. i blanket In blanket roll. i slicker Folded and placed between folds of one of paulins of carriage on which soldier rides. i towel . In haversack. i comb ] i soap, cake i toothbrush .Wrapped in towel. 256 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE i drawers, pair 2 stockings, pairs In blanket roll. i undershirt See note, page 251. (e) rations 2 reserve rations, each consisting of — 12 ounces bacon In bacon can. 16 ounces hard bread In haversack. 1. 1 2 ounces coffee, R. & G. 1 2.4 ounces sugar \ In condiment can. 0.16 ounce salt (g) medical property 1 first-aid packet In pouch or belt. Q. Where do cannoneers carry sweaters and overcoats? A. The remarks made with reference to the sweater and the overcoat in the case of mounted men apply to cannoneers except that when the overxoatis carried, and not worn by the cannoneer, it is folded and placed between the folds of a paulin on a carriage of the section to which the cannoneer is assigned. Q. Where are old model haversacks and canteens carried? A. When the old model haversack and canteen are issued the personal equipment of men not mounted is increased by two canteen haversack straps. Such haversacks are slung from the right shoulder to the left side. The canteen is slung from the left shoulder to the right side, the strap passing over that of the haversack. Both ends of the haversack strap and the rear end of the canteen strap pass under the pistol belt. When the old model canteen and cup are issued the cup is carried in the near saddle pocket by mounted men and in the haversack by men not mounted. Q. Describe how to make the blanket roll for men not mounted. A. Lay the shelter half on the ground and fold over the triangular part. Hold the blanket up by two corners, the shorter edges vertical; bring the two corners together, thus folding the blanket in the middle; take the folded corner between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, thumb pointing to the left; slip the left hand down the folded edge two-thirds of its length and seize it with the thumb and second finger; ROLLS AND PACKS 257 raise the hands to the height of the shoulder, the blanket extending between them; bring the hands together, the double fold falling outward; pass the folded corner from the right hand into the left hand, between the thumb and forefinger; slip the second finger of the right hand between the folds, seize the double folded corner; turn the left (disengaged) corner in, and seize it with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the second finger of the right hand stretching and evening the folds. The blanket is now folded in six thicknesses. Lay the folded blanket on the shelter half so that one of its shorter sides will be about 8 inches from the edge of the shelter half farthest from the triangular part. Place the underclothing on the blanket. If the sweater is to go in the roll fold it and place it on the blanket with the folded edge of the sweater even with that of the folded edge of the blanket. Across the other short side of the blanket place the shelter tent pole and pins. Fold over the sides and ends of the shelter half which He out- side of the blanket, causing the ropes and straps to be included within the folds. Commencing at the end where the pole and pins are placed roll the pack, using the hands and knees to insure the roll being made as tight as possible. Just before the roll is completed open out slightly with the hands the pocket formed by the 8-inch fold of the shelter half, and -then draw the pocket over the roll, thus binding it. Care should be taken to draw the canvas over the ends of the roll so as to prevent rain and dust from entering the inner portion of the roll. The roll thus formed should be about 22 inches long. The roll is secured to the limber chest of the carriage to which the soldier is assigned, by means of the straps provided for the purpose. The rolls carried on any one limber chest are evenly disposed on either side of the door lock. It is frequently desirable, especially in a strong wind, for the men to work in pairs in making their rolls. Q. What is a surplus kit? A. The surplus kit contains articles of clothing necessary in camps of several weeks' duration and to permit the replace- 17 258 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE ment of clothing worn out in active operations. For these pur- poses the surplus kits are forwarded to troops when serving in instruction, maneuver, mobilization, and concentration camps, or when in active service temporary suspensions of operation, or other conditions, permit the troops to refit. In certain cases in time of peace the surplus kits may, when transportation is available, accompany the troops on the march. The surplus kit of each man consists of — i breeches, pair. 2 stockings, pairs. 1 drawers, pair. 1 shoe laces, extra pair. 1 shirt, olive drab. 1 undershirt. 1 shoes, russet leather, pair. The kit of each man will be packed as follows: Stockings, rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe; shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, wrapped tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied around the middle by the extra pair of shoe laces, each bundle tagged with the battery number of the owner. The breeches and olive drab shirt are not rolled. SALUTES AND COURTESIES Q. What is a salute? A. A salute is a military courtesy. It is the soldier's claim to instant recognition as a soldier. Q. How is a salute executed unarmed? A. Always with the right hand, raise it smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches the lower part of the headdress, above the right eye; thumb and fingers extended and joined; palm to the left; forearm inclined at about 45 deg. ; hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward the person saluted, until it is acknowledged by, or until passing, the person saluted. Q. How should an artilleryman salute when armed with a pistol? A. In the same manner as he would if unarmed — with the right hand. Q. Does an artilleryman armed with a pistol salute during hours of challenge? A. No. He remains at raise pistol. Q. Whom should he salute? A. All officers of all arms, and of all nations allied to the United States; all colors and standards not cased; the national airs of the United States or her allies; and at funerals when the cas- ket is passing. Q, When is the salute rendered? A. On all occasions outdoors, when not in ranks, excepting when at work or at play. Q. Is the salute rendered when at double time, trot or gallop? A. No. Only at quick time or at a walk. Q. If the officer is at double time, trot or gallop, should he be saluted? A. Yes. Q. Should a soldier riding in or driving a vehicle of any kind salute officers that he passes? 259 260 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. Yes. He should salute without rising. Q. On meeting, acknowledging an introduction; or being ad- dressed by a lady, what form of salutation should a soldier render? A. Either the salute or raising of the hat. Q. When should a salute begin and how long should it be held? A. The hand should be raised to the headdress when the soldier is six paces from the officer, and held there until the salute has been returned or the officer has passed. If the parties ex- changing the salute do not approach each other within six paces, the salute is executed at the point of nearest approach. Q. If a soldier passes an officer from the rear, or an officer passes a soldier from the rear, should the soldier salute? A. Yes. He should salute when the officer is about to pass him. Q. Do prisoners salute? A. No. They are not entitled to the exchange of this courtesy. They merely stand at attention. Q. When a soldier in ranks is addressed by an officer, what does he do? A. Assumes the position of a soldier at attention: a soldier in ranks never salutes. Q. When an officer approaches a number of enlisted men out- doors, what is done? A. The soldier who first perceives the officer gives the command ATTENTION, when all stand at attention and salute. All the men should salute at the same instant. Q. When an officer enters a room where there are soldiers, what is done? A, The soldier first noticing the approach of an officer gives the command ATTENTION, when all rise and remain standing at attention until the officer leaves the room. Soldiers at meals do not rise, they merely discontinue eating and sit at attention, resuming their meal when the officer has departed. Q. Upon entering an officer's quarters, or a place where a number of officers are congregated, what does a soldier do? A. Removes his hat and stands at attention. If under arms, he does not remove his hat. Q. When speaking or reporting to an officer, what should a soldier do? SALUTES AND COURTESIES 261 A. He should first salute, address or report to the officer, and again salute on leaving. Q. When an enlisted man is in command of a body of soldiers, what does he do on the approach of an officer? A. Brings the soldiers to attention and salutes. Q. What does a soldier out of ranks do at the first note of the National Air. A. Comes to attention, faces the music, and salutes, holding the salute until the last note of the air has been played. Q. What does a soldier out of ranks do at the first note of the National Air when played at retreat? A. Comes to attention, faces toward the flag and salutes. Q. What does a soldier do on approaching uncased colors or standards? A. Salutes when within six paces of the uncased colors or stand- ards and holds the salute until he has passed six paces beyond them. Q. In walking or riding with an officer, what is the soldier's position? A. To the officer's left and about one pace in rear of him. He also keeps step with the officer, when dismounted. Q. Is it proper to salute with the hand in the pocket, or a cigar, cigarette or pipe in the mouth? A. No. It is decidedly unmilitary and a sure indication of a poorly trained soldier. THE INSIGNIA OF THE U. S. ARMY AND COLLAR DEVICES OF NAVAL OFFICERS* The General Staff ilS US The Regular Army n -jsm* S 5 . 11 1 f . |! | __._ CAPTAIN — Two -silver bars, each one- quarter of an inch wide and one inch long. The bars are placed one-quarter of an inch apart. - FIRST LIEUTENANT — One silver bar, one- quarter inch wide and one inch long. SECOND LIEUTEN- ANT — Same except bar is gold. Cap Device Commissioned Officers U. S. Navy Cap Device ■ Commissioned Officers U. S. Army Cap Device U. S. Marine Corps 266 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Button for uni- Button for uniform Button for uniform form of Officers U. of Officers U. S. Army of Officers U. S. Army S. Army Engineers. except Engineers. except Engineers. (Coat size.) (Vest size.) NAVAL OFFICERS M COLLAR DEVICES ADM IRAL. l!iiiiiuililliiiii!inirn!UU!iiiii!l!iiii!i!iiifi)i!Miiiiiiiiii)iii!ini|iniii]iiiiiinunii!iiiiiii!i(iii;niiiii\ niinii VICE ADMIRAL REAR ADMIRAL f%* COMMANDER SILVER OAK LEAF' •LIEUTENANT-COMMANDER- GOLD OAK LEAF LIEUTENANT- lieutenantJjunior] CHAPLAIN FLAGS OF THE United States 268 ALLIED COUNTRIES Montenegro Roumania 269 SIGNALLING Capt. R. G. MacKendrick and ist Lt. C. P. Smith, ist Lt. L. C. Forgie, 2D Lt. W. T. Powers FIELD TELEPHONE AND BUZZER Q. Give a general description of the service buzzer. A. The service buzzer is a complete telegraph and telephone combined. It is packed m a small leather case and weighs, complete, five pounds. The main parts are: batteries (2), induction coil, condenser, line jack, telegraph key, receiver and transmitter, and rocker switch. Q. Describe the working of the buzzer as a telegraph instrument. A. An induction coil consists of a primary winding of a few turns of heavy wire around a soft iron core, and a secondary winding of very small wire. As current is passed through the primary coil, it sets up or induces a secondary current of high voltage in the secondary coil. This current magnetizes the iron core to alternately attract and release the vibrator so rapidly that a buzzing noise is caused. As varying cur- rents go through the coil, varying secondary currents are set up, giving the characteristic dots and dashes, when the key is pressed. Q. Trace the primary circuit for the telegraph. A. The primary telegraph circuit is as follows: battery, lug P, primary coil, lug PS, back under contact key, front under key contact, vibrator, then back to the battery. Q. Trace the secondary circuit for telegraphy. A. The secondary circuit for sending by telegraph is: line jack ring, lug S, secondary coil, lug PS, back under contact key, base of key, line condenser, switch and back to line jack tip. Q. Of what use is the condenser? A. Sometimes it is necessary to tap a wire that already has a direct current running through it for the use of either a buzzer or a phone. The condenser will not permit direct 271 272 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE current to pass through it, but the alternating current of the buzzer or telephone can pass freely. The condenser is put in use by moving the condenser switch in the direction indicated by the arrow. Q. Trace the primary circuit for the telephone. A. The primary circuit for the telephone is: battery, lug P, primary coil, lug PS, rocker switch T center main binding post, transmitter, binding post T, and back to the battery. Q. The secondary circuit for telephone and buzzer receiving are the same. Trace the circuits. A. (a) Telephone: — Line jack ring, lug S, secondary coil, lug PS, rocker switch T, center main binding post, receiver, binding post R, upper key contact, base of key, line condenser switch, line jack tip. (b) Buzzer: — Line jack ring, rocker switch B, center main binding post, receiver, binding post R, upper key contact, base of key, line condenser switch, line jack tip. Q. What is the purpose of the rocker switch in the front of the instrument? A. At the base of the rocker switch are two white letters; namely "B" and "T." When the switch is tilted toward "B," the buzzer is put in operation, when toward "T," the telephone is connected. Q. What is the jack? A. The jack is the clip and ring combination in front of the coil into which the plug is seated to put the buzzer or 'phone in use. One wire is connected through the clip and point of the plug and the other by the ring and shank of the plug. BUZZER TESTS Q. Why are buzzer tests important? A. The buzzer is a delicate instrument and is liable to get out of order quickly. The wires used in connecting stations are small and easily broken. As communication is vitally important in artillery work, it is necessary to make repairs as rapidly as possible. These buzzer tests locate the trouble and make it possible to quickly reestablish communication. Q. When the buzzer is out of order, what steps should be taken to locate the trouble? SIGNALLING 273 A. For testing purposes, the switch is always set on the side marked "T." (a) To test the buzzer element: Press the key several times and, if necessary, adjust the buzzer until a clear, distinct note is obtained. Directions for adjusting the buzzer are given inside the lid of the case. Seat the plug firmly in the jack and — while pressing the key — touch the ground rod with the connector several times. When this contact note is made the buzzer should be much fainter than- it is when the contact is broken. If the test is successful, the buzzer element, plug, cord and its connections are in order. (b) To test the telephone element: seat the plug firmly in the jack; clip the connector to the ground rod and, while blowing briskly into the transmitter, press the transmitter button several times. If the blowing is clearly heard in the receiver when the button is pressed and is not when the button is released, the telephone element, plug, cord and its connections are in order. If both tests are successful, the instrument is in serviceable condition. If either test fails, the faults should be localized and then repaired. TO USE THE TELEPHONE Press the button on the transmitter wdiile talking. Test of Speaking Circuit Q. What are some special tests to be remembered besides the two general tests already given? A. Short circuit secondary circuit. This is done by connect- ing R and S of Field Artillery Telephone and by connecting the binding posts of the Service Buzzer. Place receiver to the ear, blow in transmitter. If speaking circuit is operative the blowing will be heard in receiver. Test of a Battery Detach a receiver that is working properly and touch its terminals to the opposite ends of the battery. A loud click will be heard if the battery is operative. 274 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Test of a Receiver Detach the receiver and touch its terminals to the opposite ends of a battery that is known to be operative. A loud click will be heard in receiver if it is operative. TEST OF BUZZER Press button or key and if operative it will be known by the sound. This is also an indication that the batteries are operative. ADJUSTMENT OF BUZZER The buzzer is adjusted by means of two screws; the upper screw adjusts the air gap (the distance between the vibrating spring and the iron core of the induction coil) and the lower screw carries the current to the vibrating spring. First set the upper screw and turn lower screw until by pressing call button a strong buzz is heard. If no results are obtained try another setting of the upper screw and again turn the lower screw in and out. Proceed in this manner until the desired adjustment is obtained. If the battery is strong and the above fails to give adjustment, clean contacts on buzzer by running a smooth file or fine sand paper between lower screw and springs. When adjustment is secured the locking nuts with which both adjusting screws are provided should be carefully tightened. TEST OF CONNECTIONS Tighten all loose nuts and screws. Test all cords for breaks beneath the insulation. Remove telephone or buzzer from case and examine wiring on reverse side of base plate. See that plugs make connection in jacks. See, also, that connectors make a good contact with line and ground rod. See that a good ground is secured. TEST OF TRANSMITTER Make the tests outlined above. If speaking circuit is out of order and the other tests show that battery, receiver and SIGNALLING 275 connections are intact, the trouble has been quite definitely traced to the transmitter. Test of Line Where telephones that have been tested and found opera- tive are connected to both ends of the line and operator at one station is unable to get distant station, proceed as follows: (a) A grounded line — Raise transmitter and if a click is heard in the receiver the line is probably grounded as a click indicates a complete cir- cuit; if no click is heard, the circuit is open, which may be caused by very poor connections or a severed line. (b) A metallic circuit, i.e., a double wire — Make same test as in (a), if a click is heard, the line is prob- ably short circuiting the two conductors, if no clicks are heard, the line is open. BUZZER SIGNALLING Q. What are some conventional signs peculiar to buzzer com" munication? A. HR — Here is a message. Before and after numerals (if using short code of numerals). Phone or Fone — Use telephone. CS — Close Station. Q. Describe the position of the right hand, fingers, wrist and arm in sending on the buzzer. A. The key is grasped at the diameter, perpendicular to the lever, between the thumb and third or middle finger. The index-finger is placed on the middle of the key. The index finger controls the downward motion and the thumb and third finger the upward motion. The wrist is relaxed, the motion of sending being from the elbow. Most opera- tors send with the elbow resting on something solid. Q. How does one operator call another? A. He calls " attention" (L) several times, followed by the call number of the station called and continues until answered, occasionally sending his own station number. After the 276 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE receiver has acknowledged, the sender signals HR and starts the message. Q. How does the receiver acknowledge a call? A. By signalling IX and affixing his call number. Q. How does the sender indicate an error? A. By sending a series of dots, then continuing the message, starting with the last word correctly sent. Q. How does the receiver indicate that he has missed a word? A. By sending a series of dots, followed by IX and the last word correctly received. Q. Why should calling between the Battery Commander's Station and the battery be unnecessary? A. Because neither operator should leave his instrument under any circumstances until the signal " close station" (CS) has been received. Q. What are the advantages of the buzzer over the telephone? A. It is more accurate. It can be sent over uninsulated wire, and can still be sent when there are breaks in the wire. Q. What is the advantage of the telephone over the buzzer? A. The telephone is more rapid. Q. What table of abbreviations for semaphore, wig-wag and buzzer signalling should be learned? A. See Plate. TELEPHONE Q. How is telephone communication established? A. By one operator calling the other on the buzzer and sending the signal "fone." Q. Should an operator remove the receiver from his ear before he receives the order to close station? A. No. Q. How should the transmitter be placed? A. Approximately vertical, about i inch from the mouth. Q. How may a message be sent in a high wind, or when there is noise at the speakers end of the line? A. By pressing the transmitter against the throat on either side of the windpipe. Q. What caution should the speaker use in transmitting? SIGNALLING 277 A. To speak in a moderate tone of voice and never shout; to speak slowly and distinctly, not slurring words or syllables. Q. When a figure is misunderstood, how may it be indicated? A. By counting up to it, e.g., "four, one, two, three, four." Q. How are numbers in firing data customarily sent over the telephone? A. Exact hundreds and thousands are so announced; of all other numbers each digit is given separately. Q. Show how this system of giving numbers differs from the method used by an executive in announcing numbers to the battery. umber By telephone To the battery 3000 Three thousand Three thousand 400 Four hundred Four hundred 1800 One, eight hundred One, eight hundred 3225 Three, two, two, five Three, two hundred and twenty- five 4050 Four, zero, five, zero Four thousand and fifty Q. Is zero ever announced as the letter "0." A. No. Q. How may nine be announced to distinguish it from five. A. As "niner." Q. When a word is spelled out and a letter is misunderstood, what words are authorized for use in distinguishing letters? A for able NNan B for boy opal^ C cast P pup D dock Q quick E easy R rush Ffox S sail G George T tare H have U unit I item V voice J jig W watch K king X x-ray L love Y yoke M Mike Z zed 18 278 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE BATTERY AND BATTALION COMMUNICATION Q. Who is responsible for establishing communication between the Battery Commander's Station and the battery? A. The Telephone Corporal. Q. Who assists the Telephone Corporal in establishing communi- cation between the Battery Commander's Station and the battery and what is the duty of each after communication has been established? A. Operator No. 2 and Operator No. 1. Operator No. 2 acts as operator at the Battery Commander's Station on the battery line and reports to the Telephone Corporal or to the captain when communication is established with the battery. Opera- tor No. 1 acts as operator at the battery and reports to the Executive when communication has been established with the Battery Commander's Station. Q. When does the Telephone Corporal start to establish commu- nication? A. As soon as the captain has told him the location of the Bat- tery Commander's Station, the position of the guns and the kind of communication. Q. In case of telephone or buzzer communication, in which di- rection should the wire be strung? A. From the Battery Commander's Station to the battery, leav- ing the reel at the battery, so that, if necessary, the wire may be strung out to any point the executive may select for his position. Q. Who acts as operator at the battery station on the battalion line? A. The Telephone Corporal. Q. Who is responsible for establishing battalion communication, and who assists him? A. The Battalion Sergeant Major, assisted by a Signal Corporal, a Signal Private and an Agent from each battery. Q. Who are the operators at the Battalion Station? A. The Signal Corporal on the line to the batteries and the Sig- nal Private on the regimental line. Q. What precautions are necessary in laying any line or wire? A. To avoid laying the wire in such a position that horses and carriages will pass over it, and to avoid laying the wire so SIGNALLING 279 that the enemy will detect it (especially when laying with the battalion reel cart). Q. Where may a wire be generally laid to be safe from breakage thru horses and carriages passing over it? A. In front of the gun position. Q. What may be necessary to prevent the possibility of the battalion wire being located by the enemy? A. Laying it from the battalion reel cart and then having it carried backward or forward by hand as far as possible. TWO -ARM SEMAPHORE Q. How many positions are there for the arms in semaphore and how may they best be described? A. Eight represented by the hour hand of a clock at 6 o'clock, 7 : so, g, io : 30, 12, 1 : 30, 3, and 4 : 30. Q. Into how many series may the various combinations forming semaphore letters be divided? Name these series with the base positions in each. A. Seven series. I. A, B, C, D, E, F, G; the letters made with one arm, the other arm or base being at interval (6 o'clock). II. H, I, K, L, M, N; with two arms, the base being always the position of A (7 :3c). III. 0, P, Q, R, S; with two arms, the base being always at B position (9 o'clock). IV. T, U, Y; with two arms, the base being always at the position of C (10 130). V. J, V; with two arms, the base being always at the position of D (12 o'clock). VI. W, X; with two arms, the base being always at the posi- tion of E (1 130). VII. Z; with two arms, the base being at the position of F (3 o'clock). Q. In what direction are all the changes in the different series? A. From the sender's right to left, clockwise to the receiver. Q. What are the exceptional letters out of their regular order in series ? A. J and Y. 280 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. What possible positions are omitted? A. The last position in the fourth series and the first position in the fifth series. 8| —I uj II i uj O OX ocn go II 5 #8BB$ ^ c^C^ ujzt Oz« ££* —I uj UJ < uj o ZfiO ^uj"- sr c*< o i i i i zoaoa:w.hD>jx>-N n!i! : I • i i! I I I I ! I I I . : I : : ! I ! I I I ! II — oi in tJ i/) Q. Should the student master one series before passing to the next, or should he first learn the letters in alphabetical order? A, The former. Q Should the student first learn to send or receive? A. To receive. SIGNALLING 281 Q. How should the passage be made between letters? A. Abruptly, avoiding the position of interval. One letter should swing into another. Q. What is the exact position of the flag at 12 o'clock? A. The wrist bent over the head, so that the flag staff will extend upward directly over the middle of the head. Q. May the letter D be made with either hand? A. Yes. Q. Where should the sender look while sending a word? A. A beginner should look at the position of his own arms, but should discontinue this practice when he has thoroughly learned the proper positions of the arms for the various letters, otherwise he will continue this practice later in sending actual messages and will be unable to determine when any letter or word is misunderstood by the receiver. The secret of perfect sending lies in the ability to "feel" the proper position of the arms. Q. Where should a beginner look at the end of a word? A. At the receiver, to be sure the word was understood. Q. If the receiver misses a letter, should he signal "repeat last word" at once or should he wait until the end of the word? A. Wait until the end of the word. Q. When should rapid sending be attempted? A. Only after absolute perfection of the arm positions has been attained. Q. What is a simple rule for governing the relative positions of the arms in the two-arm letters? A. The arms are never placed across the body, except when nec- essary to form a letter of two positions on either side of the body; e.g.. in K the right hand is at 7:30 and the left hand at 12 o'clock, not the reverse. When one arm must cross the body, the arm crossing is always in the lower position; e.g., in H the left hand is at 7:30 and the right hand at 9 o'clock, not the reverse. Q. What is an easy way to avoid dropping the lower flag in O and W? A. The beginner should place the butt of the lower flag under the arm pit. 282 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. How may the letters H, I, O, W, X and Z be made more clearly than from the erect position? A. By turning the body slightly toward the side on which the letter is to be made. Q. What is the advantage of the two-arm semaphore over the wig-wag? A. It is faster. Q. What is the disadvantage? A. The semaphore cannot be seen at a great distance. Q. How far may semaphore signals be read when sent without flags? A. 600 yards. Q. With flags? A. 1 200-1 500 yards, without glasses; 2000 yards with glasses. Q. What is the maximum speed at which important or compli- cated messages, such as. firing data should be sent? A. About thirty letters a minute. Q. What is the speed at which signallers should be able to send • and receive? A. About 120 letters a minute. Q. What type of background should the sender always seek? A. Trees or fields of uniform color. Q. Why should the sky line be avoided? A. Because the sender is easily seen by the enemy. Q. How are double letters indicated? A. After the first letter describe a small circle, or make a dip to the front and again make the letter. Q. Explain the meaning and use of the following signals found in the plate and the table of abbreviations: "Error." A. Erroneous sending. "A" is repeated several times after which the entire word is sent again. Q. "Negative." A. "No" or "The following message is not so." Q. "Preparatory." A. "Message follows." Q. "Annuling." A. "Disregard last message." Q. "Interrogatory." SIGNALLING 283 A. "The following is a question," as, "O interval RN" ("What is the range"). Q. "Affirmative." A. "Yes" or "The following is so." Q. "Acknowledge." A. "I understand." Q. "Attention." A. "I have a message for you." The signal is repeated until the person called also signals "Attention" with the call numbers of his station, if he has one. Then both parties drop to the interval, the sender signals "Preparatory," drops to the interval and starts the message. "Attention" is also used by the receiver to break in. Q. "Interval." A. "End of word." Q. "Numerals follow." Signalled before numerals. A. After the numerals have been sent, the position of "Interval" indicates that the letters are to commence. Q. To what letters of the alphabet do the numerals correspond? A. The first ten in order. Q. What are the conventional semaphore signals? A. CCC, interrogatory 3 times; CC, interrogatory a (word); One chop-chop, end of sentence; Two chop-chops, end of message, followed by withdrawing flags from view. Q. How is the chop-chop made? A. Extend both arms to the right horizontal (9 o'clock), move one arm up and dow T n while the other is being moved down and then up, executing the movement with a cutting motion. GENERAL SERVICE CODE Q. What is the disadvantage of the American Morse Code? A. The space letters. Q. Is there any difference between the International Morse, the Continental Morse and the United States General Service Code? A. No. 284 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Q. Give the general service alphabet, numerals and punctuation. A. See plate. Q. What are the principle uses of the General Service Code in Field Artillery? A. Wig-wag and buzzer. Q. What is the best way to study the General Service Code, so as to best fix the various combinations in mind? A. By using the buzzer, and if a buzzer is not available, by imitating vocally the sound of the buzzer; e.g., "dah" for dash and "dit" (as in starting to say "dog," and cutting off the og) for dot. Example: in imitating the sound of the letter F, the following would be the manner of articulation: dit-dit-dah-dit. Q. Should the beginner first learn to send or receive? A. To receive. Q. In sending to a beginner should the letters be sent more slowly than is normally the case. If not, how is the beginner to be given time to recognize the letters? A. The letters should be sent at normal speed and the intervals between letters should be prolonged. Q. What is the quickest way to learn the General Service Code? A. Group the letters in pairs of opposites, leaving only four letters without opposites; as follows: A — N — • H ■••• B V C D U • — J F L Z G W K R P Q E • . x — Y T — I •• M s •••• When the alphabet has been learned, and the student has become thoroughly familiar with it — especially in studying the buzzer — with the combinations of dots and dashes in SIGNALLING 285 short words of common usage; such as the words; "the," "and," etc., he should proceed with sentences. Q. What is the best way of remembering the numerals? A. All numerals have five elements. From one to five, inclusive, they begin with dots and end with dashes, there being as many dots as the number represented. From six to zero, inclusive, they begin with dashes and end with dots, there being as many dashes as the number exceeds five, zero corresponding to ten in sequence. Q. What is an easy code of numerals in common use in field artillery? A. Send a double A ( — — ) at the beginning and end of num- erals, and represent the numbers by the following system: 6 7 8 9 o e.g., "Deflection 3270:" (numerals follow) — — — (end of numerals). WIG-WAG Q. What are the advantages of the wig-wag over the two-arm semaphore? A. It may be read at a greater distance, and may be sent from the prone position, Q. What is the disadvantage of the wig-wag? A. It is slow. Q. What is the maximum distance at which wig-wag signals can be read ? A. 2000 yards without field glasses; 2500, with field glasses. Q. What is the greatest speed at which complicated messages, such as firing data, should be sent? A, Twenty to twenty-five letters a minute. Q. What is a speed at which all signallers should be able to send and receive? 286 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE A. Fifty to sixty letters a minute. Q. What is the starting position for the wig-wag? A. The flag staff held in both hands, vertical in front of the face, and perpendicular to the ground. Q. What motion represents a dot? A. Dropping the flag from the starting position 90 deg. to the sender's right and returning quickly to the starting position. Q. What motion represents the dash? A. Dropping the flag sharply from the starting position 90 deg. to the sender's left and returning quickly to the starting position. Q. What represents the end of a word? A. Front made by dipping the flag directly to the sender's front and returning to the starting position. Q. How is "End of sentence" indicated? A. Two dips front, front. Q. How is "End of message" indicated? A. Three dips front, front, front. Q. How is the interval between letters indicated? A. By a pause at the starting position. Q. Should there be any pause at the starting position between the elements of a single letter? A. No. Q. In what should the beginner exercise the greatest care? A. In making all motions and positions clear cut. In letters containing successive dots and successive dashes to make the first dot (or dash) and return fully to the starting position before starting the next dot (dash). Be sure that the flag is always vertical in the starting position. Q. What is the best way to send in order to avoid furling the flag? A. Describe an oval or circular motion with the flag for a single dot or dash and a figure eight for dots following dashes, or the reverse. Q. How many and what flags should a signaller carry, and why? A. Two flags; a light one to be used against a dark background, and a dark one to be used against a light background. Q. .How does the sender call a station? A. Signal the call number of the station called, or, if there be no SIGNALLING 287 call number, wave the flag until acknowledged. He may then signal "attention" (L) before starting the message. Q. How does the receiver acknowledge a call? A. By signalling MM interval, followed by the number of the station (if he has one) and the personal signal of the receiver ; the receiver may then send "go ahead transmit" (IX). Q. Explain the use of "interrogatory" ( ). A. "What follows is a question." Q. How does the sender indicate that he has made an error? A. By a series of dots and repeating, starting with the last word correctly sent. Q. How does the receiver indicate that he has missed a word? A. By a series of dots and, if necessary, sending "Interrogatory" ( . . . ^ followed by the last word correctly received. Q. How does the receiver indicate that he has received the message? A. By signalling " Acknowledgment" (R). INSTRUCTIONS Visual Signalling Memorize this code. The two-arm semaphore code is pre- scribed for this test. (See Figure 14). In addition to learning the code it is necessary that each candidate memorize the authorized abbreviations for visual signalling in field artillery as follows: A.. . . Error. AD.. . .Additional. AKT,. . .Draw ammunition from combat train. AL.. . . Draw ammunition from limbers. AM.. . .Ammunition going forward. Ammunition required. AMC. . . At my command. AP.. . .Aiming point. B (numerals) . . . .Battery (so many) rounds. BS (numerals). . . . (Such.) Battalion station. BL.. ..Battery left. BR.. . .Battery right. 288 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE CCC. .. .Charge (mandatory at all times). Am about to charge if not instructed to con- trary. CF. . . .Cease firing. CS. . . .Close station. CT. . . . Change target. D. . . .Down. DF.... Deflection. DT Double time. Rush. Hurry. F. . . . Commence firing. FCL (numerals). . . .On ist piece close by (so much). FL. . . .Artillery fire is causing us losses. FOP (numerals) . . . . On ist piece open by (so much). G . . . . Move forward. Preparing to move forward . HHH. . . .Halt. Action suspended. IX. . . .Execute. Go ahead. Transmit. JI. . . .Report firing data. K Negative. No. KR. . . .Corrector. L .... Preparatory . Attention. LCL (numerals) ... .On 4th piece close by (so much). LOP (numerals) ... .On 4th piece open by (so much). LT....Left. LL....Left, left. LR Left, right. MD Move down. ML Move to your left. MR. . . . Move to your right. MU Move up. N. . . .Annul, cancel. O What is the (R.N., etc.)? Interrogatory. P. . . .Affirmative. Yes. PS. . . .Percussion shrapnel. QRQ. . . . Send faster. QRS .... Send slower. QRT. . . . Cease sending. R. . . .Acknowledgment. Received. RS. . . .Regimental station. RL Right, left. SIGNALLING 28 RR.. . .Right, right. RN.. . . Range. RT.. . . Right. S.. . .Subtract. SCL (numerals). . . . On 2d piece close by (so much). SOP (numerals) . . . .On 2d piece open by (so much). SH.. ..Shell, SI.. . . Site. sss.. . . Support needed. Support going forward. sw.. . . Sweeping. T.. . .Target. TCL (numerals) . . . .On 3d piece close by (so much). TOP (numerals) . . . .On 3d piece open by (so much). U.. ..Up. Y (letter) . . . . Such battery Station. TENTS By ist Lt. H. R. Southall PITCHING AND STRIKING OF HEAVY TENTAGE Q. How is the heavy tentage of batteries usually pitched? A. In two lines. Q. What is the distance between lines of pyramidal tents? A. About 50 feet. Q. Where is the office tent pitched? A. In the front line at the end next to the line of officers' tents. Q. Who are usually assigned to this tent? A. The First Sergeant and the Battery Clerk. Q. Who is assigned to the tent in the rear line in rear of the office tent? A. The Battery Commander's Detail, etc. Q. How are the remaining tents assigned? A. Two to each section. Q. What tents do the Chiefs of Sections and the driver squads occupy? A. The front line. Q. What tents do the gun squads occupy? A. The second line. Q. What is the command to pitch tents? A. PITCH TENTS. Q. How many men pitch a common tent or a wall tent? A. Four. Q. Describe the method of pitching common and wall tents. A. Drive a pin to mark the center of the door; spread the tent on the ground to be occupied; place door loops over the door pin, draw front corners taut, align, and peg them down; the four corner guy pins are then driven in prolongation of the diagonals of the tent and about two paces beyond the corner pins; temporarily loosen the front door and the lee 290 TENTS 291 corner loops from the pins; insert uprights and ridge pole, inserting the pole pins in the ridge pole and in eyelets of tent and fly; raise the tent; hold it in position; replace lee corner loops, and secure corner and fly guy ropes; tighten same to hold poles vertical; drive wall pins thru the loops as they hang; drive intermediate guy pins, aligning them on corner pins already driven. Q. How many men pitch a pyramidal tent? A. One squad. Q. Describe the method of pitching a pyramidal tent. A. The corporal drives a pin to mark the center of the door. The others of the squad unfold the tent and spread it out on the ground to be occupied, pole and tripod underneath. The corporal places the door loops over the door pin; one man goes to each corner of the tent; the two men in front draw the front corners taut, align the front of the tent with the battery line of tents, and peg the corners down; the two men in rear draw the rear corners taut in both directions and peg them down. The same four men drive the four corner guy pins in prolongation of the diagonals of the tent, about two paces beyond the corner pins. Meantime, the other men of the squad, having crept under the tent ; insert the tent pole spindle in top plate, the corporal placing the hood in posi- tion; the pole is raised and the lower end inserted in the tripod socket; the tripod is raised to its proper height. Under the supervision of the corporal the men inside the tent shift the tripod and the men outside the tent handle the corner guy ropes in such manner as to erect the tent with the corner eaves directly above the corner pins. Each outside man, moving to the left, drives pins for the wall loops along one side of the tent and, returning, drives the intermediate guy pins; in both cases the pins are aligned on the corner pins. The inside men assist. Q. Describe the method of pitching a conical wall tent. A. Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two concentric circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and n feet 3 inches. In the outer circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3 feet drive the other guy pin. 292 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE In other respects conical wall tents are erected practically as in the case of a pyramidal tent. Q. What is the command to strike tents? A. STRIKE TENTS. Q. Describe the method of striking common, wall, pyramidal and conical wall tents. A. The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of a conical wall tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle. One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole fastened together, and the re- maining pins collected. Q. How are common, wall, hospital and storage tents folded? A. Spread the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that the bottoms of side walls are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left; fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches ; fold the tent in two by carry- ing the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned- in edge of the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the bundle; tie with the two exposed guys. Q. How is a pyramidal tent folded? A. The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the rear corner wall pins in the ground with the wall loops attached, one man at each corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle. Now carry the right front corner over and lay it on the left rear corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and pull bottom edges even. Then take the right front corner and return to the right, covering the right rear corner. This folds the right side of the tent TENTS 293 on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the front side of the tent. Next carry the left front corner to the right and back as described above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each on itself. Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward toward the bottom of the tent, and continue to fold around the square iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the canvas kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the canvas. Lay all exposed guy ropes along the folded canvas except the two on the center width, which should be pulled out and away from the bottom edge to their extreme length for tying. Now, begin at one end and fold toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and second widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already folded canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, then making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that already folded; turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise. When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package n by 23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8855 cubic inches to store on pack. Stencil the organiza- tion designation on the lower half of the middle width of canvas in the back wall. PITCHING AND STRIKING SHELTER TJ)NTS Q. Describe the various steps in pitching shelter tents. A, When shelter tents are to be pitched the first sergeant, after the horses have been unharnessed, properly secured and cared for, and the guard having been sent to its post, gives the command: In two lines (or In column facing to the right (left)) form for shelter tents. The men, carrying their blanket 19 294 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE rolls, saddlebags, canteens, and haversacks, proceed to the rear of the rear carriage of their sections. Each chief of section causes his section to fall in in column of squads, the driver squad in front, with a distance of about 10 yards be- tween the squads. The squads of each section face the park if the command be In two lines. All the squads face in the designated direction if the command be In column facing to the right (left). In either case 10 yards open space is left in. rear of the rear line of carriages. Each chief of section arranges for pairing odd men in his squads as far as practicable. If, after this has been done, any man in the section, including the chief of section, remains unpaired the first sergeant is notified. Having arranged pairs between the men left over in the several sections the first ser- geant reports the battery formed, and with the guidon, with whom the sergeant pitches, takes his place to the right of the leading squad of the first section. The first sergeant having reported, the officer in charge causes the battery to take intervals as prescribed in The Squad. The men of each squad take intervals, but no attempt is made to close the squads to the right or left. As each man faces to the front he places his blanket roll and other equipment on the ground. The officer aligns the men and commands : Pitch tents. The men open their blanket rolls and take out the shelter half, poles and pins; the front man places one pin in the ground at the point where his right heel, kept in position until this time, was planted. Each then spreads his shelter half, triangle to the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together. Each front man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the halves, and holds the pole upright beside the pin placed in the ground; his rear rank man, using the pin in front, pins down the front corners of the tent on the fine of pins, stretch- ing the canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and drives the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent ; the rear rank man adjusts the pole and the front rank man drives the pins. The rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the right. TENTS 295 As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents of the blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his own half on line with the front guy rope pin. The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents are pitched, should all be of the same length. The guard pitches tents at its post. The cooks' tents are usually pitched at the kitchen. Q. What is done on the command Strike Tents? A. Equipments are removed from the tents ; the tents are lowered, rolls made up, equipments slung, and the men stand at atten- tion in the places originally occupied after taking intervals. ENGLISH— FRENCH CONVERSATION The following phases in combinations and used with the dictionary are simply to help the reader find his way about until he can further master the French language, for example : Can you tell me if you please where I can buy a newspaper ? Pouvez-vous me dire, s'il vous plait, oil je peux acheter un journal? Be sure to make liberal use of " thanks," "please," and "pardon." If numbers are used or the time of day, write them; if you desire to refer to a particular part of the body, point to it. In the phonetic spelling pronounce "aw" as in awning and "zh" as in azure. Yes No Thanks If you please Pardon me Oui non merci s'il vous ; plait Pardonnez-moi wee naw mair-see seel 1300 play pardonnay-mwah Good morning (day) Good evening Goodbye Bon jour bon soir au revoir baw zhure baw swarr awre-vwarr Mr. (sir) Mrs. Miss monsieur madam mademoiselle musseeur maddam madmwahzell Where When Which (what) Which? What? ou quand quel comment? 00 kawn kel commaw? The A At In From le la un une a dans en de d' (before a vowel) luh lah un (as in shunt) ah daw aw duh 296 ENGLISH- FRENCH CONVERSATION 297 He— It il eel You have vous avez voo zavay She elle You are vous etes voo zett I have j'ai zhay I am je suis zhuh swee He has ila eel ah It is il est eel ay Can you tell me Pouvez vous me dire poovay voo muh deer the American camp le camp americain luh caw amerycane a place where une endroit ou ooun ondwah oo to eat a manger ah mawzhay please s'il vous plait seel voo play the town (city) la ville Lah veel Is it? es que? eskuh? We have nous avons two zavon the route to la route a lah root ah the station la gare lah gahr the hospital L'hopital lopeetal I can je peux zhuh puh buy acheter ashtay to drink a boire ah bio ah where is a restaurant (cafe) ou est un restaurant cafe oo ay ■ un restowraw kaffay store a tobacco store epicerie un debit de tabac aypeesery un daybee duh tabback Do you speak english? Parlez-vous anglais? parlay voo awnglay Do you understand Compr enez -vous kawmprenay vco something quelquechose kelkah-shoze sleep dormir dormear jewelry shop bijourie beezhury shoemaker un cordonner un cordawniay I do not understand je ne compr ens pas zhuh nuh kawmpraw pah 1 want (point to the word in the dictionary, of the article desired). je veux zhuh vuh How much Combien? kaivmbyan It is too much c'est trop (cher) say tro share It is good c'est bon say baw It is no good ce n'est pas bon sah nay pah baw 298 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Give me this that What do you want donnez-moi ceci cela Que voulez-vous donnay-mwah sir see sirlah kuh voolay-voo What time (hour) is it Quelle heure est-il kel urr ay -t eel Will you give me some change Voulez-vous me changer ce billet voolay voo muh shawzhay sir beelay Will you write it please voulez-vous Pecrire s'il vous plait voolay voo laycrire seel voo play I am j'ai zhay hot thirsty cold I am tired chaud soif froid je suis fatigue shoad swaff frwah zhuh swee fateegay one — un, une two — deux three — trois four — quatre five — cinq six — six seven — sept eight — huit nine — neuf ten — dix eleven — onze twelve — douze thirteen — treize fourteen — quatorze fifteen — quinze sixteen — seize seventeen — dix-sept eighteen — dix-huit nineteen — dix-neuf twenty — vingt thirty — trente forty — quarante fifty — cinquante sixty — soixante seventy — soixante-dix eighty — quatre- vingts ninety — quatre- vingt-dix hundred — cent thousand — mille million — million Sunday — dimanche Monday — lundi Tuesday — mardi Wednesday — mercredi Thursday — jeudi Friday — vendredi Saturday — samedi January — j anvier February — fevrier March — mars April — avril May — mai June — juin July — juillet August — aout September — septembre October — octobre November — novembre December — decembre ENGLISH-FRENCH CONVERSATION 299 quarter after two — deux heures et quart half past two — deux heures et demie quarter to eleven — onze heures moins le quart today — aujourdhui yesterday — hier tomorrow — demain morning — matin m afternoon — apres-midi m evening — soir m day — jour m night — nuit f Good-morning — bon jour Good evening — bon soir Good-bye — au revoir week — semaine f month — mois m year — an m early — tot late — tard now — maintenant never — jamais next — prochain last — dernier noon — midi m midnight — minuit m 1800 FRENCH WORDS AN AMERICAN ARTILLERYMAN SHOULD KNOW a — un une about — a peu pres — environ above — au dessus de absent — absent accident — accident ache — fairemal acid — acide across — a travers address — adresse adjutant — adjutant adhe si ve — adhe sif advance — avance aeroplane — aeroplane afire — en feu after — apres afternoon — apres-midi again — encore against — contre age— age aim — viser alarmclock — reveille- matin alive — vivant all — tout-tous allies — allies already — deja airship — dirigeable alarm — alerte aloud — haut-a haute voix alone — seul, seule also — aussi aluminum — aluminium always — toujours ambulance — ambulance American — Americain ammunition — munitions and — et angry — en colere ankle — cheville annual — annuel answer — response any — quelque apple: — pomme April — avril arm — bras around — autour arrest — arreter arrive — arriver artery — artere artillery — artillerie artilleryman — artilleur as — aussi, comme ask — demander asphyxiate — asphyxier at — a ate — mange attach — attaque attempt — essayer August — aout attention — attention or garde a vous aunt — tante automobile — automobile avenue — avenue aviator — aviateur axe — hache axle — essieu back — dos m bacon — lard m bad — mechant, mauvais bag — sac m baggage — bagage m balcony — balcon m ball— balle f banana — banane f 300 FRENCH WORDS 301 bandage — bandage m bank — banque f; bord m barbed wire — fil de fer barbele barber — coiffeur m barracks — caserne f basin — cuvette f basket — panier m battle — bataille f bath — bain m battalion — bataillon m battery — batterie f bayonet — baionnette f be — etre bean — haricot m beard — barbe f bed — lit m beef — boeuf m beefsteak — bifteck m beer — biere f beet — bette f before — avant begin — commencer behind — derriere believe — croire bell — cloche f below — sous belt — ceinture f best — le mieux between — entre beyond — au dela de bicycle — bicyclette f big — grand bill — note f billet — (faire le logement) biscuit — biscuit m bit (horse)— mors m bite — mordre black — noir blacksmith — forgeron m blanket — couverture f blind — aveugle blister — ampoule block — bloc blue — bleu boat — bateau m body — corps m boil — bouillir book — livre m boot — botte f bootlaces — lacets m box — boite f boy — garcon m brake — frein m brandy — eau de vie f bread — pain m break — casser breakfast — dejeuner breech — culasse f bridge — pont m bright — brillant bring — apporter broad — large broil — griller brother — frere brown — brun brush — brosser bucket — seau m buckle — boucle f bug — punaise bugle — bugle m or clairon m build — batir bundle — paquet m burn — b ruler burst — eclater but — mais butter — beurre m button — bouton m buy — acheter cat) — fiacre m cabbage — chou m cable — cable m cake — gateau m call — appeler camp — camp m can — bidon m; be able — pouvoir 302 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE candle — bougie f candy — bon-bon m canteen — cantine canvas — toile f cap — casquette f capable — capable captain — capitaine car — voiture cards — cartes a jouer care — soigner carpenter — charpentier m carrot — carotte f carry — porter cartridge — cartouche f castor oil — huile de ricin cat — chat f; chatte f cathedral — cathedrale f Catholic — catholique cavalry — cavalerie cement — ciment m cemetery — cimetiere m cent — sou m centre — centre m chain — chaine f chair — chaise f chalk — craie f challenge — crier qui vive chance — chance f change — changer ; (money) monnaie charge — charger cheap — bon marche check — mandat cheese — fromage m chest — poitrine cheque — cheque m chicken — poulet m chin — menton m child — enfant chisel — ciseau m chocolate — chocolat m choose — choisir chop (animal) — gueule f church — 6glise f cigar — cigare m city — ville f cigarette — cigarette f clean — nettoyer climb — grimper clock — horloge f cloth — drap m clothes — vetements coal — charbon m coat — habit m cobbler — cordonnier m cocoa — coco m coffee — cafe m cold— froid colour — couleur f colors — drapeau m comb — peigne m come — venir compass — boussole f concrete — beton m convenient — commode cook — cuire copper — cuivre m copy — copie f cord — corde f cork — bouchon corkscrew — tire-bouchon corn — mais m corner — coin m cotton — coton; ouate f cost — prix count — compter country — pays courage — courage m cover — couvercle m crank — manivelle f crawl — ramper cream — creme f cross — croix f crow-bar — pince f cucumber — concombre m cup — tasse f FRENCH WORDS 303 cut — couper cyclist — cycliste m close — pres de damp — humide dance — danse f danger — danger m dark — obscur darn — repriser daughter — fille f day — jour m dead — mort deaf — sourd dear — cher deep — profond delay — retarder dentist — dentiste m depot — depot m desk — bureau dessert — dessert m deserter — deserteur m despatch — depeche f destroy — detruire de velop — de velopper diary — journal m dictionary — dictionnaire m different — different difficult — difficile dig, to — creuser dinner — diner m direction — direction m dirty — sale m disease — maladie f disinfectant — disinfectant m distance — distance f ditch — fosse m do, to — faire doctor — medecin m dog — chien m door — porte f i down — en bas drag — trainer drain — drainer draw — tirer dress — habillement dress wounds, to — panser drink, to — boire drive, to — conduire drown, to — se noyer drum — tambour m drunk — ivre dry — sec during — pendan t dust — poussiere f duty — service each — chaque ear — oreille f early — (de bonne heure) east — est m easy — facile eat, to — manger egg — oeuf m elastic — elastique elbow — coude m electric — electrique embankment — levee de terre f embassy — ambassade f empty — vide end — bout m enemy — ennemi m engine — machine f or moteur m engineers — genie m English — Anglais m enough — assez enter, to — entrer dans entrance — entree f entrench — retrancher (se.) envelope — enveloppe f equal — egal equipment — equipement m erase — effacer escape, to — s'en fuir or s'echapper escort — escorte f evening — soir m every — chaque 304 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE exact — exact excuse — excuse f examination — examen m exercise — exercice expect, to — attendre expensive — cher explain — expliquer explode, to — eclater or exploser express — s'exprimer eye — oeil m face — figure f fall, to — tomber family — famille f far — loin farm — ferme f farrier — marchal ferrant m fast — vite fasten — attacher fat — gras father — pere m fault — faute f fee — salaire m feed — nourrir feel, to — sentir fence — barriere f (or cloture) ferry — bac m fever — fievre f few — peu (de) field — champ m fig — figure f field-glass — jumelles f field-gun — canon de campagne fight, to — se battre avec file — lime f (tool) fill — remplir find, to — trouver fine — excellent finger — doigt m fire — feu m first — premier first-aid — premier secours fish — poisson m fit — convulsion f ; ajuster fix — fixer flag — drapeau m flannel — flanelle f flask — bouteille f flat — plat flea — puce f floor — plancher m flour — farine f flower — fleur f fly, to — voler fodder — pature f fog — brouillard m foggy — brumeux follow — suivre food — nourriture f foot — pied m for — pour forbid — defendre ford — gue m forehead — front m foreigner — etranger m forge — forge f forget — oublier forgive — pardonner fork — fourchette f formal — formal forrest — foret f forward — en avant found — trouve free — libre freeze — geler fresh — frais friend — ami m fritter — Beignet (useless) from — de front — devant fruit — fruit m full — plein fun — amusement m (moquerie f) fur — fourrure fuse — fusee f gallop — galoper FRENCH WORDS 305 game — jeu m garden — jardin m garter — jarretiere f gas — gas m gasoline (essence) — essence f gate — portail m gauges — jauge f gay— gai gender — genre generous — genereux German — allemand get, to — obtenir girl — fille glad — content gladden — contenter glass — verre m glue — colle go — aller go away, to — partir goat — chevre f God — Dieu m gold — or m goggle — lunette f (useful for mo- torcycle men) good — bon m; bonne f good-bye — adieu goose — oie f goose berry — groseille grammar — grammaire f grandfather — grand pere m grandmother — grand mere f grape — raisin m grateful — reconnaissant grave — tombeau m gravy — sauce f gray— gris graze — paitre great — grand green — vert grind — moudre grocer — epicier m groom, to — panser ground — terre f grow, to — croitre guard — garde f guide — guide m guilty — coupable gun — canon gunner — canonnier m have, to — avoir hair — cheveux m half — moitie hall — salle f halt — halte halter — licou m ham — jambon m hammer — marteau m hand — main f handkerchief — mouchoir m handle, to — manier (tenir a la main) hang, to — pendre hanger — bourreau m happen — arriver happy — heureux harbor — port m hard — dur harness — harnais m has — a hash — hachis hash, to — hacher hat — chapeau m hatchet — hachette f haversack — havresac hay — foin m he — il m head — tete m heal — guerir heel — talon m hear, to — entendre heart — coeur m heat — chaleur f heavyr — lourd hedge — haie f height — hauteur helmet — casque f 306 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE help, to — aider her — elle hide, to — cacher high — haut hill — colline f him — lui hinge — gond m (charniere) hip — hanche f hire, to — louer his — son, sa, ses hit, to — frapper hold, to— tenir hole — trou m honest — honn ete honey — miel hook — crochet horse — cheval m horse-shoe — fer m hose — tuyau elastique m (rubber pipe) hospital — hopital m hot — chaud house — maison f howitzer — obusier m hungry — faim hurry, to — se hater hurt, to — blesser (faire mal) • husband — mari m I-je ice cream — creme glacee ice — glace f impassable — impraticable impolite — impoli important — important impossible — impossible in — dans inattentive — inatentif inch — pouce m incompeten t — in competent indeed — vraiment indefinite — indefini indirect — indirect infantry — infanterie f infect — infecter influence — influence f inquire — demander insane — fon inside — interieur insignia — insignes m insist — insister instantly — sur-le-champ instead — au lieu de instruct — instruire instrument — instrument m insulate — isoler (electricity) insult — insulte f intelligent — intelligent interesting — interessant internal — interne interpret — interprete interrupt — interrompre interval — intervalle interview — entrevue f into — dans intren chment — re tranchemen t introduce — introduire intrude — s'introduire iodine — iode m Irish — Irlandais m iron — fer m is — est it — il, elle jacket — veste f (useful) jam — confiture f jealous — jaloux jelly — gelee join, to — rejoindre joint — joint m jolly— gai journey — voyage m judge — juge m jump, to — sauter just — juste FRENCH WORDS 307 keep, to — garder kettle (camp) — marmite f key — clef f kerosene — petrole key hole — trou de serrure m kick, to — donner un coup de pied, Ruer kill, to — tuer king — roi m kiss — embrasser kit — equipment m kitchen — cuisine f knapsack — sac m knee — genou m kneel, to — s'agenouiller knife — couteau m knit, to — tricoter knob — bout on m knock, to — frapper knot — nouer know, to- — connaitre lace — cordon f ladder — echelle f lake — lac m lamb — agneau m lame — boiteux lamp — lampe f lancer — lancier m land — terre f landlady — proprietaire language — langue f lard — lard m large — grand last — dernier last, to — durer late — en retard lately — dernierment latrine — latrine f laugh, to — rire laundry — buanderie f lavatory — toilette f law— loi f lay, to— poser; to lay eggs — pondre layer — poseur m lazy — paresseux lead, to — conduire lead — plomb m leaf — feuille f leak — couler lean, to — s'incliner learn, to — apprendre . leather — cuir m leave — conge m (permit) leave, to — partir left — gauche leg — jambe f leggin — gueitres f lemon — citron lemonade — limonade f lend, to — preter lens — lentille f less — moins lesson — lecon f letter — lettre f lettuce — laitue f level — niveau m lever — levier m liar — menteur m liberty — liberte license — licence f lid — couvercle m lie — mensonge m life — vie f life preserver — appereil de sauvc- tage lift, to — lever light — lumiere f light, to — allumer light (weight) — leger lightning — eclair m like, to — aimer likely — vraisemblable limb — membre m limber — avant train m 308 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE lime — citron lime — chaux f limit — limite f linch pin — esse f line — ligne f linen — toile f lining — doublure f link — chainon m lint — charpie f liquid — liquide m listen, to — ecouter litter — litiere f little — petit live — vivre — en vie load — charge f loaf — pain lobby — foyer m lobster — homard lock — serrure f locksmith — serrurier m logic — logique loft — grenier m long — long look, to — regarder look for, to — chercher looking glass — miroir m lookout — vue f loosen — Relacher lose, to — perdre lost — perdu loud — haut love, to — aimer low — bas lozenge — pastille m lubricant — lubrefiant luck — chance lucky — chanceux luggage — bagage m lunch — dejeuner m lung — poumon m macaroon — macaron m machine gun — mitrailleuse f machine shop — atelier de con- struction de machines m made — fait magazine — magasin m make, to — faire magnet — aimant m mahogany — acajou m maid — servante (jeunefille) bonue mail — poste f mail bag — sac de lettres man — homme m manager — directeur m mandolin- — mandoline f manner — maniere mantel piece — chambranle de cheminee manufacture — manufacture manure — engrais m many — beaucoup (de) map — carte f marble — marbre m march, to — marcher mark — marque f market — marche marmalade — marmelade f married — marie martingale — martingale f mask — masque m mass — masse f match — allumette f mattress — matelas m; paillasse f material — materiel matter — matiere, importer may — pouvoir me — moi meal — repas m mean — moyen; signifier, vil measure — mesure f meat — viande f mechanic — mecanicien m medal — medaille f medicin — medicament FRENCH WORDS 309 medical department — service de sante m medicine chest — pharmacie f medium — milieu m meet — se rencontrer melon — melon m melt — fondre member — membre memory — memoire f mend, to — reparer mercy — merci f merry — gai message — message m messenger — messager m mess room — refectoire mess tin — gamelle f metal — metal m methylated spirits — alcool m mid-day — midi m middle — centre m midnight — minuit m might — force f mile — mille m milk — lait m mill — moulin m mince pie — pate de fruits et de viande haches m mine — mine f mint — monnaie f or menthe minute — minute f miss, to — manquer mistake — erreur f mister — monsieur m mix, to — melanger molasses — melasse f money — argent m monogram — monogramme m month — mois m monument — monument m moon — lune f mop — torchon- eponge more — plus morning — matin m 20 mosquito — moustique m most — le plus mother — mere f motor — moteur m mount, to — monter mountain — montagne f mouse — souris f moustach — moustache f mouth — bouche f move, to — mouvoir moving pictures — cinema m much — beaucoup (de) mud — boue f muffler — cache-nez m mule — mulet m multiply — multiplier muscle — muscle m museum — musee m must — devoir mustard — moutarde f mustard plaster — sinapisme m muster — s'assembler mutilate — mutiler mutton — mouton m mutton chop — cotelette de mouton muzzle — bouche f my — mon, ma, mes nail — clou m name — nom m nap — somme napkin — serviette f narrow — etroit natural — naturel navy — marine f near — (to) — pres (de) neat — propre necessary — necessaire neck — cou m need, to — avoir besoin (de) needle — aiguille f neglect — negligence f 310 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE negro — negre neither — nonplus, ni nerve — nerf m nervous — nerveux net — filet m never — jamais new — nouveau news — nouvelle f newspaper — journal m next — apres nice — beau nickel — nickel m night — nuit f no — non nobody — personne noise — bruit m noisy — bruyant none — nul m nonsense — nonsens m noon — midi m nor — ni north — nord m nose — nez m not — ne . . . pas note — note f notebook — carnet m nothing — rien m notice — notice novel — roman now — present nowhere — nulle part numb — transi number — nombre m nurse — infirmiere f nut — noix oar — rame f oats — avoine f oatmeal — gruau d'avoine m obey — obeir oblige — obliger observe — observer occupy — occuper ocean — ocean m odor — odeur f of — de off— de offensive — offensif f offer — offrir office — bureau m officer — officier m often — souvent oil — huile f oil, to— graisser oil can — burette f ointment — onguent m old — vieux olive — olive f omelet — omelette f on — sur once — une fois onion — oignon m only — seulement open, to — ouvrir opera — opera m operate, to — operer operation — operation f opposite — oppose m optician — opticien m orange — orange f orchard — verger m orchestra — orchestre m order — ordre order, to — ordonner orderly — planton m orderly officer — officier d'ordonnance m orderly room — salle des plantons f ordinary — ordinaire m Original — original orphan — orphelin m or f other — autre otherwise — autrement ought — devoir ounce — once f FRENCH WORDS 311 our — notre, nos out — dehors outfit — equipement outflank, to — deborder outhouse — pavilion m outline — contour m outpost — avant-poste m outside — dehors outskirt — environs outwork — ouvrage exterieur oval — ovale m oven — four m over — sur overalls — pardessus m overcoat — capote f or manteau m overtake — atteindre owe — devoir owner — proprietaire pack — paquet pack of cards — jeu de cartes package — paquet m pad — coussinet m page— page f paid — paye pail — seau m pain — douleur f painful — douloureux paint — peinture f pajamas — pyjama palace — palais m pale — pale m pan — casserole f pancake — crepe paper — papier m parade — parade f parallel — parallele parcel — colis m pardon — pardon m park — pare m parlor — salon • part — partie f particular — particuliar party — (mil), peloton m pass, to — passer pass — permission f passage — passage m . passport — passeport m password — mot d'ordre m paste — colle f pasteboard — carton m pastor — pasteur m pastry — patisserie f path — sen tier-route patience — patience f patrole — patrouille f pavement — pave pay — solde f pay, to — payer. pea — pois m peace — paix f peach — peche f pear — poire f pearl — perle f pedal — pedale f pedestrian — marcheur m peel — peau f peg — cheville f pen — plume f pencil — crayon m penknife — canif m penny — sou m people — gens (les) m pepper — poivre m peppermint — menthe f perforate — perforer perhaps — peut- etre permanent — permanent permit, to — permettre persist — persister person — personne f persuade — persuader photograph — photographie f photographic — photographique pick — pic m pickaxe — pioche f 312 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE picket — piquet m pickle — saumure f picture — portrait m pie — pate m piece — morceau m pier — jetee pig — cochon m pile — pile f pill — pilule f pillow — oreiller m pin — epingle f pin (of machine) — cheville f pincers — tenailles f pineapple — ananas m pink — rose pipe — pipe f pistol — pistolet m piston — piston m pit — fosse f pitcher — cruche f pitchfork — fourche f pity — pitie f place — lieu m plain — plaine f plan — plan m plank — planche f plant — plante f plaster — platre m plate — assiette f platform — plate-forme f play, to — jouer please, to — plaire plenty — beaucoup (de) pleurisy — pleuresie pliers — pinces f plow — charrue f plug — bouchon m plum — prune f plumber — plombier m poach — faire bouillir le gerement pocket — poche f pocketbook — porte-feuille m poem — poeme f points — aiguilles (railway; point out, to — montrer poisoned — empoisonne pole — perche f policeman — agent de police m polish — polir polite — poli pontoon — ponton m poor — pauvre position — position f possible — possible post — (mil.) — poste m (office) — poste f postage — port m postage stamp — timbre m postcard — carte postale f postman — facteur m post office order — manda-poste m pot — marmite * f potato — pomme de terre f pouch (cartridge) — cartouchiere f pouch (tobacco) — blague f poultice — cataplasme m pounds — livre f pour — verser powder — poudre f practical — pratique practice — pratique f praise — louange f pray — prier prepare, to — preparer prepay — payer d'avance present (gift) — cadeau m present, to — presenter preserve, to — preserver president — president press, to— serrer pretend, to — pretexter pretty — joli price — prix m priest — pretre m print, to — imprimer printer — imprimeur m FREN'CH WORDS 313 prison — prison f prisoner — prisonnier m private — simple soldat private (place) — prive profile — profil m program — programme m promise, to — promettre prompt — prompt pronounce — pronouncer propeller — propulseur proper- — propre protect, to — proteger protestant — protestant m proud — fier provide, to — fournir provisions — vivres m prune — pruneau m public — public m public house — cabaret m publish — publier pudding — pouding m puff — sounder m pull — tirer pulley — poulie f pulse — pouls m pump — pompe f pumpkin — citronille puncture — crevaison punish — punir purple — pourpre m pursue — poursuivre push, to — pousser put, to — mettre putty — mastic m quality — qualite f quantity — quantite f quarantine — quarantaine f quarrel — dispute f quarry — carriere de pierres quarter — quart m quarter (mil.) — quartier m quarter, to — loger qua)'- — quai m question — questionner quick — vite quickly — vivement quiet — tranquille rabbit — lapin m race — race f rack — ratelier m racket — faire du tapage radish — radis m raft — radeau m raid — incursion rail — barre f railroad — chemin de fer m rain — pluie f raisin — raisin sec. m rake — rateau m rampart — rampart m ramrod — baguette f range (or fire) — portee f range, out of — hors de portee range, within — a portee range finder — telemetre m rapids — rapide m rare — rare rasher of bacon — tranche de lard f raspberry — framboise f rat— rat m rate — prix ration — ration f rattan — rotin m rattle — resonner raw — cru rasor — rasoir m reach — atteindre read, to — lire ready — pret ready made — tout-fait real — vrai really — vraiment rear — arriere m rear guard — arriere garde f 314 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE reason — raison f receipt — recu f receive, to — recevoir reckless— insouciant recognize — reconnaitre recoil — reculer recover — recouvrer recruit — recrue f red — rouge red cross — croix rouge f reduce — reduire reef — recif reel — bobine f referee — arbitre m reference — reference m reflect — faire reflexion reflector — reflecteur m refreshment — rafraichissement refuse, to* — refuser regiment — regiment m register, to — recommander regret — regret m regulate — regler regulation — reglement m rein — rene f reject — rejeter relative — relatif relation — parent m release, to — mettre en liberte relief — secours m relieve, to — secourir remarkable — remarquable remain — rester remedy — remede m remember, to — se souvenir de remount (horse) — cheval de re- monte remove — oter rent — louer repair — raccommoder repair outfit — necessaire de repar- ation m repeat — repeter replace, to — remplacer reply — reponse report — rapport m reporter — rapporteur m report oneself, to — se presenter represent — representer rescue, to — sauver reserve — reserve f reservoir — reservoir m resist, to — resister resort — recourir a respect — respecter rest — repos m restaurant — restaurant m result — resulter retail — vendre en detail retire — se retirer return, to — retourner reunion — reunion f reward — recompenser rhubarb — rhubarbe f rib — cote f rice — riz m rich — riche ride, to — monter a cheval (horseback) ridge — sommet m . rifle — fusil m right — droite f ring (circle) — cercle m; bague, f ring, to — sonner rinse — rincer ripe — mur rise, to — se lever river — flauve m or riviere f road — route f roast — rotir rob, to — voler rocket — fusee f rod — baguette f roll, to — rouler roll call — appel m roof — toit m FRENCH WORDS 315 room — chambre f rooster — coq m root — racine f rope — corde f rosin — resine f rot, to — pourrir rough — rude round — rond route — route f row — ligne m rub — frotter rubber — caoutchouc m rudder — gouvernail m rude — rude rug — tapis m rule — regie m rum — rhum m rumor — rumeur f run, to — courir runaway — fugitif m rupture — rupture f rush — courir a rusty — rouille saber — sabre m sack — sac m sad — triste saddle — selle f saddle cloth — housse f saddler — sellier m safe — sauf safe conduct — sauf-conduit m safety — surete f safety pin — epingle de surete said — dites done sail — voile f salad — salade f salesman — commis m salmon — saumon m salt — sel m salute — salut m same — meme sample — echantillon m sand — sable m sandbag — sac a terre sandpaper — papier sable sandstone — gres m sandwich — sandwich f sap — sape f sapper — sapeur m sarcastic — sarcastique sat — assis satisfy — satisfaire Saturday — samedi m sauce — sauce f saucepan — casserole f saucer — soucoupe f sausage — saucisse f save, to — sauver saw — scie f say, to — dire sawdust — sciure f saw mill — scierie f scabbard — fourreau m scald — echauder scale — echelle f scar — cicatrice scare — effrayer scene — scene f schedule — emploi du temps m school — ecole f scissors — ciseaux m scold — gronder scoop — relle Scotch — Ecossais m scout — eclaireur m scout, to — eclairer scrap book — album m scratch — gratter m scream — jeter un cri screen — ecran m screw — vie f screw driver — tournevis m scrub, to — frotter sea — mer f seal — cacheter 316 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE seam — couture f search, to — chercher search light apparatus — projeteur electrique seashore — cote f seat — siege m second — deuxieme second hand — d'occasion secret — secret m section — section f see, to — voir seed — semence f seem — sembler seize — saisir selfish — egoiste sell, to — vendre send, to — envoyer sense — sens m sentinel — sentinelle f sentry — sentry m sentry box — guerite f separate — separe September — septembre m steeple — clocher f serious — serieux servant — serviteur m serve, to — servir serve out, to — distribuer service — service m set — mettre settle — etablir seven — sept seventeen — dix-sept seventy — soisante-dix several — plusieurs sew, to — coudre sewer — conduit m shade — couleur f shadow — ombre f shaft — brancard m (carriage) shake, to — secouer shallow — peu profond, (of water) bas shape — former share, to — partager sharp — aiguise shave, to — raser she — elle sheath — fourreau m shed — hangar shed, to — repandre sheep — mouton m sheep skin — peau de mouton f sheet — drap m shelf — tablette f shell — obus m shepherd — pasteur m shield — bouclier m shine, to — briller ship — navire m shirt — chemise f shiver, to — frissonner shock — coup shoe — Soulier m shoe string — cordon de Soulier m shoot, to — tirer shop — boutique f shopkeeper — boutiquier m short — court shorthand — stenographic f shot — coup de feu m shoulder — epaule shout, to — crier shovel — pelle f show, to — montrer shower bath — douche f shrapnel — obus a balles f shrink, to — retrecir shut, to — fermer shy — timide sick — malade sick list — etat des malades m side — cote siding — gare d'evitement siege — siege sieve — tamis FRENCH WORDS 317 sight — vue f sight (gun) — appareil de pointage sign — signe m signal, to — faire des signaux signal flags — fanion-signal sign post — poteau indicateur m signature — signature f silence — silence m silk — soie f silver — argent m simple — simple since — depuis sincere — sincere sing, to — chanter sink, to — aller au fond sir — monsieur m sirup — sirop m sister — soeur f sit to — s'asseoir site— site m six — six' sixteen — seize size — taille skate — patin m sketch — esquisse f skin— peau f skull — crane m sky — ciel m slang — argot m slap, to — souffleter slate — ardoise f sled — traineau m sleep, to — dormir sleeper (rail) — traverse f sleepy — sommeil sleigh — traineau m sleeve — manche f slice — tranche f slide, to — glisser sling (arm) — echarpe f sling (rifle) — bretelle f slip, to — glisser slippery — glissant slow — lent sluice — ecluse f small — petit smell — odeur smile — sourire smoke, to — fumer smooth — uni smother — asyphyxier snake — serpent m snare — piege m sneeze — eternuer snipe — becassine f snow shoe — chaussure a neige f snuff — tabac a priser m so — ainsi soak, to — tremper soap — savon m sober — temperant sock — chausszette f socket — emboiture f soda — soude f soft — mou sold — vendre solder, to — souder soldier — soldat m sole — semelle f solid — solide soluble — soluble some — quelque somebody — quelqu'un something — quelque chose sometime — quelquefois somewhere — quelque part son — fils m song — chant m soon — bientot sore — douloureux sorry — triste sort — separer sound — sain f soup — soupe m sour — aigre south — sud m 318 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE souvenir — souvenir m sow — semer spade — beche f spanner — clef anglaise f spar — se disputer spare, to — economiser spare (article) — de rechange spark — etincelle f speak, to — parler special — particulier spectacle — spectacle m speed — vitesse f spell, to — epeler spend, to — depenser spider — araignee f spike — pointe f spill, to — renverser spiral — spirale f spit, to — cracher splint — eclisse f splinter — eclisser spoil, to — abioner spoke, — rayon m sponge — eponge f spool — bobine f spoon — cuillere f sport — amusement m spot — tache f sprain — entorse f spray — brin m spread, to — deployer spring — ressort m spur — eperon m spy — espion m squad — peloton m square — carre squash — ecraser squeak — crier squeeze, to — presser stable — ecurie f staff — etat-major m stage — scene f stain — tacher stair — escalier m stake — poteau m stale — passe stall — stalle f stamp — timbre-poste m stand — halte-la star — etoile f starch — amidon m start, to — partir starve, to — mourir de faim state — etat m station (rail) — gare f station (mil.) — poste m station, to — poster stationer — papetier m stay, to — rester steady — ferme steak — tranche f steal, to — voler steam — vapeur f steel — acier m steeple — clocher m stenographer — stenographe m step, to — marcher stew — ragout m stick — baton m sticking plaster — taffetas d'angleterre m stiff — rigide still — tranquille sting, to — piquer stimulant — stimulant m stirrup — etrier m stock — tronc m stomach — estomac m stone — pier re f stoop — se baisser stop, to — arreter stopper — bouchon m stores (depot) — magasin m stores (supplies) — provisions f storm — tempete f storm (mil.) — assaut m FRENCH WORDS 319 straight — droit strain, to — forcer strap — courroie f straw — paille f strawberry — fraise f stream — courant m street — rue f street car — omnibus m stretcher — brancard m strike, to — frapper strike tents, to — lever les tentes string — ficelle f strip — bande f stripe — galon m strong — fort strop — cuir a raser struggle, to — lutter stud — clou m study, to — etudier stuff — matiere f stumble, to — trebucher stump— troncon f stupid — stupide style — style subject — sujet m subtract, to — soustraire suburban — suburbain subway — metro m sudden — subit suddenly — subitement sue, to — poursuivre suffer — souffrir sugar — sucre m suit — petition f; more often — costume complet sun — soleil m Sunday — dimanche m sunrise — soleil levant m sunset — soleil couchant m superior — superieur m supper — souper m supplies — provisions f supply, to — approvisioner support, to — soutenir sure — stir surface — surface f surgeon — chirurgien m survey, to — in specter suspect, to — soupconner suspend — suspendre swagger — faire le fanfaron swamp — marais m swear, to — jurer sweep, to — balayer sweet — doux sweetbread — ris de Veau m swell, to — grossir swelter, to — etouffer de chaleur swim, to — nager swing, to — agiter sword — epee f sympathize, to — sympathiser syphilis — syphilis f table — table f tack — pointe f tag — ferret m tail — queue f tailor — tailleur m take, to — prendre talk, to — parler tan; - to — tanner tape — ruban m tar — goudron m target — cible f tart — acide taste, to — gouter taxicab — taxi m tea — the m teach, to — instruire team — attelage m teamster — (conducteur d'un at- telage m) charret tier tear — larme f tear, to — dechirer tease, to — taquiner 320 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE teeth — dents m telegram — telegramme m telegraph — telegraphier telephone — telephone m telescope — telescope m tell, to — dire temper, to — temperer ten — dix tent — tente f tent peg — piquet m tent pole — mat m term — terme m terrible — terrible test, to — eprouver than — que thank, to — remercier thanks — merci that — eel, cette, que thaw— degeler the — le, la, Ies theatre — theatre m their — leur them — eux, elles then — done, there — la thermometer — thermometre m these — ces they — ils, elles thick — epais thief — voleur m thin — mince thing — chose f think, to — penser thirsty — avoir soif thirteen — treize thirty — trente this — ce, cette those — ces thousand — mille m thread — fil m three — trois throttle — etouffer through' — a travers throw, to — jeter Thursday — jeudi m thus — ainsi ticket — billet m tidy — bien arrange tie, to — attacher tight- — serre till — jusqu'a time — temps m timetable — indicateur m tin — fer-blanc m tip — pour boire tire (of a wheel) -^j ante f tired — fatigue to— a toast— toast m tobacco — tabac m today — aujourd'hui toilet — toilette f told— dit tomb — tombeau tomorrow — demain tongue — langue f too — trop took — pris tool — outil m tooth — dent m top — sommet m torpedo — torpille f touch, to — toucher tough — solide tourniquet — tourniquet m tow — remorquer towel — essuie-mains m towards — vers tower — tour f town — ville f toy — jouet m track— route f train — train m transfer — transfert m translate — traduire transmission — transmission f FRENCH WORDS 321 transparent — transparent trap — trappe f travel, to — voyager treat, to — traiter tree — arbre m trench — tranchee f triangle — triangle m trick — duperie f trim, to — arranger trip, to — trebucher trot — trot m trouble — troubler trough — auge f trousers — pantalon m trout — truite f truce — treve f truck — camion m true — vrai trust — confiance f truth — verite f try, to — essayer tub — cuve f Tuesday — mardi m tune — air m tunnel — tunnel m turkey — dindon m turn, to — tourner twelve — douze twenty — vingt twist, to — tordre two — deux type — type m typhoid — typhoide f ugly — laid umbrella — parapluie m uncle — oncle m under — sous undergrowth — broussailles f understand, to — comprendre undo, to — defaire unfasten — detacher undress, to — deshabiller unhappy — malheureux uniform — uniforme m union — union f unite — unir United States — Etats Unis university — universite f unlikely — improbable unload — decharger unsaddle — desseler until — jusqu'a up — en haut upon — sur upset, to — renverser upside down — (sens dessus des- sous) a lenvers urine — urine f us — nous use, to— employer useful — utile utensils — ustensiles m vacation — vacance f vaccinate, to — vacciner valise — valise f valley — vallee f value — valeur f vanilla — vanille f vapor — vapeur f valve — soupape f variety — variete varnish — vernis m vaseline — vaseline f veal — veau m vegetables — legumes m vein — veine f verb — verbe m verse — vers m very — tres vest — gilet m veterinary — veterinaire m viaduct — viaduc m victory — victoire f victorious — victorieux 322 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE victuals — victuailles f view — vue f village — village m vinegar — vinaigre m violin — violon m visit — visite f visit, to — visiter vocabulary — vocabulaire m voice — voix f volt — volte f volunteer, to — etie volontaire m wadding — ouate f wagon — fourgon m waist — ceinture f wait, to — attendre waiter — garcon m waitress — fille f wake, to — eveiller walk, to — marcher wall — mur m walnut — noix f want — desirer war — guerre f ward, to — garder warm — chaud warm, to — chauffer warn, to — avertir warp — chaine f was — etait wash, to — laver watch — montre f watch (mil) — garde f watch, to keep — veiller watchword — mot d'ordre m water — eau f water bottle — bidon m water closet — cabinet m watering place (horses) — abreuv- voir m watermelon — pasteque waterproof — impermeable m wave — vague m wax — cire f - way — chemin m we — nous weak — faible weapon — arme f wear, to — porter weather — temps Wednesday — mercredi m wedge — coin m week — semaine f weekly — heb domadaire weep — pleurer weigh, to — peser weight — poids m welcome — bien venue well — puits m well (to be) — aller bien went — allais were — etaient west — ouest m wet — mouille wether — mouton m wheelbarrow — brouette f wheel — roue f when — quand where — ou whether — soit que ... si which — quel, quelle whip — fouet m whiskey — whisky m whistle — sifflet m white — blanc whitewash — blanchir who — qui whose — de qui. . .dont why — pourquoi wide — large width — largeur wife — femme f will — volonte f win, to — gagner wind — vent m windlass — treuil m FRENCH WORDS 323 windmill — moulin a vent window — fenetre f windward — contre le vent wine — vin m wing — aile f winter — hiver m wire — fil m wireless telegraphy- telegraphie sans fil wish, to — desirer with — avec withdraw — retirer withers — garrot m within — dans without — sans woman— femme f wood — bois m wool — laine f word — mot m work — travail m work, to — travailler workman — ouvrier m world — monde m worship, to — adorer worst — le pis worth, to be — valoir wound — blessure f wound, to — blesser wrap, to — envelopper wreck, to — ruiner wrench — clef a Panglaise wrist — poignet m write, to — ecrire wrong — faux Yankee — American m year — annee f yellow — jaune yes — oui yesterday — hier yet — deja yoke — joug m you — vous your — votre zone — zone f BUGLE CALLS. To economize space, the music is written an octavo higher than the trumpet scale, and is adjusted to the scale of the bugle. 1 . First Call Quick Fp=ffiagte g&^#^ IP^ta^iiS 2. Guard Mounting. Quick ^^Fff^F ^^^^ m ^m teffi& ^ffgmm 324 BUGLE CALLS 325 3. Full Dress. Quick. *« jJBJiryiff p IE HI 4. Overcoats. ^P^p^irt 5. Drill. I^^IP^^ff^^ ^ $ m ■W-jnrt-m—-4-W 4 % 4 4 4 4 4 • J J J J— ffnS B T^ p ^^P^^ 21 326 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 7. Water. Quick. 3=*: 8. Boots and Saddles Qwicfc. gffgfgBTt 9. Assembly. Moderate. /r\ B^M m # #^ 10. Adjutant's Call. Quick. ^m^^^^^m BUGLE CALLS 327 11. To the Standard, or to the Color. Quick time. s .*r ■=* EP g m ±±± *--*■ TTETffi m . ^n s D.C ^£^E B3= 12. Fire. (totcfc. /? tf^^m-± £t£g± i *j (* =zarzr3 i JH. A .*f!LA ¥ -*s3: sas Repeat at wxtU 328 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 13. To Arms. $ iffigg *£^=Ff Pf Mt-jg Repeat at wilL i 14. To Horse. Presto. ^BljfpsBi .15. Reveille. Quick, tmtP&^W^ B End. wrnmffm^ BUGLE CALLS 329 Moderate. 16. Retreat. frf^pg^^ rr r r r i f- ^ i . B . jgj^ -* ^ ± -#-*•-* i p^s m f^fg Vi j U fe m i g SP 3TZX S £^£ ^^ P **-# fe fcuXdUf-^H^ f HH 330 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE inni RETREAT— Concluded. /*> ^ m ^ & i s 17. Tattoo. # 4 ' 4 4 — ^m s i ¥ P » LI30 Ig ■ -« 4 4 =# J 4-*-4-4^i- ^p ^-^j^ #* - # # # -•■> ^^^H^^l ^ g^g^g gite ^p ^U-ilL-J-UJ-J 3r* : 3?3?q = F* =i BUGLE CALLS 331 i TATTOO— Continued, /7\ w^{*f g—^m— £ 5Et#— 0.1M.0 •" *[• S' 4 # §i /Ts P=F==S £ n S •J-"«#-^^ ~ ■* — *•# 0—*±M.Z ^gp £-1 /*N ^s §ilggiilj ^33^ ^ll ^ ■# — #-*-* g£ s JUJL ^—4-^-4-0 Z I~f ~ EWfi 3—_ «_ 3=t # 4—4-4 as PEp" P 2 332 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE TATTOO— Continued, J3zgjst|^a ^#%^j m £WP^« -R-l-f sm&s^g, §=ttt?utf^ ^ g^mm ^si Si ^_^i Si r '. l- # — »• I /?> £=§ 1^ Efc=£3i=± # BUGLE CALLS 333 TATTOO — Concluded, ^ ^2f T-^- :J±* i -T-7- t-9- ■ *_-?£ # 1 j^= i^ttr£3-j JJT1 3= 18. Taps. fe g ^- P i r Pir fe # j^PE j- Jirpl 19. Mess. s^g 334 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 20. Sick. Quick. «? % ^ m i 21. Church Call. Slow. -. ?* f 1 / » P — =g ^ ~ m 4 . 0- i * „ * - * i ? #— F- QJiL^U" fi + f* ^J l ltj-U 22. Recall. Moderate. £ g gggjp ii BUGLE CALLS 335 23. Issue. Quick. mmm$ Up ^?s ^^^m i 24. OFFICERS' CALL. m ft: £ m i 3^£=rn 1 p ^ 25. Captains* Call. # , ^JL fi ^f[\t^ L. '0 ^ iy*y Mf ffi as 26. First Sergeants' Call. 3 Quick. s m 'd i tmr w m] ^ ^ 336 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 27. Fatigue. Quick. -fi — m. f - P ^h^ip mi v i # — <•■ s ^fJ^M&^^ ^ r gJ f ft ^^ 28. School. Quicfc. £3=a ■#-# >-* £B: =£* ■#-# - BUGLE CALLS 29. The General.. 337 Quick. 3p ^-g^ ^l^^^P njpmq ^^^gs ■#-#■ -£ *- Pi^^^rajp p^sggjggp^p ^.-j^^g^fc^^ ^e* 30. Call to Quarters. Slow. SE > p • * =?= ^ 3 i=F g g l r * f t- T~riT FF ? FF* ^ r? ? S ^^ I /T\ /T\ /T\ ^ % 4S350 — 16 IX DRILL SIGNALS. 31. Attention. Slow. ?—r- /?\ ±=A 32. Drivers Prepare to Mount. MOUNT. fe^psig 1 33. Drivers Prepare to Dismount. DISMOUNT. iggi ^gt -*- 34. Cannoneers Prepare to Mount. Quick. MOUNT. -4 — g ! » — •■ &= HH 35. Cannoneers Prepare to Dismount. Quick, DISMOUNT. 338 DRILL SIGNALS 339 36. Forward. i* Slow. MARCH. I 37. Halt. $rrp~t 38. Walk. Slow. MARCH. 39. Trot. 40. Gallop. MARCH. f=^M-f-f- r~t~f p -h£-»- a^ i 41. Guide Right. Slow. /^ w ¥=^ 340 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 42. Guide Left. SlOW. ,7^ m ±=t i 43. Guide Center. SlOW. /-A ^E l 44. Countermarch. Moderate. Slow. 45. Right About. MABCH. -fi 1 18 * -r-f 2 - 3 — T S 46. Left About. MARCH. i Slow.- EE -<£?- 47. Column Right. Slow. jgiap MARCH. 1 DRILL SIGNALS 341 48. Column Left. Slo V 000 ^^m MARCH. I 49. By the Right Flank. MARCH, Moderate. _ £ £ Y* 1 g 50. By the Left Flank. MARCH. 1 Moderate* ^E^m 51. Right Oblique. i Slow. MARCH. ffi *— w^— £ 52. Left Oblique. Slow. i MARCH. /TV -a~ in 53. Right Front into Line. Moderate, i^J^p iESii /T\ MARCH. 22 342 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 54. Left Front into Line. Moderate. MARCH. | ^fi£ & -i^ ^E ^^^^ m Moderate. 55. On Right into Line. 4*-4 m s MARCH. — & — Moderate. f^S£g 56. On Left into Line. MARCH. 3=4- ±4-4- $ 57. Battery Right Wheel. Quick. 3^33 *^ — 4—4—d 1 4—4—4 T~ ¥ £££ March. «-£? m-9 ^UCTg ^ 58. Battery Left Wheel. Quick. 3 » 9 t P . f # # 3 ft ft *- 3 y^™ 3 F^^^ s a f-f-f-F-rr- 3 March. tfr= U.I.fT f- J J J — . — «$) DRILL SIGNALS 343 59. Pieces Front. Moderate. MARCH. is /CN 1 /TN f P P fi ff=FF W -^r^-^ iF*=* 60. Caissons Front. MARCH. Moderato. _ ^ 1 /rs - 5 ^^-^- 61. Double Section, Right Oblique. « -L « 62. Double Section, Left Oblique Quick. -*-*- MARCH. 5 S r *\ - i * s )4 ^d m ' g ^ 63. Flank Column, Right Oblique. Moderate, tuPrlnrptigm m 1 « MARCH. .. ,/V ■ r 1 A # • i ■■■ 1 ■>* 1 -4C A i -i i X 1 >s -> 1 344 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 64. Flank Column, Left Oblique. Moderate. £ m =p^ n~T~r is MARCH. S9V . 1 /S\ -fc* ip^E i ^ £=£ # =*- Moderate. 65. Right by Sections. /T\ MARCH. -jfc K 3-rr^ LJ ' ■ — 66. Left by Sections. MARCH. Moderate. 1 /tn 3 ar-3- ■ * ■ » r - £§ ^ ^ 67. Form Double Section Line. I Quick. 2 ,r gg yf *-^ MARCH. 3 ^T\ /T\ a ffc *| g ffip j WZJf. Stz^^J 68. Route Order. Moderate. ^ ^m MISCELLANEOUS BUGLE CALLS. 69. PRESIDENT'S MARCH. Quick time, 56E3J Jif gl ^ i | -.f f t ffir g+t Wt i ±t-r+fc§ ft f e kff n^f r^ g^ *J i 3=*? S >C.' # "* a^ * g g # - # Pfr jaifrfff^ E^ 345 346 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 70. General's March. Quick time. pT) . V/ ._ll — J * g-gzij. gx g g" i se § m + #■* * mm & | i ZIg ^ in j— y /r\ ^ m 71. Flourishes for Review. MISCELLANEOUS BUGLE CALLS 347 I Quick. 72. Sound Off. =s ,J P p P p t± nff r r r r | i B 3 'Irf ff 1 # ftjj^aieiLqa m. 3-#-3 J ^ I j ip i m§ i j tp+r-* 73. Rogue's March. Qtucfc time Repeat at mil 348 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 74. Funeral March. Very slotf. fsr^ T ^rj^ n - icauar b fr^-eccr ±* X^f"^^ * A fyr.tftft MJ j_ l j- I J.JJ.jJ ^ I 3Z j2- > |GCgf J ?=e: & tm IlZZ-^EL s^g i i g -«*■ p i pe LDJ J J I ftff/f-iF I 1 32= -<^- i Repeat at will* w -&- i QUICKSTEPS. Quick. 75. Quickstep No. 1. §r r/u jxoEfa t d-^f^f ^f End. §rTOfc# i End. m .End. i 349 350 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 76. Quickstep No. 2. $jj£f=ftgEg$ fimm&^ lj^ fe£asjgigap | pgg3 pmm=m ^=rmmm 77. Quickstep No. 3 ^tei^m^^m t»==t*=p: fep%s^ a?e jrST-Fq^ fegjgg^i M #_ wm z T^-tm^ -*=* QUICKSTEPS 351 T8. Quickstep No. 4. ^^M j I 1 #1 jj-jl " #1. mf mfim~l*- W^%^3jS^^TJ LU |i_g ^^ fiS #■ • #■ -i r-^- 3£ ^sy ^g? ^t A&^fe^ s few^fe 79. Quickstep No. 5, m ^fi ul^^ m 352 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 80. Quickstep No. 6. fe fegE^Ell i i i a- ^fj ^Pp^^^E^^^W^ ^$£0 5: m 5 "j g . yy VJ— =P- fagg^a^ -*-* 1 81. Quickstep No. 7. $ 3gg£5^ ^Bi QUICKSTEPS 353 82. Quickstep No. a F Trumpet. p^-a * r*~?\r ff' tzm=ffy — p£ 9 O Crook. S£ S7 X F ^-* V * ' V - |rf££±|jB^^^ i I ft f i ff? =1 f lltll ll g— g^g--g rf — rf-fTffff^n 1 r?T — r ^Fl w >: lJ- 1 LLW — — L i = — r— — i rffrTf r^—^Ff t g} U v V \ -H^3- ?a — Second time. End. i-g — fJL^ jjF^ -W=*h $£ |f=f^ -* — n- -*— *- -y-~-*-*h Da Capo. -j-rf 4*-**=?^^a$ S 354 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 83. Quickstep No. 9. F Trumpet. w^mm C Crook. ■a- P End. ^m sg ¥-* I ^JL 1 r^ ffl % ?m A 0. £ Quickstep No. 9— Concluded. i HsSfeEEi fa ^^PS^ dfc-f- S S -£=IZjE s fee in i£r ^-S7-^±^ ffefffl ~ .Da Capo. f C >• •* Tt* IN • ^-^--J 1 — 1 LP -P — f P ? f> — - J %i_ ISttfctE ^f QUICKSTEPS 355 84. Quickstep No. 10. Quick. F Trumpet. 6— a : ^£ ^m p C Crook. £ £=*-*- j£?ltf. fe ^# ±^ -f-7-^-9- UN — 3^£r, , i ^i -& j §E= = S a : #. ^ n D.C. -3-» «• m >»f TABLES OF MEASURE AND VALUE 40" 130 = "50 40 120 — MO 30. > - — IQO 90 30 — 80 __ 20 70 20 M & 6 16 — "Q- o Q 2 -Ul. -Q. -<. "H" •z- -UJ- s <■ -UJ- ard 9 sq feet 836 Square pole 25 mq., 2919 Rood 40 sq . poles 10 acres, 1167 Acre 4 roods hect., 404671 Square mile 2kiL, 5989477 French Are. 100 metres car. 3.954 poles 4 poles 10 ares 100 metres car. 1 rood = 24 acre Hectare 100 acres 2, 471 acres 2% acres Cubic Measure English Cubic inch ma, 000016380 Cubic foot ma, 028315 Cubic yard ma, 7645 40 cubic feet 1 mc.j 132 French f 61028 . 000 cubic inches 1 metre cube \ 35 .520 cubic feet I 1 . 308 cubic yard Measures of Capacity English ' Gill Pint Compara- tive table 4 gills Comparat v • decimals lit., 141 983 lit., 567935 Liquides < Quart Gallon Barrel Bushel 2 pints 4 quarts 32 gallons 8 gallons 1 lit., 135870 4 Ht., 543458 145 lit., 390656 36 lit., 34760 Dry Sack 3 bushels 109 lit., 043 Quarter 8 bushels 290 lit., 781 L Caldron 12 sacks 1308 lit., 516 French Litre 1.76 pint s 0.22 gallons Decalitre 2.201 gallons Hectolitre J 22.01 gallons \ 2% bushels 362 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Weights roughly 56 of a dram roughly 2% drams roughly $Yi drams roughly $}i drams roughly 11 drams roughly 14 drams roughly 1 ounce 12 drams roughly 2 ounces 10 drams roughly 3 ounces 7H drams roughly 5 ounces 3 drams roughly 8 ounces 1 1 drams roughly 1 lb. r ounce 6 drams roughly • 1 lb. 10 ounces roughly 2 lb. 2 ounces 11M drams roughly 10 lb. 13 ounces 10 drams roughly 21 lb. 11 ounces 3 drams roughly 32 lb. 8 ounces 12 drams roughly 43 lb. 6 ounces 7 drams roughly 54 lb. 4 ounces roughly 108 lb. 8 ounces roughly 162 lb. 12 ounces roughly 220 lb. roughly 9 cwt. 95 lb. roughly 19 cwt. 77 lb 1 gramme 5, grammes, 10 grammes, 15 grammes, 20 grammes, 25 grammes, 50 grammes, 75 grammes, 100 grammes, 150 grammes, 250 grammes, 500 grammes, 750 grammes, 1 kilogramme, 5 kilogrammes, 10 kilogrammes, 15 kilogrammes, 20 kilogrammes, 25 kilogrammes, 50 kilogrammes, 75 kilogrammes, 100 kilogrammes, 500 kilogrammes, 1000 kilogrammes, TABLES OF MEASURE AND VALUE 363 Table of Comparative Money Values French English German American Fr. C. £ Sh. D. M. Pf. OI 0.4 farthing % 05 y 2 d. 04 IO id. 08 20 2d. 16 25 2d.y 2 20 50 5d. 40 75 iy 2 60 iod. 80 i 1 iod. i 25 1 . . 2 7M 1 60 2 50 2 .... 2 3 aH 2 40 4 3 2V 2 3 20 5 4 4 20 6 4 9H 4 80 7 5 7M 5 60 8 6 4 % 6 40 9 7 2y 2 7 20 IO 8 8 20 ii 8 9% 8 80 12 9 734 9 60 13 ro 4% 10 40 14 II 2\i 11 20 15 12 .... 12 20 16 12 Q% 12 80 17 13 7M 13 60 18 14 4% 14 40 19 15 2^ 15 20 20 16 16 25 1 16 20 IOO 4 16 80 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 20 i H I 2 4 5 10 15 20 25 40 50 60 80 20 40 60 80 20 40 60 80 20 40 60 80 00 00 00 RANGE TABLES 365 RANGE TABLES Range Table for 3 Inch Gun Muzzle Velocity, 1 700 feet per second Weight of Projectile 15 pounds. Normal Corrector, 30 Angle of "3 +» '0 Id > a "a u Range change due to 100-yard range change Maximum ordinate S e bO G d s u d a 13 US 1=! £ O O ftg M d > 13 u «4-l O bo a 'o +» .a '53 tf Q ft w H M *o $S ti W H Q Yards Mils Mils 1 on Ft. per sec. Yards Yards ^0 .S"8 g Yards Yards Sec. Mils 100 2 2 595 1647 61 24 1.4 4.2 50 0.2 0.0 200 3 4 282 1595 54 24 1.6 4.2 101 0.4 0,0 300 5 6 178 1547 52 24 1.8 4.2 152 1 0.5 0.3 400 7 8 127 1501 50 24 2.0 4.3 203 1 0.7 0.3 500 9 10 97 1459 48 23 2.1 4.4 255 1 1.0 0.4 600 II 13 77 1418 46 23 2.2 4-4 307 2 1 .2 0.5 700 13 16 63 1379 44 23 23 4-4 361 3 1.4 0.6 800 16 19 53 1343 42 23 2.4 4- A 4i5 4 1.6 0.6 000 18 22 45 1308 40 23 2.5 4.4 469 5 1.8 0.7 1000 21 26 39 1276 38 23 2.6 4-4 524 6 2.1 0.8 1100 24 30 34 1245 37 23 2.7 4-4 579 7 2.3 0.9 1200 27 34 30 1216 36 22 2.8 4-5 634 9 2.6 1 .0 1300 30 38 27 1189 34 22 2.9 4-6 690 11 2.8 1 .1 1400 33 42 24 1 164 33 21 3-0 4-7 745 13 3-1 r.3 1500 36 47 22 1 140 32 21 3-1 4-8 801 15 3-3 1.4 1600 39 5i 20 1118 31 21 32 49 858 18 3-6 i.d 1700 42 56 18 1096 30 , 20 33 4-9 914 21 39 1.8 1800 45 62 16 1076 29 20 35 50 971 24 4-2 1.9 1900 49 67 15 1057 28 20 3-6 5-0 1028 27 4-5 2.0 2000 52 73 14 1039 27 20 3-7 5-1 1084 31 4.7 2.1 2100 56 78 13 1022 26 20 3-8 5-1 1141 35 5.0 2.3 2200 60 84 12 1005 26 19 3-8 5-2 1197 39 5-3 2.5 2300 64 91 II 990 26 19 3-9 5-2 1253 44 5.6 2.7 2400 68 97 10 975 25 19 39 5-2 1310 49 5.9 2.9 2500 72 103 10 961 25 19 4.0 5-3 1366 54 6.3 3 1 2600 76 109 9 949 25 19 4.0 53 1422 60 6.6 33 2700 80 116 9 937 24 19 4.1 5-3 1478 66 6.9 34 2800 84 123 8 925 24 19 4.2 5-4 1534 72 7.2 3.6 2900 88 130 8 915 23 19 4.3 5-4 1590 79 7.5 3.8 3000 92 137 7 905 23 18 4-4 5-4 1646 86 7.8 4.0 366 RANGE TABLES 367 Range Table for 3 Inch Gun (Continued) Muzzle Velocity, 1700 feet per second Weight of Projectile 15 pounds. Normal Corrector, 30 Angle 13 ««• 0) ft 55 '0 O 13 > Is g fi Ih 0) H Range change due to 100-yard range change Maximum ordinate bo B bo G i ft Q "3 ft 2«~ S > H 1 point of corrector Mils of eleva- tion O O O 2° bo M-4 .S 3 - Yards Mils Mils 1 on Ft. per sec. Yards Yards go Yards Yards Sec. Mils 3100 97 144 7 897 23 18 4-4 5-5 1701 93 8.1 4.2 3200 101 151 7 889 22 18 4-5 5-5 1757 100 8.5 4.4 3300 106 158 6 881 22 18 4.6 5-5 1813 108 8.8 4-6 3400 no 166 6 874 21 18 4-7 5-5 1868 117 9-i 4-8 3500 115 174 6 867 21 18 4.8 5-6 1924 126 9-5 5-0 3600 120 181 5-5 861 20 18 - 4-9 5.6 1980 135 9-8 5-2 3700 125 190 5-3 855 20 18 5-0 5-7 2035 145 10.2 5-4 3800 130 198 5-1 849 19 18 5.1 5-7 2091 156 10.5 5-6 3900 135 206 4-9 843 19 17 5-2 5-7 2147 167 10.9 5-8 4000 140 215 4-7 837 18 17 5-3 5-7 2203 178 n. 2 6.1 4100 146 224 4-5 831 18 17 5-4 5-8 2259 190 11 .6 6.3 4200 151 233 4-3 825 18 17 5-5 5-8 2315 203 12.0 6.6 4300 157 242 4.1 820 18 17 5-7 5-8 2371 216 12.4 6.8 4400 163 251 4.0 814 18 17 5-8 5.9 2427 230 12.7 7-1 4500 168 260 3-8 808 17 17 5-9 5-9 2484 244 13. 1 7-4 4600 174 270 3-7 803 17 I7> 6 6 2541 259 13.5 7-8 4700 180 280 35 798 17 17 6 6 2597 275 13.9 8.1 4800 187 290 3-4 793 16 17 6 6 2654 291 14-3 8.4 4900 193 300 33 788 16 16 6 6 2711 308 14.7 8.8 5000 199 310 3-2 783 16 16 6 6 2768 325 15- 1 9.2 5100 205 321 3-1 778 16 16 6 6 2825 343 15-5 9-5 5200 212 332 3-0 773 15 16 7 6 2882 36l 15.9 9.9 5300 218 SA2 2.9 768 15 16 7 6 2940 38i 16.3 10.2 5400 225 353 2.8 764 15 16 7 6 2997 ' 401 T677 + io75 SS00 232 365 2.7 759 15 15 7 6 3054 421 17. 1 10.9 5600 239 376 2.6 755 14 15 7 6 3112 442 17.611.2 5700 246 387 2.5 751 14 14 7 7 3169 464 18 .0 n .5 5800 253 398 2.4 747 14 14 7 7 3227 486 18.4 n .9 5900 260 410 2.4 744 14 13 7 8 3284 509 18.9 12.2 *6ooo 267 422 2.3 740 13 13 8 8 3342 533 19.4 12.5 368 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Range Table for 3 Inch Gun {Continued) Muzzle Velocity, 1 700 feet per second Weight of Projectile 15 pounds. Normal Corrector, 30 Angle of Mils ' Mils Range change due to Ft. per sec. Yards Yards 1 oo-yard range change 3§ o g Maximum ordinate bo Yards Yards 275 283 290 298 306 314 323 33i 339 348 357 36S 375 384 393 402 d.12 422 432 442 434 446 A58 470 483 496 508 521 534 548 56i 575 588 602 617 631 645 659 674 689 2 .2 2.1 2.1 2.0 1 .9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.6 i.5 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.2 r.2 1.1 1 .1 736 733 729 726 723 720 717 7i4 711 708 706 703 700 698 695 692 690 687 684 682 13 13 13 13 12 12 12 12 12 11 1 1 1 1 1 11 10 10 10 10 12 11 10 9 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 9 9 10 12 14 17 3400 557 3458 583 3516 609 3574 636 3632 663 3691 692 3750 722 3809 752 3868 784 3927 817 3986 850 4046 885 4105 921 4165 957 4226 995 4286 1033 4347 1073 4407 1114 4468 1156 4530 1199 Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds 100 I 2 565 1681 62 35 1.6 2.8 50 0.2 0.1 200 3 3 282 1662 59 35 1.7 2.8 100 1 0.4 0.1 300 5 5 187 1644 57 35 1.8 2.8 150 1 0.5 0.2 400 7 7 139 1625 55 35 1.8 2.8 200 2 0.7 03 500 8 9 no 1607 54 35 1.9 2.8 251 2 0.9 0.4 600 10 II 91 1588 53 35 1.9 2.8 301 3 1 .1 0.4 700 12 13 77 1570 52 34 1.9 2.9 352 3 1 .2 0.5 800 14 15 66 1552 51 34 2.0 2.9 403 4 1.5 0.6 900 16 17 58 1535 50 34 2.0 2.9 454 4 1.7 0.7 1000 18 20 5i 1517 49 34 2.1 2.9 505 5 19 0.7 RANGE TABLES 369 Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun {Continued) Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds Angle of '0 Range change due to 100-yard range change Maximum ordinate B O 1 CO be C 3 cU P "cS ft 0.2 B > O O 1 > M-l d M .2 1" Points of cor- rector « u Range change due to i 00-yard range change Maximum ordinate bfl B bo C u -p ft Q ft US' ■8.8. 'Sfc M a! > £ 13 m |8 u O • So •0 g fl bo R d P4 *o P Yards Mils Mils 1 on Ft. per sec. Yards Yards Yards Yards Mils 7100 228 332 3-0 927 21 28 4.7 35 3894 509 19.0 10.9 7200 233 339 2.9 925 21 28 4.7 3-5 3949 528 19.4 11 .2 7300 237 346 2.8 922 21 28 4.8 35 4005 548 19.7 11 .4 7400 242 353 2.8 919 21 28 4.8 3-6 4061 568 20.1 n. 7 7500 247 36i 2.7 917 21 28 4-9 3.6 4116 589 20.4 11 .9 7600 252 369 2.6 916 20 28 5-0 3-6 4172 610 20.8 12 .2 7700 257 377 2.6 914 20 28 5-1 3-6 4228 631 21 .2 12.5 7800 262 385 2.5 912 19 28 5-2 3-6 4283 652 21.5 12 .7 7900 267 393 2.5 910 19 28 5-3 3-6 4339 673 21 9 13.0 8000 272 401 2.4 908 19 28 53 3-6 439 • 695 22 .2 13-2 8100 277 409 2.4 907 19 28 5-3 3-6 4450 719 22.6 13.5 8200 283 417 2.3 906 19 28 5-3 3-6 4506 744 23.0 13-7 8300 288 425 2.3 904 19 28 5-4 3-6 4562 769 23.4 14-0 8400 293 433 2.2 903 19 28 5.4 3-6 4617 794 23.7 14-3 8500 299 441 2.2 902 19 27 5-4 3-7 4673 820 24.1J14.6 8600 304 449 2.1 901 19 27 5-4 3-7 4729 847 24-5 14-9 8700 310 457 2.1 900 19 27 - 5-4 3-7 4784 875 24.9.15.2 8800 3i5 465 2 .0 899 18 27 5-4 37 4840 902 25-2 15.5 8900 320 473 2.0 898 18 27 5-5 3-7 4896 930 25.6 15.8 9000 326 481 2.0 897 18 27 5-6 3-7 4951 958 26 .0 16 . I 9100 332 489 1.9 895 18 27 5-7 3-7 5007 988 26.4 16.4 9200 338 497 f.9 894 17 27 5-8 3-7 5063 1018 26.8 16.7 9300 344 506 1.8 893 17 27 5-9 3-7 5118 1049 27.2,17.1 9400 349 515 1.8 893 17 27 6,0 3-7 5174 1080 27.7 17.4 9500 355 524 1.8 892 16 27 6 3-7 5230 1113 28.1 17.8 9600 362 533 1.7 892 16 26 6 3-8 5285 1 147 28.5 18. I 9700 368 542 1-7 892 16 6 5341 1181 29.8 18.5 9800 375 551 1.7 892 15 7 5397 1217 29. 4118. 8 9900 381 560 1.6 892 15 7 5452 1253 29.8 19.2 10000 388 569 1.6 892 14 7 5508 1291 30.2 19.5 372 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun (Continued) Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds Angle of 3 «4-l O O P. CO > G U H Range change due to 100-yard range change Maximum ordinate ,G bo 0) a bo G u U a Pi > . +2 *d In O > B S3 3 c fi w a 3 rt rt £* > Yds. Yds. Yds. Yds.; Yds. Sec. Divs, Mils Mils 1 on F.S. Ft. 100 200 1 300 1 400 1 46 500 2 7 600 700 800 900 1000 2 29 4.6 2 51 4.6 4.9 4-8 4.8 4.7 4.7 13 4-5 35 4.5 58 4-4 2.2 4.4 6.6 8.8 10.9 13.0 15. 1 17.2 19.3 21.4 0.1 0.5 0.2 1.1 0.3 1-7 0.4 2.3 0.6 2.9 0.8 3.6 1.0 4.3 1.2 5-0 1.5 5-8 1.8 6.6 0.35 0.3 0.27 0.68 0.6 0.57 1. 01 0.9 0.87 1.34 1.2 1. 17 1.68 1.5 I 1.48 2.36 2.71 3.06 3-41 0.05 0.08 0.11 0.15 0.19 1.9 1-79 0^.23 2.3 2.10 0.27 2.7 2.4i ! 0.31 3.1 j 2.73 0.35 3o 3.05 0.39 19 156.3 40 76.5 1 52.9 22 38.8 43 30.1 893 888 883 878 873 3 2.701.004 2 5 24.7 868 24 2 27 21.2 863 29 2 49 18.7 858 j 35 3 11 16.7 853 : 42 3 33 15.0 848 50 2.69 1.008 2.68 1. 012 2.67 1. 016 2.66 1.020 2.65 1.023 2.65 1.026 2.64 1.029 2.63 1.032 2 . 62 1 . 035 24 374 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table (Continued) Shell and Shrapnel [Zone 3, M. V. 900 feet per second] I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 bO Pi d i a) < > 1 < +1 0.2 3$ ft < < H OPh < bo aJ -So <1 +3 3 O B bo .2 a; N ft Q p .2 O OT Q R «-M O "Si < s 13 a> P. to *o o 13 > 13 a 1 H 1 u fl 5. *o w > X/i 13 > Yds. / Yds. Yds. Yds Yds. Sec. Divs Mils Mils / 1 on F.S. Ft. 100 4 21 4-4 23.4 2.1 7.4 3-77 3.9 3-37 0.43 3 56 13.6 843 59 2.62 1.037 200 4 44 4.3 25.4 2.4 8.3 4.13 4.3 3.70 0.47 4 19 12.4 838 69 2.61 1.039 300 5 7 4-3 27.4 2.8 9.2 4.49 4.7 4.03 0.51 4 42 11. 4 833 80 2.61 1. 041 400 5 30 4.3 29.4 3-2 10. 1 4.86 5.1 4.36 0.55 5 5 10.5 828 92 2.60 1.043 500 5 53 4.2 31.4 3-6 11. 1 5.23 5-5 4.70 0.59 5 28 9-7 823 105 2.60 1.044 600 6 17 4.2 33.4 4.0 12. 1 5.60 5-9 5.04 0.63 5 52 9.0 8ifr 120 2.60 1.045 700 6 41 4.2 35.3 4-5 13. 1 5-97 6.3 5.38 0.67 6 16 8.4 814 137 2.60 1.046 800 7 5 4.1 37-2 5-0 14.2 6.35 6.7 5.73 0.71 6 40 7.9 810 156 2.59 1.047 900 7 30 4.1 39.i 5 5 15.3 6.73 7-1 6.08 0.75 7 4 7.4 806 177 2.59 1.047 2000 7 55 4.0 41.0 6.1 16.4 7. 11 7.5 6.43 0.79 7 29 7-0 802 200 2.60 1.046 100 8 20 4.0 42.9 6.7 17.6 7-49 7-9 6.79 0.83 7 54 6.6 798 224 2.60 1.045 200 8 45 4.0 44-8 7.3 18.8 7.88 8.3 7.15 0.87 8 19 6.3 794 249 2.60 1.044 300 9 10 3.9 46.7 7.9 20.1 8.27 8.7 7-51 0.91 8 44 6.0 790 276 2.61 1.042 400 9 36 3.9 48.6 8.5 21.4 8.66 9.0 7.88 0.95 9 10 5-7 786 305 2.61 1.040 500 10 2 3.8 50.5 9.2 22.7 9.05 9.4 8.25 0.99 9 36 5.4 782 335 2.62 1.037 600 10 28 3-8 S2.4 9.9 24.1 9.45 9.8 8.62 1.03 10 2 5-1 778 366 2.63 1.034 700 10 55 3.7 54-3 10.6 255 9.85 10.2 9.00 1.07 10 29 4-9 775 398 2.64 1.030 800 11 23 3-7 56.2 11. 3 26.9 10.25 10.6 9.38 1. 11 10 56 4.7 772 432 2.65 1.026 900 11 50 3.7 58.1 12. 1 28.4 10.66 11. 9.76 1. 15 11 23 4.5 769 467 2.66 1. 021 3000 12 17 3.6 60.0 12.9 29.9 11.07 11. 4 10.15 1. 19 11 50 4-3 766 503 2.67 1. 016 100 12 45 3.6 61.9 13.7 31.4 11.48 11. 8 10.54 1.23 12 18 4.1 763 540 2.69 1. 010 200 13 13 3.6 63.8 14.6 33-0 11.90 12.2 10.94 1.27 12 46 3.9 760 578 2.71 1.003 300 13 41 3-5 65.7 15.5 34.6 12.32 12.7 11.34 1. 31 13 14 3.7 758 618 2.73 0.995 400 14 9 3.5 67.6 16.4 36.2 12.74 13. 1 11.75 1.35 13 42 3.6 756 660 2.75 0.986 500 14 38 3.5 09.5 17.4 37-9 13.17 13.5 12.16 1.39 14 11 3.5 754 704 2.78 0.976 600 15 8 3.4 71.3 18.4 39.6 13.60 14.O 12.58 1.43 14 40 3-4 752 750 2.81 0.965 700 15 37 3.4 73.1 19.4 4i.3 14.03 14.5 13.00 1.47 15 9 3.3 750 798 2.84 0.953 800 16 7 3.4 74-9 10.5 43.i 14.47 15.0 13.43 1. 51 15 39 3.2 749 848 2.88 0.940 900 16 37 3.3 76.7 21.6 44.9 14.91 15.4 13.86 1.55 16 9 31 748 905 2.92 0.927 4000 17 7 3.3 78.5 22.8 46.7 15.36 15.9 14.30 1.59 16 39 3.0 747 956 2.96 0.914 RANGE TABLES 375 4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table {Continued) Shell and Shrapnel [Zone 3, M. V. 900 feet per second] 1 ' 3 | 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 n 12 13 14 15 16 i 1 tC *s <=>TT-I t5 bo c id "3 c < +1 < > < ■+'> u . Xc/5 la: < bo c «J . u < -p .G SP | bo .s ■4-3 1 u H s O to w Yds. ' jYds. Yds.Yds. Yds. Sec. Divs. Mils Mils 'ion F.S. Ft. 100 17 37 3.3 80.324.0 48.5 15.81 16.4 14.74! 1.63 17 9 2.9 746 1014 '3.01 0.900 200 18 8r 3-2 82.1 25.2 50.4 16.27 16.9 i5-i9i 1.67 17 40 2.8 745 1074 3.o6 0.886 300 J18 40 3-2 83.926.5 52.316.73 17.4 15.64 1. 71 18 n 2.7 745 1136 |3. 12 O.873 400 19 11 3.2 85.727.8 54.317.20 19.0 16.10 1.75 18 42 2.6 745 1200 3.17,0.860 500 19 43 3.1 87.5 29.2 56.317.67 18.5 16.56 i.79 19 14 2.5 745 1266 3.22 0.847 600 20 15 3.1 89.3 30.6 58.3 18.15 19. 1 17.03 1.83 19 46 2.4 745 1334 3.26 0.835 700 20 48 3.0 91. 1 32.1 60.4 18.63 19.7 17.50 1.87 20 19 2.3 744 1404 I3.30 0.824 800 21 21 3.0 92.9 33.7 62.5 19.12 20.4 17.98 1.92 20 52 2.2 744 1477 3-34 0.814 900 21 56 2.9 94-7 35.3 64.6 19.62 21.0 18.46 1.97 21 26 2.2 744 1553 3.38 0.804 SOOO 22 31 2.8 96.5 37.0 66.8 20.13 21.6 18.95 2.02 22 I 2.1 743 1632 3.42 0.795 100 23 7 2.7 98.3 38.7 69.020.65 22.4 19.45 2.07 22 37 2.1 743 1714 3.45 0.787 200 23 44 2.7 100. 1 40.5 71.2 21.18 23.2 19.97 2.12 23 14 2.0 742 1799 3.48 0.780 300 ;24 .22 2.6 101.942. 4 73.521.72 24.0 20.51 2.17 23 52 2.0 742 1888 I3.5I 0.773 , 400 25 1 2.5 I03.7J44-4 75.8 22.27 24.8 21.07 2.22 24 31 1.9 741 1982 3.54 0.767 500 25 42 2.4 105.4 46.5 78.2 22.83 25.6 21.65 2.27 25 II 1.8 740 2082 3.56 0.762 600 26 24 2.3 107. 1 48.7 80.6 23.40 26.5 22.25 2.32 25 53 1.8 740 2189 3.58 0.758 700 27 8 2.2 108.8 51.0 83.1 23.98 27.4 22.88 2.38 26 37 1-7 739 2304 3-59 o.755 800 27 54 2.1 no. 5 53.5 85.624.58 28.3 23.54 2.44 27 23 1-7 738 2428 3.60 0.753 900 28 43 2.0 112. 2 56.2 88.2 25.22 29.2 24.24 2.51 28 12 1.6 738 2562 3.61 0.751 6000 29 36 1-9 113. 9 59.1 90.8 25.91 30.1 24.99 2.58 29 4 1.5 737 2707 3.62 0.750 100 30 32 1.7 115. 6 62.2 93-5 26.66 31.0 25.80 2.66 30 1.5 736 2862 3.62 0.750 200 31 34 1.5 117. 2 65.5 96.2 27.48 26.69 2.75 31 2 1.4 736 3037 3.6l 0.752 300 32 45 1.3 118.8 69.0 98.928.39 27.69 2.85 32 12 1-3 735 13235 3-59 0.757 400 34 6 1.1 120.4 72.7 101.7 29.40 28.86 2.96 33 33 1.2 734 3470 3.55 0.767 500 35 40 0.8 122.0 76.6 104.5 30.53 30.32 3.09 35 13 1.2 733 3772 3-47 0.785 600 38 12 0.4 123.6 80.9 107.4 3I.8I 32.36 3.24 37 38 1.1 732 4196 3.32 0.815 64(X 40 0.2 124.2 82.4 108.5 32.36 133.89 ! 3-30 39 25 I.I 731 4390 3.23 0.841 376 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table (Continued) [Zone 2, M. V. 620 feet per second] I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 bo C a M c do < > Ji H < +i u a < ^JC0 < M ■2ft a bfl a a to a tM NT" 1 4J £ bo C '+» W Q 2 1 £ m c 2 +> w 0) U 'botJ 13 a CO '0 > 13 a 1 u H u J-. 2* O cm O to 0) > «M O w j3 13 > Yds. t Yds. Yds. Yds. Yds. Sec. Divs. Mils Mils / 1 onF.S. Ft. 100 I 3 2.2 3.2 O.I 0.2 0.48 0.4 0.63 0.04 45 74.7 616 4 2.69 1.009 200 I 47 2.2 6.4 0.2 0.5 0.97 0.8 1.27 0.09 I 29 37.8 612 8 2.67 1. 017 300 2 31 2.2 9.6 0.3 0.8 1.465 1.3 1. 91 0.14 2 13 24.5 609 13 2.65 1.024 400 3 16 2.2 12.8 0.4 1.2 1.95 1.7 2.55 0.19 2 58 18.5 606 19 2.63 1.030 500 4 I 2.2 15.9 0.6 1.6 2.45! 2.1 3.20 0.24 3 43 14.9 603 27 2.62 1.935 600 4 46 2.2 19.0 0.8 2.0 2.95 2.6 3.85 0.29 4 28 12.4 600 37 2.61 1.039 700 5 32 2.2 22.1 1.0 2.4 3.46 3-2 4.5i 0.34 5 14 10.6 597 49 2.61 1.042 8oq 6 18 2.1 25.2 1.2 2.9 3.97 3.7 5.17 0.39 6 9.2 594 63 2.60 1.044 900 7 5 2.1 28.3 1.5 3.4 4.49 4.2 5.84 0.44 6 47 8.1 591 79 2.60 1-045 1000 7 52 2.1 31.4 1.8 3-9 5.01 4.8 6.52 0.49 7 34 7.2 588 100 2.60 1.045 100 8 40 2.1 34-5 2.1 4.4 5.54 5.4 7.21 0.54 8 22 6.5 585 120 2.60 1.044 200 9 28 2.0 37-6 2.4 5.0 6.07 6.0 7.9i 0.59 9 10 5.9 582 144 2.61 1. 041 300 10 17 2.0 40.6 2.8 5.6 6.61 6.6 8.62 0.64 9 59 5.4 579 171 2.62 1.035 400 11 7 2.0 43-6 3.2 6.2 7.15 7-2 9-34 0.69 10 49 5-0 576 201 2.64 1.027 500 11 58 1.9 46.6 3.6 6.8 7.70 7-8 10.07 0.74 II 40 4.6 574 234 2.67 1. 017 600 12 50 1.9 ! 49.6 4.1 7.5 8.25 8.4 10.81 0.79 12 32 4.3 572 270 2.70 1.005 700 13 43 1.9 52.6 4.6 8.2 8.81 9.1 11.56 0.84 13 25 4.0 570 309 2.74 0.991 800 14 37 1.8 55-6 5.2 9.0 9.38 9.7 12.32 0.89 14 19 3.7 568 351 2.79 0.973 900 15 32 1.8 58.6 5.8 9.8 9.9610.3 13.10 o.94 15 14 3.5 567 397 2.85 0.951 2000 16 28 1.8 61. 5 6.5 10.7 10.55 11. 13.90 0.99 16 10 3-3 566 445 2.92 0.926 100 17 25 1.7 64.4 7-2 11. 6 11. 15 11. 7 14.72 1.05 17 7 3.1 565 497 3.00 0.900 200 18 23 1.7 67.3 8.0 12.6 11.76 12.4 15.56 1. 11 18 5 2.9 565 553 3.09 0.875 300 19 23 1.6 70.2 8.8 13.6 12.3813.1 16.42 1. 17 19 5 2.7 564 613 3.19 0.851 400 20 25 1.6 73-1 9.7 14.7 13.01 13.8 17.31 1.23 20 7 2.5 564 678 3.28 O.828 500 21 29 1.5 76.0 10.7 15.9 13.66 14.5 18.23 1.29 21 11 2.3 564 748 3.36 0.808 600 1 22 35 1-5 78.8 11. 8 17.1 14.33 15.4 19.18 1.35 22 17 2.2 563 824 3.43 0.791 700 123 44 1.4 81.6 13. oj 18.4 15.02 16.2 20.17 1.42 23 26 2.1 563 907 3.49 0.777 800 24 56 1.4 84.4 14.4 19-8 15. 7417. 1 21.21 1.50 24 38 2.0 563 998 3-54^ O.766 900 26 12 1.3 87.2 16.0I 21.3 16.50 18.0 22.32 1.59 25 54 1.9 562 1098 3.58: 0.758 3000 27 34 1.2 89.9 17.8 22.9 17.31. 18.8 23.52 1.69 27 16 1.8 562 11208 3.00 0.753 RANGE TABLES 377 4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table (Continued) [Zone 2, M. V. 620 feet per second] I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 - jd fe 4 M m c J ID O fl a> O f'-a M So M < -H> M ■d •So On? 5 O a bo w to d <-M P ,2 * s ° O « •43 O 09 a a) tans P c 1 4) ■d 5 "3 VM O O Pi JO 55 > ■§ u . 0> H O a a "3* d O 09 1 > *o xa Yds. ° ' 'Yds. Yds. Yds. Yds. Sec. Di vs.! Mils Mils ' |i"od|#.S. Ft. 100 29 4 I.I 92.6 I9.9 24.6 I i 18.18 19.8 24.83 1.80 28 46 1.7 561 1329 3.60 0.751 200 30 44 0.9 95-2 22.3 26.4 19.12 20.8 26.28 1.92 30 20 1.6 561 1466 3.60^.752 300 32 39 0.7 97.725.0 28.3 20.17 21.8 27.95 2.06 32 21 1-5 560 1633 3.580.758 400 35 0.5 100. 28.1 30.3 21.47 22.8 30.00 2.22 34 48 1-3 559 1862 3.49 0.778 500 33 50 0.3 102. 1 31.7 32.5 23.3723.9 33.12 2.40 38 32 1.1 557 2221 3.28 0.827 525 40 0.2 102.7 32.4 33-2 23.9624.9 34.14 2.46 39 42 1.1 556 2305 3.21 0.846 [Zone 1, M. V. 454 feet per second] 100 1 39 1.2 4.4 0.1 0.1 0.64 0.6 1. 16 0.06 1 21 41.9 451 5 2.66 1. 015 200 3 1.2 8.8 0.2 0.2 1.32 1.2 2.32 0.12 2 12 21. 1 448 11 2.63 1.028 300 4 22 1.2 13.2 0.3 0.4 2.00 1.7 3.50 0.19 4 4 13.9 446 20 2.61 1.037 400 5 45 1.2 17.6 0.4 0.6 2.69 2.3 4.70 0.26 5 27 10.3 444 32 2.60 1.043 500 7 10 1.2 22.0 0.6 0.8 3.38 2.9 5.92 0.33 6 52 8.1 442 47 2.60 1.047 600 8 .37 I.I 26.3 0.8 1.1 4.08 3.7 7.16 0.40 8 10 6.7 440 66 2.60 1.043 700 10 6 I.I 30.6 1.0 1.4 4.78 4.5 8.43 0.47 9 48 5-7 438 89 2.62 1.036 800 11 37 I.I 34.9 1.2 1.8 5.49 5.2 9-73 0.54 11 19 4-9 436 117 2.66 1.022 900 13 10 1.1 39.2 1.5 2.2 6.21 6.0 11.06 0.61 12 52 4-3 434 150 2.72 1. 000 1000 14 46 1.0 43.4 1.8 2.7 6.95 6.8 12.43 0.68 14 2S 3.8 433 189 , 8I 0.969 100 16 25 1.0 47.6 2.2 3.2 7.72 7.8 13.84 0.75 16 7 3-4 432 234 2.93 0.928 200 i3 7 1.0 51.8 2.7 3.8 8.52 8.8 15.30 0.82 17 49 3-0 431 286 3.07 0.878 300 19 53 0.9 56.0 3.3 4.4 9-35 9-8 16.83 0.90 19 35 2.7 430 346 3.22 0.837 400 21 45 0.9 60.1 4.1 5.1 10.22 10.8 18.45 0.98 21 27 2.4 430 415 3.36 0.804 500 23 45 0.8 64.2 5.1 5-9 11. 13 11. 9 20.18 1.07 23 27 2.2 430 494 3.48 0.779 600 25 56 0.7 68.3 6.3 6.8 12.09 13.3 22.06 1. 17 25 38 2.0 429 585 3.57 0.761 700 28 24 0.6 72.3 7.7 7.8 13.12 14.7 24.18 1.29 28 6 1.8 429 693 3.62 0.748 800 31 21 0.5 76.3 9.4 8.9J14.29 16. 1 26.71 1.43 31 3 1.6 428 830 3-6o 0.753 900 35 8 0.4 80.2 11. 5 10.1 15.87 17.5 29.96 1.60 34 50 1-4 428 1025 3-50 0.778 980 40 0.3 83.2 13.3 11.3 17-75 18.9 34.14 1.76 39 42 1.2 427 1265 3.2i; 0.846 378 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Range Table for 6 Inch Howitzer Weight of Projectile, 120 pounds. Normal Corrector, 60 ZONE 1 . — Muzzle Velocity, 464 feet per second Ang Le of <-M O ft JO O % > "a u H Range change due to 100-yard range change Maximum ordinate -O 0) U o3 ft Q It 1 US !3 ctj H "8 8 M > 1 u ^0 - bo •• G a$ O SjG '8 M Q Yards Mils Mils 1 on Ft. per sec. Yards Yards .3 § 2"S Yards Yards Sec. Mils 100 24 23 45 462 4 8 24 13 50 4 0.6 13 200 47 46 23 461 4 8 24 13 100 8 1.3 2.5 300 70 69 15 459 4 8 24 13 150 12 2 .0 3-7 400 94 93 11 458 4 8 24 13 201 18 2.6 S.o 500 118 118 9 456 4 8 24 13 251 24 33 6.2 600 143 143 7 455 4 7 25 14 301 30 4.0 7-5 700 167 168 6 553 4 7 26 15 352 38 4.6 8.8 800 193 194 5 452 4 6 26 16 402 46 5-3 10. 1 900 219 221 4-5 450 4 6 27 17 453 56 6.0 11. S' 1000 245 249 4.0 448 4 5 27 18 503 67 6.7 12 .9 IIOO 273 278 3.6 447 4 5 28 19 554 79 7-5 14.4 1200 301 308 3-2 445 3 5 29 20 60s 94 8-3 IS. 9 1300 331 339 2.9 444 ; 3 5 29 21 655 in 9.1 17.4 1400 36l 372 2.6 442 3 5 31 22 706 131 99 19. 1 ISOO 394 408 2.4 440 3 4 34 23 757 153 10.8 20.8 1600 429 448 2.1 439 3 4 37 24 808 180 ir.7 22 .6 1700 468 493 1.9 437 2 4 42 26 859 212 I2.7J24-7 1800 512 544 1.7 436 2 3 49 29 910 252 13.8 270 1900 565 603 1.5 434 2 3 60 33 961 302 15. 29.8 2000 632 672 1.3 433 I 3 73 37 10 1 2 367 i6.433:3 ZONE 2- -Muzzle Velocity, 629 feet per second 100 12 13 76 626 8 9 13 50 1 0.5 0.6 200 25 26 38 623 8 9 13 100 2 0.9 1.3 300 38 40 25 620 8 9 13 150 4 1. 5 2.0 400 51 54 19 618 8 9 13 II - 201 6 1.9 2.7 500 63 68 15 616 8 9 13 251 9 2.4 33 600 76 82 12 613 8 9 13 301 13 2.9 4-0 700 89 96 n 610 8 9 13 352^ 17 34 4-7 800 103 no 9 608 7 9 14 402 22 39 5-4 900 116 124 8 605 7 9 14 453 28 4.4 6.1 1000 130 138 7 603 7 9 14 503 34 5-0 6.8 RANGE TABLES 379 Range Table for 6 Inch Howitzer.- Zone 2 (Continued) 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 Angle of >> 1 Range change due to 100-yard ., . range Maximum change ordinate 1 a 00 n d S3 Q ft il M-i O e a d 1 mil 9f el- evation 1 point of corrector > 15 £ O «s So PL, O O bo c *o .to p Yards Mils Mils i on F ^? er Yards Yards i sec. Yards Yards Sec. Mils 1100 143 153 7 601 1200 157 168 6 598 1300 171 183 5 596 1400 185 198 5 593 1500 200 ; 213 4.8 1600 215 228 4.4 1700 230 243 4 1 1800 245 258 3 P 1900 26l 274 3 6 2000 277 290 3 4 293 310 327 344 362 306 3.2 322 3.1 338 2.9 354 2.7 371 2.6 2600 381 2700 j 400 2800 420 2900 441 3000 464 487 513 542 575 617 672 389 408 428 450 474 500 528 559 594 635 686 2.5 2.4 2 .2 2 .1 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.6 1.5 1.4 1 .2 59i 589 586 584 582 580 578 577 575 574 572 571 5 569 5 567 5 566 5 564 4 563 56i 560 559 558 557 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 28 33 38 47 64 11 11 II II 11 II 11 11 12 12 554 605 656 707 758 41 49 57 67 77 809 88 860 100 911 113 962 127 1014 142 13 1065 13 1116 14 14 14 15 16 17 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 158 175 193 213 233 5-5 6.0 6.5 7-0 7-6 7.6 8.3 9.1 9-8 10.6 8.1^11,4 8.6 12.2 9-2 13^0 9-7 13.8 10.3 14-6 10.8 15.5 11 .5 16.4 12.0 17,3 12.6 18.2 13-3 19. 1 1168 1219 1270 1322 1374 1425 1477 1529 1581 1633 435 18.3 27.1 1685 482 19.228.6 1737 540 20.330^4 1790 613 21.532,6 256 13 .9 20,1 280 I4.62I.I 305 15.222,2 333 15 -a 23 -3 363 16.724,5 396 : I7.4 25-7 1843 710 23.2 35.5 ZONE 3. — Muzzle Velocity, 900 feet per secoDd 100 6 6 172 896 16 13 6 8 50 1 0.3 03 200 13 12 86 891 16 13 6 8 100 2 0.7 0.7 300 19 18 56 ; 887 16 13 6 8 150 3 1 .0 I .0 400 25 24 42 883 16 13 6 8 201 ' 4 1.3 1-3 500 3i 30 33 879 ! 16 13 6 8 251 6 1.7 1.7 380 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE Range Table for 6 Inch Howitzer. Zone 3 (Continued) Angle of O Range change due to 1 oo-yard range change Maximum ordinate XI bo *o s bfl C d £ t d P, Q 'd ft 3 o, > "3 d 1 u HI r^ d M d > "3 ,3§ 3* u O a" g ■♦-» ^5 bo C H P 9 & P. O to > H H 0.2 H "o _C ID '0 £ > JO O u a •a bo "S O s p Yards Mils Mils 1 on ; Ft. per | sec. Yards Yards .3 g ft Yards Yards Sec. Mils 3600 255 283 3-5 772 12 12 8 8 1846 242 13-5 13.4 3700 264 293 3-4 770 12 11 9 9 ; 1899 258 13-9 13-9 3800 272 304 33 768 12 11 9 9 1951 275 14-3 143 3900 281 315 3-1 766 11 11 9 9 2003 293 14.7 14.8 4000 290 326 3-0 764 11 11 9 9 2056 312 15.2 15.2 4100 299 337 2.9 762 11 11 9 9 2109 33i 15.6 15.7 4200 308 348 2.8 760 11 11 9 9 2161 35i 16 .1 16.2 4300 3i7 359 2.7 759 10 11 10 9 2214 372 16.5 16.7 4400 326 370 2.7 758 10 11 10 9 2267 393 17.0 17 .2 4500 336 38l 2.6 757 10 11 10 9 2319 415 17.5 17-7 4600 346 392 2.5 755 10 10 10 10 2372 438 17.9 18.3 4700 355 403 2.4 754 10 10 10 10 2425 461 18.4 18.8 4800 365 414 2.3 753 10 10 10 10 2477 485 18.9 19.4 4900 376 425 2.3 752 10 10 10 10 2530 510 19.4 19.9 5000 387 436 2.2 751 9 9 II II 2583 536 19.9 20.5 5100 397 447 2.1 750 9 9 II II 2635 563 20.4 21 .0 5200 409 458 2 .1 749 9 9 II II 2688 591 20.9 21 .6 5300 420 469 2.0 748 9 9 II II 2741 620 21.5 22.2 5400 i 432 481 1.9 747 8 9 - 12 II 2794 651 22.0 22 .8 5500 444 493 1.9 746 8 8 12 12 2847 683 22 .6 23.4 5600 457 506 1.8 745 8 8 13 13 2900 717 23.1 24.1 5700 469 520 1.8 744 8 8 13 13 2953 752 23.7 24.8 5800 483 535 1-7 743 7 7 14 1.4 3007 791 243 25.5 5900 497 551 1.6 743 7 7 14 15 3060 833 25.0 26.2 6000 Sii 569 1.6 742 6 7 16 15 3113 879 25.7 27.0 6100 527 589 1.5 741 6 6 17 15 3167 932 26.4 27.9 6200 545 612 1-5 740 5 6 19 15 3221 991 27.2 28.8 6300 564 638 1.4 740 5 6 21 15 3276 I057 28.1 29.8 6400 587 671 1.3 739 4 6 25 15 3331 1133 29.0 31.0 6500 614 709 1.2 739 3 6 30 15 3387 1220 ' 30.1 32.4 6600 647 753 I.I 738 3 38 3445 : 1325 I 31.5 34-2 6700 693 805 I .0 738 2 49 3503 1488 33-3 3<5.6